GA33 0066 2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88 2 3720 Communication Controllers Extended Services Jul88
GA33-0066-2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88 GA33-0066-2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88
GA33-0066-2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88 GA33-0066-2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88
User Manual: GA33-0066-2_3720_Communication_Controllers_Extended_Services_Jul88
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 514
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
..
-----= ===
------
-- ----=--_
- --.-
IBM 3720 Models 1,2,11, and 12
IBM 3721 Models 1 and 2
Communication Controllers
Extended Services
System/370, 30xx, 4300,
and 9370 Processors
Publication Number
GA33-0066-2
File Number
S370/30xx/4300/9370-09
Third Edition (July 1988)
This major revision replaces and obsoletes GA33-0066-1.
Changes or additions to the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change.
The only major change in this revision is the insertion of a new Chapter 18, which describes 'Disk IPL
Information.'
Reference in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services does not imply that IBM intends to
make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM licensed program in
this publication is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's licensed program may be used. Any
functionally equivalent program may be used instead.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time. Any such changes will be
reported in subsequent revisions or Technical Newsletters.
Publications are not stocked at the addresses given below. Requests for IBM publications should be made to
your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
A form for reader's comments is provided at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed,
comments may be addressed to either of the following:
•
International Business Machines Corporation, Department 6RILG,
180 Kost Road, Mechanicsburg, P A 17055, USA
•
IBM France, Centre d'Etudes et Recherches, Departement 0798,
06610 La Gaude, France.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.
©
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1986, 1987, 1988
Preface
This manual is designed to help the teleprocessing specialist to operate and test
the IBM 3720/3721 Communication Controllers. It contains:
•
Instructions for IML and IPL from the operator console, and for setting up,
using, and changing passwords, files, and tables
•
Tests for components of the 3720/3721
•
Functions for disk, CCU, NCP, and EP
•
A dictionary of messages.
You will also need to refer to the following manuals:
•
IBM 3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
•
IBM 3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide,
GA33-0086
•
IBM 3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Configuration Guide, GA33-0063
•
IBM Token-Ring Network, Problem Determination Guide, SY27-0280
•
IBM 3725 and 3720 Communication Controllers, Principles of Operation,
GA33-0013.
Preface
111
Conventions Used in This Manual
Throughout this manual, the following conventions are used:
•
3720 refers to the IBM 3720 Communication Controller, Models 1, 2, 11,
and 12. (The model number is used when the information applies only to a
specific model).
•
3721 refers to the IBM 3721 Communication Controller Expansion Unit,
Models 1 and 2.
•
The drawing of a key means that you have to press that key. For example:
8
0]
{
(
SEND
means that you must:
- Press
(PF2 )
- Enter 1
- Press
(
I
SEND
)
•
Key letters, for example 0, within a screen point to additional information
not contained in the screen.
•
Hexadecimal values are represented as X'n'.
For example: 16 is a natural value
X'16' is a hexadecimal value
IV
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
How to Select 3720 Functions
The functions described in this manual can be selected from one of two screen
menus. Once you have entered the correct password, the 3720 function menu is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) -=->
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
CONFIG DATA FILE :
CONTROL PRGM PROC:
DISK FUNCTIONS
:
DISK IPL INFO
:
EVENT LOC DISPLAY:
IHL MOSS
IHL ONE SCANNER
IPL 3720
:
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
CDF
C
OF
011
E
IML
IS
IPL
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINK
LINK
LOAD
LOAD
OESeR FILE :
INTERF DPLY:
THRESHOLD :
IPL PORTS :
:
TEST
LK TEST REQ :
LK TEST RESP:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
LDF
LID
LTH
LKP
LT
LOQ
LOS
PF3: ALARM
MACHINE LVL TABLE:
MICROCODE FIXES :
PANEL FUNCTIONS :
:
PASSWORDS
:
PORT SWAP FILE
:
TOKEN RINC INTR
:
WRAP TEST
MLT
HCF
PAF
P
PS
TRI
WT
From this screen you can:
•
Press PFI to move the cursor to the system input area (SIA) in order to select
a function
•
Select one of the displayed functions by entering the acronym of the function
into the system input area
•
Press PF2 to display the CCU function menu
•
Press PF3 to clear the alarm area or display a waiting alarm
•
Enter T to terminate a function
•
Enter OFF to logoff the operator console.
The instructions in this manual for selecting functions assume that the 3720
function menu is already displayed.
Consult the table of contents for the description of the function you want.
If a function cannot be loaded, the following message is displayed in the SIA:
PRESS SEND TO DISPLAY FUNCTIONS MENU
Preface
V
Note: The Token-Ring Interconnection (TRI) function can only be used on a
3720 Model II and 12 with a token-ring attachment.
Warning: If the message MAINTENANCE MODE appears in the
upper part of the screen, call your IBM service representative
immediately.
VI
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If you press PF2, the CCU function menu is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CCU FUNCTION MENU
ACIBT PARAMETERS :
:
CCU STATE
CHL ADAPTER STATE:
DATA EXCHANGE
:
DISPLAY/ALTER
:
BYPASS CCU CHECK:
BYPASS ICC CHECK:
CCU LVL3 INTRPT :
CCU NORMAL HODE :
Q CCU DATE/TIME :
ABP
CST
CH
DEX
DA
BCK
BIK
IL3
NH
Q
DISPLAY LONG
: DL
: MOF
MOSS OFFLINE
: MON
t10SS ONLI NE
RESET ADDR COHP : RAC
RESET BRCH TRACE : RBT
IMMEDIATE FUNCTIONS
RESET CCU/LSSD : RCL
SET ADOR COMPARE: AC
SET BRANCH TRACE: BT
:
RESET CCU
RESET CCU CHECK:
:
RESET ICC
:
RESET I -STEP
:
SET I-STEP
: S
START CCU
: STP
STOP CCU
STOP ON CCU CHECK: SCK
STOP ON IOC CHECK: SIK
RST
RCK
RIO
RI
SIP
From this screen you can:
•
Select one of the displayed functions by entering the acronym of the function.
•
Press PF2 to switch to a 3720 function (see following page).
•
Press PF3 to clear the alarm area or display a waiting alarm
•
Press PF 1 to move the cursor to the system input area, in order to select a
function
•
Enter T to terminate a function
•
Enter OFF to logoff the operator console.
The CCU functions are described in Chapter 17 and the immediate functions are
described in Chapter 19.
Preface
Vll
How to Switch Between 3720 Functions and CCU Functions
It is possible to switch between a function displayed on the 3720 function menu
and a CCU function. To do so, use the PF2 key.
/f you press PF2 when a CCU function is selected:
1. The CCU function is disconnected and frozen.
2.
The name of the CCU function is displayed in the Function Pending area.
3. The 3720 function menu is displayed, see page v.
4.
Select a 3720 function.
5.
If you press PF2, the CCU function (that was pending) becomes active and
the 3720 function becomes pending.
6.
When you terminate the active CCU function, you return to the
function menu.
ceu
Press PF2 to make the 3720 pending function active.
/fyou press PF2 when a function from the 3720 function menu is selected:
1.
The 3720 function is disconnected and frozen.
2.
The name of the 3720 function is displayed in the Function Pending area.
3. The CCU function menu is displayed, see page vii.
4.
Select a CCU function.
5.
If you press PF2, the 3720 function (that was pending) becomes active and
the ceu function becomes pending.
6.
When you terminate the active 3720 function, you return to the 3720 function
menu.
Press PF2 to make the 3720 pending function active.
Vll1
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Contents
Chapter 1. Panel Functions from the Console .......•....•.............•..•••...•.•...•
Panel Information ..............................................................
Panel Function .................................................... ;...........
PF Key .....................................................................
1-1
1-2
1-4
1-6
Chapter 2. MOSS IML from the Operator Console ..••..•.•....•••..•••..•.•••.••...••.•
MOSS IML from the Local Operator Console .........................................
MOSS IML from the Remote Operator Console ........................................
2-1
2-1
2-4
Chapter 3. Scanner IML from the Operator Console .•........................•...•......
3-1
Chapter 4. 3720 IPL from the Operator Console ......................................•.
4-1
Chapter 5. Password Management ..........•...............•...•.•...••••..•....••.
Updating Passwords ........................................................... .
Management Password ....................................................... .
Local Console Password ...................................................... .
Remote Customer Password
Remote Maintenance Password .................. ............................... .
Displaying Passwords .......................................................... .
Temporary Activation of the Remote Maintenance Password .............................. .
Permanent Activation of the Remote Maintenance Password .............................. .
Deactivating the Remote Maintenance Password ....................................... .
Displaying or Resetting Logon Attempt Counters ..................................... .
Updating the Customer Identification .............................................. .
Password Recovery ........................................................... .
Local Console Password Recovery .............................................. .
Remote Customer Console Password Recovery ..................................... .
Remote Maintenance Console Password Recovery .................................. .
Management Password Recovery ............................................... .
Password Recovery Setup Instructions ................................... ........ .
5-1
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports .............................................•.........
How to Delete a Defined IPL Port ..................................................
PF Keys .....................................................................
6-1
6-6
6-8
Chapter 7. Programmable Line Speed (PLS) ........................••.........•.......
7-1
Chapter 8. Configuration Data File (CDF) Function .......................•............••
Upgrading the CDF ............................................................
Displaying the CDF ............................................................
Basic Frame Display ..........................................................
Expansion Frame ............................................................
Programmable Line Speed Display jUpdate ..........................................
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-6
8-6
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF) .................•...••.....•..••...•...•...••
Display Mode .................................................................
Update Mode .................................................................
How to Select the Line to be Updated .............................................
9-1
9-2
9-4
9-4
Contents
IX
PF Keys .....................................................................
9-7
Chapter 10. Port Swap ....................................•.•...•.•............
Switching Ports ...............................................................
Resetting Ports ...............................................................
Port Swap Function Procedure ...................................................
Port Swap Refused: Incompatible LIC Types .......................................
Hazardous Port Swap: Incompatible Line Protocols ..................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-6
10-8
10-9
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display ...•...........•••..•...........•...•........•...
Line Parameters ..............................................................
Parameters for High-Speed Lines ..................................................
Data Set Leads ...............................................................
Data Set Leads for High-Speed Lines ...............................................
Transmit and Receive Data ......................................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
V.24 - Non-Switched DCE Attachment .............................................
V.24 - Switched DCE Attachment .................................................
V.24jV.35 - Direct Attachment ....................................................
V.35 DCE Attachment .........................................................
V.25 (Autocall) ...............................................................
X.21 DCE Attachment .........................................................
11-1
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function •.......•..........•..............•..•
Allow 'Activate Link' ........................................................
Token-Ring Interconnection .....................................................
Token-Ring Interconnection Error Messages ........................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
Termination ...............................................................
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-4
12-7
12-7
Chapter 13. Wrap Test .................•....................•..............•...
Modem Level Wrap ...........................................................
NTT Cable Level Wrap ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
LIC Level Wrap ..............................................................
Tailgate Level Wrap ...........................................................
Wrap Test Selection ...........................................................
Wrap Test Initialization ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Data Wrap Test Pattern Selection .................................................
PF Key ..................................................................
Control Lead Wrap Test Pattern Selection ...........................................
PF Key ..................................................................
Wrap Test Start ..............................................................
PF Key ..................................................................
Wrap Test in Progress ..........................................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
Wrap Test Results ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
PF Key ..................................................................
Meaning of SCF, LCS, and SES Codes .............................................
Incorrect Data Wrap Pattern .....................................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
Incorrect Control Lead Pattern ...................................................
PF Key ..................................................................
Wrap Test End ...............................................................
13-1
13-2
13-2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-17
13-17
13-17
13-18
X
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Key ..................................................................
Personal Patterns .............................................................
Personal Data Wrap Pattern ...................................................
Personal Control Lead Wrap Pattern .............................................
Default Patterns ..............................................................
Data Wrap Default Patterns ...................................................
Control Lead Default Patterns ..................................................
SDLC Default Pattern (LCD =9) ................................................
BSC NCP - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD=C) ...................
BSC NCP - EBCDIC Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD =C) .......................
BSC NCP - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Pattern (LCD = D) .........................
BSC EP - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD=C) ....................
BSC EP - EBCDIC Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = C) ........................
BSC EP - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD=D) ......................
BSC EP - ASCII Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = E) ..........................
BSC EP Character Mode - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD =C) ........
BSC EP Character Mode - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD=D) ..........
Start-Stop - Seven Bits Default Data Pattern (LCD = 4) ................................
Start-Stop - Eight Bits Default Data Pattern (LCD = 6 or 7) ............................
LIC Type 1 (RS232jCCITT V.24) - NTT Cable (PN 6398782) Control Lead Default Pattern .....
LIC Type 1 (RS366jCCITT V.25 - Autocall) - NTT Cable ..............................
LIC Type I - IBM 386X Modem Control Lead Default Pattern ..........................
LIC Tailgate Default Pattern ...................................................
13-18
13-19
13-19
13-27
13-31
13-31
13-32
13-33
13-34
13-35
13-36
13-37
13-38
13-39
13-40
13-41
13-42
13-43
13-44
13-45
13-46
13-47
13-48
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests ..................................•.............
Definitions ..................................................................
Program Environment ..........................................................
SDLC Test Frame ............................................................
Link Test Function Procedure ....................................................
Before Starting .............................................................
Requester ...................................................................
Loading the Stand-Alone Link Test Program .......................................
Link Test Initialization Screen ..................................................
Options Screen .............................................................
Investigation Mode Screen ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Statistical Counters Screen ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Personal Pattern Screen .......................................................
Responder ..................................................................
Loading the Stand-Alone Link Test Program .......................................
Initialization Screen .........................................................
Statistical Counters Screen ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Meaning of SCF, LCS, and SES Fields .............................................
14-1
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-12
14-13
14-14
14-16
Chapter 15. Disk Functions .....................................•................
............................................. . . . . . . . . ..
Checking the Diskettes .......................................................
Copying the Diskettes ........................................................
Save Disk onto Diskettes ........................................................
Diskette Terminology ........................................................
Creating the Primary Diskette ..................................................
Creating the Secondary Diskette ................................................
Creating the 3721 Diskette .................................................... ,
Restore Disk from Diskettes .....................................................
Checking the Diskettes .......................................................
15-1
15-3
15-3
15-6
15-8
15-8
15-11
15-12
15-13
15-15
15-15
Ee Microcode Installation
Contents
Xl
Restoring the Disk .......................................................... 15-18
Diskette Initialization .......................................................... 15-20
Position Disk Recording Arm Back to Landing Zone ................................... 15-23
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs) ....•................•.•.........•...........••
Selecting the MCF Function .....................................................
Applying MCFs ..............................................................
Data and Disk Errors While Applying MCFs .......................................
Restoring MCFs ..............................................................
Displaying the MCF History Table ................................................
Displaying Old MCFs ..........................................................
Displaying New MCFs .........................................................
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
Chapter 17. Machine Level Table (MLT) ............................................
17-1
Chapter 18. Disk IPL Information .••...............................•..............
Display Disk IPL Information ....................................................
Change the Automatic Dump/Load Option Setting .....................................
Purge the Dump File ...........................................................
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-3
Chapter 19. CCU Functions ......••..............................•...............
Address Compare and Branch Trace Parameter Display .................................
PF Keys ..................................................................
CCU State ..................................................................
Channel Adapter State (3720 Modell and 11 Only) ....................................
Channel Adapter State Display .................................................
Channel Adapter Register Display ... ".,',.,....................................
Termination ...............................................................
Display /Alter ................................................................
Display ..................................................................
Alter ....................................................................
Display Long ................................................................
Differences Between the Display/Alter and Display Long Functions .......................
PF Keys ..................................................................
MOSS Offline ................................................................
MOSS Online ................................................................
Reset Address Compare .........................................................
Reset Branch Trace ............................................................
Reset CCU/LSSD .............................................................
Set Address Compare (AC) ......................................................
Address Compare Cancel ................................... ' ...................
Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace ...................................
Address Compare PF Key .....................................................
Machine Status Area (MSA) ...................................................
Set Branch Trace (BT) ..........................................................
Branch Trace Buffer .........................................................
Branch Trace Extra Records ...................................................
Example 1: Pending Lower Level Interrupt ........................................
Example 2: Higher Level Interrupt During Exit Instruction .............................
Example 3: Back-to-Back Interrupts .............................................
Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace ...................................
Termination ............................................ '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
PF Keys ..................................................................
Machine Status Area (MSA) ...................................................
19-1
19-2
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-4
19-5
19-7
19-8
19-8
19-11
19-15
19-17
19-19
19-20
19-21
19-22
19-22
19-23
19-24
19-27
19-28
19-28
19-28
19-30
19-33
19-34
19-34
19-35
19-36
19-38
19-38
19-39
19-39
XU
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Terminating CCU Functions
..................................................... 19-40
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions .....................................•..•.........
Bypass CCU Check ............................................................
Bypass IOC Check ............................................................
CCU Level 3 Interrupt .... ............................'.........................
CCU Normal Mode ...........................................................
Logoff .....................................................................
Query CCU Date and Time ......................................................
Reset CCU ..................................................................
Reset CCU Check .............................................................
Reset IOC ..................................................................
Reset I-Step .................................................................
Set I-Step ...................................................................
Start CCU ..................................................................
Stop CCU ..................................................................
Stop On CCU Check ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Stop On IOC Check ...........................................................
Terminate ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
20-10
20-11
20-12
20-13
20-14
20-15
20-16
20-17
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions ....................................
Conventions ...............................................................
Data Exchange ...............................................................
PF Key ..................................................................
NCP and EP Functions in an NCP Environment with PEP ...............................
Switching Control to NCP Mode ................................................
Switching Control to EP Mode .................................................
NCP - Line Test ..............................................................
NCP - Dynamic Store ..........................................................
NCP - Display of Storage .......................................................
NCP - Register Display .........................................................
NCP - Channel Discontact ......................................................
NCP - Address Trace ..........................................................
Address Trace Table Under NCP Version 2 ........................................
Address Trace Table Under NCP Version 3 or Higher .................................
NCP - Channel Adapter Trace ....................................................
NCP Scanner Interface Trace (SIT) ................................................
EP - Line Test ...............................................................
Level 2 and Level 3 Display Codes ...............................................
EP/PEP - Display of Character Control Block (CCB) ...................................
EP/PEP - Line Trace and Scanner Interface Trace (SIT) .................................
EP/PEP - Present Status on Channel ...............................................
EP - Display of Storage .........................................................
EP/PEP - Channel Adapter Reset (MSLA) ...........................................
EP - Subchannel Switching (MSLA) ................................................
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-4
21-5
21-5
21-6
21-7
21-15
21-17
21-18
21-20
21-21
21-25
21-25
21-28
21-30
21-31
21-35
21-37
21-40
21-43
21-44
21-45
21-46
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures ..............•......•...................... 22-1
Printing Cataloged Control Program Procedures ....................................... 22-1
3720 Procedure Tools .......................................................... 22-2
Directory of Cataloged Procedures ............................................... 22-4
Display a Cataloged Procedure ................................................. 22-6
Create/Copy a Procedure ...................................................... 22-8
Copy a Cataloged Procedure ................................................... 22-16
Erase a Cataloged Procedure ................................................... 22-17
Contents
XlII
Modify a Cataloged Procedure ..................................................
Execute a Cataloged Procedure .................................................
Catalog Procedures ..........................................................
Precataloged Control Program Procedures ............................................
CPOI - SDLC Test Frames (NCP) ...............................................
CP02 - 3270 BSC General Poll (NCP /EP) ..........................................
CP03 - 2740 Start/Stop Poll (NCP/EP) ............................................
CP04 - Start Address Trace (NCP) ...............................................
CP05 - Stop Address Trace (NCP) ...............................................
CP06 - X.21 Switched Line Test (NCP) ...........................................
Examples of Control Program Procedure Creation .....................................
Conventions ...............................................................
What to Do Once a Procedure is Created ..........................................
FEOl - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP) .........................................
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP) ......................................
CE02 - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (EP, PEP) ...................................
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP) ................................................
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP, PEP) .............................................
Cataloged Control Program Procedure Print-Out ......................................
22-18
22-20
22-22
22-23
22-24
22-26
22-29
22-31
22-33
22-34
22-39
22-40
22-40
22-41
22-45
22-51
22-58
22-63
22-68
Chapter 23. Correspondence Between Line Addresses and Scanners ....................•.•...
Basic Frame (Modell and 2) ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Basic Frame (Models 11 and 12) ..................................................
Expansion Frame 1 ............................................................
Expansion Frame 2 ............................................................
23-1
23-1
23-2
23-3
23-4
Chapter 24. Messages ..........................................................
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages ...............................................
Function Messages ............................................................
Common Messages ..........................................................
Channel Adapter State and Register Display Messages ................................
Control Program Procedure Messages ............................................
Data Exchange Messages ......................................................
Disk Function Messages ......................................................
Disk IPL Information Messages .................................................
Display / Alter Messages .......................................................
Display Long Messages .......................................................
Event Log Messages .........................................................
IML One Scanner Messages ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
IPL Port Messages ..........................................................
Line Description File Messages .................................................
Line Interface Display Messages ................................................
Link Test Messages ..........................................................
M CF Messages .............................................................
Operator Console Logon Procedure Messages .......................................
Panel Functions Messages .....................................................
Password Management Messages ................................................
Port Swap Messages .........................................................
Programmable Line Speed Messages ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Reset Address Compare Messages ...............................................
Reset Branch Trace Messages ..................................................
Reset CCU /LSSD Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Set Address Compare Messages .................................................
Set Branch Trace Messages ....................................................
24-1
24-2
24-13
24-13
24-17
24-19
24-24
24-25
24-29
24-30
24-31
24-31
24-32
24-34
24-35
24-36
24-39
24-40
24-42
24-43
24-44
24-45
24-48
24-49
24-50
24-50
24-51
24-51
XIV
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Stand-Alone Link Test Messages ................................................ 24-75
Token-Ring Interconnection Messages ............................................ 24-85
Wrap Test Messages ......................................................... 24-86
3720 IPL Messages .......................................................... 24-91
Operator Control Messages ...................................................... 24-93
Operator Console Information Messages ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 24-100
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area ....•..........••..............•................. 25-1
Scanner Information ........................................................... 25-9
CCUjScanner IPL Information ................................................... 25-10
Token-Ring Information ........................................................ 25-15
Chapter 26. Event Log ........................•....................... ........ .
BER Summary .............................................................. .
BER List .................................................................. .
PF Keys
BER Detail
PF Keys
26-1
26-2
26-3
26-4·
26-5
26-5
Chapter 27. Line Threshold .....................•....................... ........ .
27-1
Chapter 28. Microcode Change from the Control Panel .•......•................ ........ .
Error Codes ................................................................ .
28-1
28-3
List of Abbreviations ..............•...........•...............•.....•........... X-I
Glossary ...................................•......•.......................... X-3
Index .....................................•................................. X-7
Contents
XV
XVI
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Figures
12-1.
12-2.
12-3.
13-1.
13-2.
21-1.
21-2.
21-3.
21-4.
21-5.
21-6.
21-7.
21-8.
21-9.
21-10.
21-11.
21-12.
21-13.
21-14.
21-15.
21-16.
21-17.
21-18.
21-19.
21-20.
21-21.
21-22.
21-23.
21-24.
21-25.
21-26.
21-27.
21-28.
21-29.
21-30.
21-31.
21-32.
22-1.
22-2.
22-3.
22-4.
22-5.
22-6.
22-7.
22-8.
22-9.
22-10.
22-11.
24-1.
Ring Status Indicator Description .......................................... .
Initialization Error Description ............................................ .
Open Error Description ................................................. .
Characters to be Entered Before Data in Data Wrap Pattern ...................... .
NCP Transmit Control Byte for Data Wrap Patterns ............................ .
Switching Control to NCP Mode .......................................... .
Switching Control to EP Mode ................................... ......... .
Line Test Procedure .................................................... .
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test .......................... .
Line Test Codes ...................................................... .
MSA Field e and k Values for Dynamic Store ................................. .
NCP - Dynamic Store .................................................. .
NCP - Display of Storage ............................................... .
MSA Field e and k Values for Display of Storage .............................. .
NCP - Display of Register ............................................... .
AARR Bit Setting Codes ................................................ .
NCP - Channel Discontact ............................................... .
NCP - Address Trace ................................................... .
Address Trace Block ...... :................................... ......... .
Byte Expansion of Address Trace Block ............................ ......... .
NCP - Channel Adapter Trace ............................................ .
EP - Line Test ........................................................ .
Subroutines Used When Performing a Line Test ............................... .
Level 2 Display Codes .................................................. .
Level~3 Display Codes .................................................. .
Level 3 Error Codes .................................................... .
EPjPEP - Display of Character Control Block (CCB) ........................... .
CCB Areas and Byte Expansion (Part 1) ..................................... .
EPjPEP.- Line Trace and Scanner Interface Trace (SIT) .......................... .
Display Codes for Line Trace and Scanner Inter.face Trace ........................ .
EPjPEP - Present Status on Channel ........................................ .
MSA Fields e and k Values for Present Status on Channel ........................ .
EP - Display of Storage ................................................. .
MSA Field e and k Values for Display of Storage .............................. .
EPjPEP - Channel Adapter Reset (MSLA) ................................... .
EP - Subchannel Switching (MSLA) ........................................ .
MSLA Function Error Codes ............................................. .
CPOI Procedure ....................................................... .
CP02 Procedure
CP03 Procedure
CP04 Procedure
CP05 Procedure
CP06 Procedure ......................................................"..
FEOI - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCPjPEP) .................................... .
CEO 1 - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP) ................................ .
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EPjPEP) ............................... .
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP) .......................................... .
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP/PEP) ........................................ .
Message Areas ....................................................... .
12-3
12-5
12-6
13-21
13-21
21-5
21-6
21-8
21-9
21-14
21-15
21-16
21-17
21-17
21-18
21-19
21-20
21-22
21-26
21-27
21-28
21-32
21-33
21-35
21-36
21-36
21-37
21-38
21-41
21-42
21-43
21-43
21-44
21-44
21-45
21-46
21-47
22-25
22-27
22-29
22-31
22-33
22-35
22-42
22-46
22-52
22-59
22-64
24-1
Figures
XVll
25-1.
25-2.
XVll1
Machine Status Area for the Scanner ....................................... .
Machine Status Area for the ceu jScanner IPL ............................... . .
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
25-1
25-2
Chapter 1. Panel Functions from the Console
Use the panel functions to:
•
Display on the local or remote operator console the information given on the
control panel. The Panel/Console switch need not be on CONSOLE.
•
Perform on the local or remote operator console the functions that are
normally performed on the control panel. The Panel/Console switch must be
on CONSOLE.
Warning: When switching back from CONSOLE to PANEL,
make sure that the Channel Adapter switches on the control
panel correspond to the Channel Adapter Disabled lamps.
For 3720 Modell or 11, if the two-processor switch is not supported, enable only
the desired channel adapter interface switch.
(Refer to the 372013721 Operator's Guide for panel functions from the panel).
To move the cursor
Selection:
o
0 0 (I
SOl)
)
To select panel functions
Chapter 1. Panel Functions from the Console
1-1
Panel Information
Depending on the position of the Panel/Console switch on the control panel, the
following screens are displayed in refresh mode.
If the Panel/Console switch is on Console:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PANEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ==..>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INFORMATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL:
oe
e
INSTALLED CA:
CA STATE:
REQUESTED CA STATE:
E=ENABLED
D=DISABLED
HEX DISPLAY:
FE5
FUNCTION SELECT SWITCH: DISKETTE
POWER CONTROL SWITCH:
LOCAL
1 2 3
E D E
E E E
G
o
o
- PRESS BREAK TO SELECT A PANEL FUNCTION AND STOP REFRESH
o
The hexadecimal code (unless it is not significant)
G
The position of the Function Select switch
e
The position of the Power Control switch (3720 Models 1 or 11 only)
G
The channel adapters that are installed (3720 Models 1 or 11 only)
o
o
The state of the Channel Adapter Disabled lamps (3720 Models 1 or 11
only)
The state of the Channel Adapter switches (3720 Models 1 or 11 only)
To access the panel functions from this screen, press BREAK (ATTN).
Note:
The channel adapters are numbered as follows:
1 on
2 on
3 on
4 on
1-2
the
the
the
the
screen
screen
screen
screen
is
is
is
is
CAl,
CAl,
CA2,
CA2,
interface
interface
interface
interface
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
A
B
A
B
(l A
(l B
(2A
(2B
on
on
on
on
the operator panel)
the operator panel)
the operator panel)
the operator panel)
If the Panel/Console switch is on Panel:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PANEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INFORMATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL:
oG
e
HEX DISPLAY:
FE5
FUNCTION SELECT SWITCH: DISKETTE
POWER CONTROL SWITCH:
LOCAL
INSTALLED CA:
CA STATE:
REQUESTED CA STATE:
E=ENABLED
D=OISABLEO
1 2 3
E DE
EEE
.
G
o
- TO HAVE ACCESS TO THE PANEL FUNCTIONS:
1. GO TO THE CONTROL PANEL
2. SET PANEL/CONSOLE SWITCH TO CONSOLE
OR
- PRESS BREAK TO STOP REFRESH
To access the panel functions, set the Panel/Console switch to Console, or press
BREAK (ATTN) to stop the refresh.
Chapter 1. Panel Functions from the Console
1-3
Panel Function
When you have access to the panel
functions~
the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PANEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INFORMATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL:
G HEX DISPLAY NOT SIGNIFICANT
G FUNCTION SELECT SWITCH: DISKETTE
G
POWER CONTROL SWITCH:
LOCAL
- SELECT A PANEL FUNCTION (IPL. IML. CA) ==>.
IPL = GENERAL IPL
IML = MOSS IML WITH RESET
CA = ENABLE OR DISABLE A CHANNEL ADAPTER
INSTALLED CA:
CA STATE:
REQUESTED CA STATE:
E=ENABLED
D=DISABLED
12 3
E DE
EEE
e
o
o
- PFS : START REFRESH
GG
For the 3720 Models 1,2, 11, and 12
e eo 0
0
For the 3720 Models 1 and 11 only
If you select IPL or IML:
1.
One of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen depending,
on the type of console you have:
LINE CHECK 2 (IBM 3101)
COMM NOT READY 2 (IBM 3161, 3163)
SENDING (IBM PC emulating an IBM 3101)
1-4
2.
The IBM-copyright screen is displayed.
3.
Press SEND.
4.
The password screen is displayed.
5.
Enter the password.
6.
Look at the machine status area (MSA), to check the progression of the IPL
or IML.
7.
The 3720 function menu is displayed.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
/fyou select CA (3720 Modell only):
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PANEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INFORMATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL:
oG
e
HEX DISPLAY NOT SICNIFICANT
FUNCTION SELECT SWITCH: DISKETTE
POWER CONTROL SWITCH:
LOCAL
,CHANNEL ADAPTER STATE UPDATE:
- REPLACE ASTERISK ( . ) BY E OR D TO UPDATE ==>
INSTALLED CA:
123
CA STATE:
E DE
REQUESTED CA STATE: E E E
E:zENABLED
D-DISABLED
INSTALLED CA:
123
CA STATE:
E DE
0
e
0
••• 0
- PF5 : START REFRESH
o
Enter E (to enable) or D (to disable) below the channel adapter state, then
press SEND.
Chapter 1. Panel Functions from the Console
1-5
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PANEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PFI: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INFORMATION FROM THE CONTROL PANEL:
G
HEX DISPLAY NOT SIGNIFICANT
SELECT SWITCH: DISKETTE
POWER CONTROL SWITCH:
LOCAL
~FUNCTION
e
CHANNEL ADAPTER STATE UPDATE:
INSTALLED CA:
1 2 3
CA STATE:
E DE
REQUESTED CA STATE: E E E
E=ENABLED
D=DISABLED
INSTALLED CA:
123
CA STATE:
E D E
- REPLACE ASTERISK ( . ) BY E OR D TO UPDATE ==>
YOUR REQUEST TO UPDATE CA STATE IS TRANSMITTED: CA3
CAl CA2
- PFS : START REFRESH
... 0
PFKey
PF5 starts refreshing the screen. To stop, press BREAK (ATTN).
1-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
e
o
o
ENABLED
DISABLED
Chapter 2. MOSS IML from the Operator Console
You can perform a MOSS IML from:
•
The control panel. Refer to the 3720/3721 Operator's Guide.
•
The local console.
•
The remote console.
MOSS IML from the Local Operator Console
1.
8
To position the cursor
2.
o
0 8 (,
3.
SEND
)
To select the MOSS IMLfunction
One of the following messages is displayed at the bottom of the screen:
COMM NOT READY 2 (on a 3161,3163 only)
LINE CHECK 2 (on a 3101 only)
SENDING (IBM PC emulating an IBM 3101)
Chapter 2. MOSS IML from the Operator Console
2-1
4.
The copyright screen is displayed:
BBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBB
BBB
BBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBB
BBBB
BBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBB
II II III
II II III
III
III
III
III
II II III
I II II II
3720
MMMMMM
MMMMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMMMM MMMMMM
MMMMMMM MMMMMMM
MMM MMMMMMM MMM
MMM MMMMM MMM
MMMMM MMM MMMMM
MMMMM
MMMMM
M
MICROCODE (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1986
PRESS SEND TO CONTINUE
Note:
2-2
Some displays are not hot-pluggable, that is, they do not generate a
display if you simply plug them into a 3270 after IML. If no copyright
screen appears on your console after IML has completed:
1.
Check that you have connected the console correctly.
2.
Re-IML the MOSS. The copyright screen should appear.
problem persists, contact your service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If the
5.
Press SEND.
6.
The password screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
ENTER PASSWORD •••>
7.
Enter the password.
8.
MOSS will be in Customer Mode and all the functions described in this
manual can be performed.
Warning: If the message MAINTENANCE MODE appears in the
upper part of the screen, call your IBM service representative
immedia tely.
Chapter 2. MOSS IML from the Operator Console
2-3
MOSS IML from the Remote Operator Console
To perform a MOSS IML from the remote console:
1.
2.
3.
To position the cursor
o
0 8 ((
SEND
)
To select the MOSS IMLfunction
One of the follwing messages is displayed at the bottom of the screen:
COMM NOT READY 2 (on a 3161 only)
LINE CHECK 2 (on a 3101 only)
SENDING (IBM PC emulating an IBM 3101)
2-4
4.
MOSS is being IMLed, although the remote console is disconnected.
5.
Reconnect the remote console using the remote console logon procedure given
in the 3720/3721 Operator's Guide.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 3. Scanner IML from the Operator Console
Use this function to IML only one scanner. Before you IML a scanner:
•
Stop all the lines on the scanner using NCP facilities.
•
Make sure that MOSS is online (control program loaded).
•
If an IPL is already selected, either:
Wait until the current IPL is completed, enter T followed by SEND, then
select the IML One Scanner function, or
Cancel the current IPL by entering T followed by SEND, then select the
IML One Scanner function.
•
When a scanner IML is complete, you may IML another one by entering its
number. (There is no need to select the function again.)
•
If you do one of the following before the IML is complete, the IML is
canceled:
Select the terminate function.
Switch from the operator console normal mode to test mode.
Power off the operator console.
Notes:
1.
Scanner IML messages are described in Chapter 24.
2.
MSA fields m and n give information on the scanner. See Chapter 25.
Chapter 3. Scanner IML from the Operator Console
3-1
To IML one scanner:
To position the cursor
Selection:
CD 0 ( I
SEND
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:IML ONE SCANNER
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
)
To select IML One Scanner
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- ENTER:
THE SCANNER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1. 53. OR 54)
OR
==>
THE LINE ADDRESS (0 TO 27 OR 32 TO 63)
Enter the line address, or's' followed by the scanner number.
The correspondence between line addresses and scanner numbers is given in
Chapter 23.
When the IML is complete, the following message is displayed:
IML FOR SCANNER xx COMPLETED - SCANNER IS CONNECTED
To terminate when the IML is complete, use the terminate function.
3-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 4. 3720 IPL from the Operator Console
Use this function to IPL the CCU and IML the scanners.
Before using the 3720 IPL function, note that:
•
You cannot select a CCU function before IPL phase 2 (at which point the hex
display shows FF2 and MSA displays IPL PHASE 2).
•
When an IPL or IML function is already selected, you must first do one of
the following to select the 3720 function:
Wait until the current IPL or IML is completed, then terminate using the
terminate function, or
Cancel the current IPL or IML using the terminate function, then select
the 3720 IPL function.
•
After the 3720 IPL, MOSS is in MOSS-ONLINE status.
•
If you do one of the following before the IPL is complete, the IPL is
canceled:
-
Select the terminate function.
-
Switch from the operator console normal mode to test mode.
Power off the operator console.
Notes:
1.
3720 IPL messages are described in Chapter 24.
2.
MSA fields are described starting in Chapter 25.
Chapter 4. 3720 IPL from the Operator Console
4-1
To IPL the 3720:
To position the cursor
Selection:
o
0 GJ ( I
SEND
)
To select 3720 IPL
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: IPL
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- PLEASE CONFIRM YOUR SELECTION: Y=YES. N=NO ==>
Enter 'Y' to confirm the request, or 'N' to cancel it. The IPL starts immediately
after confirmation.
4-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
The following screen is displayed while the IPL is in progress, and remains until
you select the terminate function.
Machine Status Area
3720-1
CUSTOHER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: IPL 3720
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CCU AND SCANNER IPL
WARNING : SELECTING TERHINATE FUNCTION OR SWITCHING OR
POWERING OFF YOUR CONSOLE BEFORE 'IPL COMPLETE'
CANCELS THE IPL
PF4: STOP
PF5: RESUHE
No action is required. However, you may stop within a phase (PF4) and resume
(PF5).
If the automatic IPL/Dump option is set, and an active control program load
module exists on the controller hard disk, that load module will be automatically
loaded from the disk. Otherwise, the control program must be loaded over the
channel or link, or from the disk, via a host request.
When the IPL is complete, the following message is displayed:
IPL COMPLETE
Use the terminate function to terminate the CCU and scanner IPL function when
the IPL is complete.
IPL phases are displayed in:
•
The third line of the MSA (fields r to x). For a description of the MSA, see
Chapter 25.
•
The hex display. For a description of the hex display, see the 3720/3721
Operator's Guide.
Chapter 4. 3720 IPL from the Operator Console
4-3
4-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 5. Password Management
Use this function to update and display the passwords for the:
•
•
•
•
Password management function
Local console
Remote console in customer mode
Remote console in maintenance mode
Each password is from five to eight alphanumeric characters (nulls and blanks not
allowed). If you forget a password, refer to "Password Recovery" on page 5-12.
To load the password management function:
To move the cursor
Selection:
To select the password
management function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PASSWORDS
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOCOFF
SERIAL NUHBER:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARH
- ENTER HANAGEHENT PASSWORD ==>
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS:
UPDATE/DISPLAY/ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF PASSWORDS
DISPLAY/RESET LOGON ATTEMPT. COUNTERS
UPDATE OF CUSTOHER IDENTIFICATION
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-1
o
Enter the management password, then press SEND.
Note: When you select the password management function for the first time, or
after your controller has been relocated or re-setup, the password is IBM3720.
Once you have entered the management password the following screen is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PASSWORDS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ==->
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- SELECT OPTION ==>
1
2
3
4
5
S
7
8
9
10
= UPDATE
MANAGEMENT PASSWORD
LOCAL PASSWORD
= UPDATE REMOTE CUSTOMER PASSWORD
= UPDATE REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
= DISPLAY PASSWORDS
= TEMPORARY ACTIVATION OF REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
= PERMANENT ACTIVATION OF REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
= DEACTIVATION OF REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
= DISPLAY/RESET LOGON ATTEMPT COUNTERS
= UPDATE CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
= UPDATE
All the password functions described in this chapter assume that you have the
passwords option screen displayed.
When the 3720 is initialized for the first time, use options 1, 2, 3, and 4 to create
your own password.
5-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Updating Passwords
Selection:
0
SEN)
)
To update the
managment password
SEN)
)
To update the password for
the local console
( I
SEN)
)
To update the password for the
remote console in
customer mode
( I
SEND
)
To update the password for
the remote console in
maintenance mode
(
I
(
I
Or
0
Or
0
Or
0
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-3
Once you have made the selection, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PASSWORDS
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PFl: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- ENTER NEW XXXXXX PASSWORD ==>
( 5 TO 8 CHARACTERS)
PF8: QUIT
Where xxxxxxx is the type of password being updated.
Enter the new password and press SEND. All default passwords are IBM3720
except for the remote console in maintance mode, for which there is no default
password. Update them as soon as the 3720 is initialized.
Management Password
This password allows you to access the passwords function in order to modify or
display the local and remote console passwords.
If you forget the management password, refer to "Password Recovery" on
page 5-12.
Local Console Password
This password allows you to have access to the local console. If you forget the
local console password, call the person responsible for password management, or
refer to "Password Recovery" on page 5-12.
5-4
3720j3721·Communication Controllers Extended Services
Remote Customer Password
This password allows you to have access to the remote console in customer mode.
When logging on the remote console, you cannot enter an incorrect password
more than three times. If you do, the console is disconnected and this message is
displayed:
INCORRECT PASSWORD - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED
The remote customer password must differ from the remote maintenance
password.
If you forget the remote console password, call the person responsible for
password management, or refer to "Password Recovery" on page 5-12.
Remote Maintenance Password
This password allows the service representative to use the remote console in
maintenance mode. You are responsible for this password.
The remote maintenance password must differ from the remote customer
password.
The default remote maintenance password, as well as the remote maintenance
password that you have just created, are not activated, that is, service personnel
cannot use them. To activate them, either permanently or temporarily, use option
7 or 6.
If you forget the remote maintenance password, call the person responsible for
password management, or use option 5 (display passwords) to display all
passwords.
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-5
Displaying Passwords
Use this function to display all passwords and the status of the remote
maintenance password.
Selection:
o (I
SEND
)
To display all passwords
A screen similar to the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
3720-1
CUSTOHER 10:
SERIAL NUMBER:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PASSWORDS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
PASSWORDS ARE :
MANAGEHENT PASSWORD
LOCAL PASSWORD
REMOTE CUSTOMER PASSWORD
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD =
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD STATUS
=.
(P-PERMANENT T=TEMPORARY D=DEACTIVATED)
PF6:QUIT
o
If the remote maintenance password has not been defined yet, the following
message appears here:
(NOT YET DEFINED)
and the remote maintenance password entry field is blanked out.
5-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Temporary Activation of the Remote Maintenance Password
Use this function to allow service personnel to have access to the remote console
only once.
Selection:
To temporarily activate
the remote maintenance
password
The following message is displayed:
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN TEMPORARILY
ACTIVATED
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-7
Permanent Activation of the Remote Maintenance Password
Use this function to allow service personnel to have permanent access to the
remote console.
Selection:
To permanently
activate the remote
maintenance password
The following message is displayed:
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN PERMANENTLY
ACTIVATED
5-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Deactivating the Remote Maintenance Password
Selecdon:
To deactivate the
remote maintenance
password
The following message is displayed:
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN PERMANENTLY
DEACTIVATED
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-9
Displaying or Resetting Logon Attempt Counters
Each time you enter an incorrect password, the attempt is recorded and a message
displayed. You can display or reset the logon attempt counter.
Jro disJ1layJreset
logon attemJ1t counters
Selection:
A screen similar to the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
XX UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR LOCAL LOGGING
XX UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR REMOTE LOGGING
XX NOT ACTIVATED ATTEMPTS FOR MAINTENANCE LOGCING
- ENTER 'R' TO RESET THE COUNTERS ==>
PF6:QUIT
To reset the counters, enter R followed by SEND. All counters are reset at once.
5-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Updating the Customer Identification
Use this function to update the customer identification.
To select the
customer identification
update function
Selection:
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER I D:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PASSWORDS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA ISlA) a_a>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUt1BER:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- ENTER CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION (1 TO 16 CHARACTERS) ••>
PF6:QUIT
Enter the customer identification (1 to 16 alphanumeric characters, nulls not
allowed). Then press SEND.
Chapter 5. Password Management
5-11
Password Recovery
Local Console Password Recovery
There is a remote console: Select the password management function and display
all passwords (option 5).
There is no remote console: Perform the password recovery setup (see instructions
that follow).
Remote Customer Console Password Recovery
There is a local console: Select the password management function and display all
passwords (option 5).
There is no local console: Ask the local operator to perform the password
recovery setup (see instructions that follow).
Remote Maintenance Console Password Recovery
Select the password management function and display all passwords (option 5).
Management Password Recovery
Perform the password recovery setup (see instructions that follow).
Password Recovery Setup Instructions
Warning: All functional data (CDF, LDF, LKP, PLS, MCF) and
control program procedures that have not been saved from your
disk to backup diskettes will be erased by this procedure.
1.
Deactivate the communication controller from the host computer.
2.
Get the console wrap plugs and the keys to the controller doors.
3. Open the rear door of the controller.
5-12
4.
Unplug the cables for the local and remote consoles, and for the RSF link,
and plug the wrap plugs into their sockets.
5.
Open the front door of the controller.
6.
Set the Panel/Console switch to Panel and the Function Select switch to Setup
Test.
7.
Get the 3720 primary backup diskette and insert it into the diskette drive.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
8.
Switch the Power On/Off Switch to Power On, or if it is already on, press
Function Start.
9.
After approximately one minute, the following code is displayed on the hex
display:
10. Open the diskette drive door and close it again.
ll.~
3720/3721 Setup starting. If the next code displayed is EE6
(step 18), go to step 1 and restart.
12.~
The primary backup diskette is being copied to the disk.
13. After approximately two minutes, the following code is displayed:
The primary backup diskette has been copied to the disk.
If you do not have a 3721, go to Step 15.
14'IEIEIEI
Remove the 3720 primary backup diskette and insert the 3721
expansion diskette.
15.~
Remove the 3720 primary backup diskette, if you came from
Step 13; remove the 3721 expansion diskette, if you came from
Step
Insert the 3720 secondary backup diskette.
14.
16.~
The 3720 secondary backup diskette is being copied to the disk.
17. After approximately two minutes, the following code is displayed:
The CDF verify function is starting.
18. After approximately two minutes, the following code will be displayed:
The diagnostics routines are running. (This code flashes
intermittently while diagnostics are running).
19. After approximately ten minutes, the following code is displayed:
The setup is completed.
Chapter 5. Password Management
V
\,
5-13
20. Remove the wrap plugs and replace the cables into their sockets:
Cable
Local Console
Remote Console
Remote Support Facility
Socket
DIRECT ATT
LINK ATT
RSF
21. Close and lock the rear door of the controller.
22. Position the Function Select switch to MOSS IML.
23. Press Function Start.
24. When the IML function has been completed, the passwords are restored to
the default value IBM3720.
25. Close and lock the front door of the controller.
26. Use the password management function to create your own passwords again.
5-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports
If you have a channel-attached or link-attached 3720 that can be IPLed from a
host system, then once the 3720 is installed, you must first:
1.
Perform a MOSS IML, then
2.
Execute the Link IPL port function to inform the 3720 from which host
machines a 3720 IPL can be expected.
For a channel-attached 3720, the control program can be transferred
across the 'channel interface. You must indicate all the channel adapters
that are installed.
For a link-attached 3720, the control program can be transferred via a
communication line (SDLC link). You must give the characteristics of
the SDLC link that connects both 3720 controllers used for initialization.
Notes:
1.
No priority is assigned to channel adapters or link IPL ports. Whichever IPL
request comes first from a host is taken.
2.
If you switch to the CCU functions while performing the Link IPL Port
function, all IP L port data that you entered will be lost when returning to the
IPL Port function. (Switching between functions is described in the Preface.)
3.
Link IPL port function messages are listed starting in Chapter 24. The listing
will direct you to the specific message description and action.
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports
6-1
Selection:
EJ
To position the cursor
8 0 0 ((
SEND
)
To select link IP L port function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINK IPL PORTS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
- SELECT IPL PORT OPTION (0 TO 9)==>
o
1-8
9
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
=CHANNEL
ADAPTERS (DISPLAY ONLY)
LINK IPL PORT
= LINK COMMON OPTIONS
(CONTROLLER ADDRESS AND TIMERS)
= INDIVIDUAL
LINK IPL PORTS
PORT NUMBER:
LINE ADDRESS:
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
o
From this screen you can choose to:
•
Display the channel adapters that have been defined in the 3720 configuration
•
Define (or update) the link IPL ports and the options common to all the link
IPL ports
•
Display the link IPL ports and the common options, once defined.
The line address of the defined link IPL ports are displayed on line
6-2
3720j3721 Communication Controilers Extended Services
O.
If you selected option 0 (channel adapters), the following screen is displayed:
Use this screen to display the channel adapters that have been defined in the 3720
configuration.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER IC:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINK IPL PORTS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CHANNEL ADAPTERS
CHANNEL ADAPTER IS INSTALLED (Y)
CHANNEL ADAPTER IS NOT INSTALLED (N)
CA 1
CA 2
Y
Y
PF6: IPL PORT OPTIONS
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports
6-3
If you selected options 1 through 8 (individual link IPL port), a screen like the
following example is displayed. There is one screen per link IPL port.
To define a link IPL port, you have to enter its address and characteristics on the
screen shown below.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINK IPL PORTS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
-
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2:
LINK IPL-PORT 1
LINE ADDRESS (0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63) ==> 3
FULL DUPLEX (F) OR HALF DUPLEX (H)
==> F
LINK INTERFACE OPTIONS (Y = YES. N = NO)
NRZI
==> Y
OX FACILITY
--> Y
SWITCHED LINE
N
ANSWER TONE
==> N
~
RING INDICATOR ==> N
'"
DIRECT-ATTACH (D) OR EXTERN~CLOCK (E) ==>
DATA RATE (H = HIGH. L = LOW)
==>
ENABLE TIMER IN 0.1 SECOND INTERVALS
==>
::>
-
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF6:IPL PORT OPTIONS
CCU FNCTN
G
e0
PF3: ALARM
e
0
E
H
0000
.0
o
PF8:FORWARD
Enter the port address and characteristics, then press SEND. The port definition
is filed, unless there is an error. In this case, a message is displayed describing the
error. The default values are given on the Link IPL sheet in the 3720/3721
Configuration Guide.
C) This is the decimal line address that will be used as an IPL port. The MOSS
converts this number into an even hexadecimal interface address or an even,
or odd, pair of hexadecimal addresses, depending on the full-duplex or
half-duplex entry. Line addresses are listed in Chapter 23. If you specify a
line address for any of the eight IPL ports, you must also specify the
controller SDLC address and link timeout values; to do so, use the Link
Common Option screen.
Only a 3720 line address that is physically installed and configured can be
entered. If a non-installed or non-configured address is entered, the
following message is displayed:
CABLE DOES NOT EXIST
e
If you enter F (full duplex), the decimal line address is converted into an
even or odd pair of hexadecimal addresses. Data is transmitted on the even
hexadecimal address and received on the odd hexadecimal address. If you
enter F, you must enter Y on line O.
6-4 3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If you enter H (half-duplex), the decimal line address is converted to an even
hexadecimal address over which data will be both transmitted and received.
G
o
Specifies whether the data terminal equipment at the ends of the SDLC link
must operate in non-return-to-zero-inverted (NRZI) mode (NRZI = Y).
The NRZI setting must match the NRZI setting generated in the
channel-attached controller line macro that represents the SDLC link
between the channel-attached and link-attached controllers. If the link will
not be operated in NRZI mode, specify NRZI = N.
Specifies whether the communication line and modem constitute a
half-duplex facility (DX FACILITY = N) or a duplex facility (DX
FACILITY = Y)
This should not be confused with half-duplex or duplex data transfer. The
entry specifies only the physical characteristics of the communication facility
(line and modem).
o
Specifies whether the physical path making up the SDLC link is switched
(SWITCHED LINE = Y) or nonswitched (SWITCHED LINE = N). If
the path is switched, the controller can monitor the link for the 'ring
indicator' signal (RING INDICATOR = Y) and present an answer tone
(ANSWER TONE = Y).
A LIC Type 4 does not support switched operation.
o
o
Specifies whether the link-attached controller is to transmit an answer tone
to the calling station (ANSWER TONE = Y) to signify completion of the
connection. ANSWER TONE = Y is valid only for incoming calls on
switched lines (SWITCHED LINE = Y). An answer tone is required only if
the modem at the call-originating location requires an answer tone and the
modem at the receiving location is not capable of generating one. (Consult
your modem specifications.)
Some modems used outside the USA go off hook when 'data terminal ready'
is raised by the 3720. In this case, 'ring indicator' is monitored before 'data
terminal ready' is raised so that this situation will not occur until an actual
connection has been made (RING INDICATOR = Y).
For all other modem types, RING INDICATOR = N. (Consult your
modem specifications.) The Y option is valid only for incoming calls on
switched lines (SWITCHED LINE = Y).
o
•
If the modem supplies the clock, enter E. If the the link-attached 3720
supplies the clock, enter D (direct attachment). Consult your IBM sales
representative to determine the direct-attached clock speeds supported. The
direct-attached clock speed should be updated using the programmable line
speed function (Chapter 7).
If you entered D (direct attachment) on line 0, you must not specify a data
rate. If a rate is already displayed (H or L), delete it, using the DEL CHAR
key.
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports
6-5
o
The enable timer is used by the scanner to limit the waiting time for the
proper response from the line interface. Once it is loaded, the control
program can change this value. Specify the maximum wait time for modem
interface leads to respond to changes in the 3720 interface leads, such as
'data set ready' coming active in response to 'data terminal ready', 'clear to
send' coming active after 'request to send' has been raised, 'clear to send'
dropping in response to 'request to send' dropping, and so on. Zero will
result in an infinite wait. It is the default value of the ENABLTO parameter
of the BUILD macro. Consult your modem specifications.
How to Delete a Defined IPL Port
To delete an IPL port that you already defined, blank the address field on line 0,
using the space bar, then press SEND. The following message is displayed:
IPL PORT TABLE UPDATED AND FILED
6-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If you selected option 9 (link common options), the following screen is displayed:
Use this screen to define the link IPL port common options.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINK IPL PORTS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
LINK IPL PORTS - COMMON OPTIONS
- SDLC CONTROLLER ADDRESS (1 TO FE)
==>
PF3: ALARM
~
- TIMER VALUES (1 TO 4 DIGITS IN 0.1 SEC INTERVALS)
DISABLE TIMER
LINK ACTIVITY TIMER
PF6:IPL PORT OPTIONS
•
==>
==>
0002
0600
PF7:BACKWARD
Enter the hexadecimal SDLC address that will be used by the link-attached
controller when communicating with the channel-attached controller.
If no value is entered, CLDP will default to controller address X/OO'.
Q
If the modem interface characteristics at the link-attached controller are the
same as at the channel-attached controller, use the value that was generated
in the channel-attached controller DSABLTO parameter of the BUILD
macro that represents the SDLC link between the channel-attached and
link-attached controllers.
The disable timer is used by the scanner as a wait time before checking for
the proper response from the line interface when CLDP attempts to disable
the line. Once it is loaded, the control program can change this value.
Specify the time for the scanner to wait before checking that 'data set ready'
has dropped after 'data terminal ready' has dropped. Zero will result in
infinite timeout. The Common Options screen indicates the default timeout
used by a local NCP (200 milliseconds). If the SDLC link is a leased line,
the disable timer should be smaller (for example 0.1 second). Consult your
modem specifications.
o
Use the value generated in the link-attached controller ACTIVTO group
macro that represents the SDLC link between the channel-attached and
link-attached controllers.
The link activity timer specifies the time that the CLDP will wait for
communication from the channel-attached host before abending. Once it is
loaded, the control program can change this value. Zero will result in an
Chapter 6. Link IPL Ports
6-7
infinite timeout. The Common Options screen indicates the default timeout
used by a local NCP (l minute) for SDLC links.
PF Keys
PF6: To display the IPL port option screen.
PF7: To display the previous screen.
PF8: To display the next screen.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette every
time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
6-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 7. Programmable Line Speed (PLS)
Use the programmable line speed (PLS) function to update the speed of the
direct-attached lines for speeds above 1200 bps. When the 3720 is first installed,
the default line speed is 9600 bps.
Selection:
EJ
000(ISENl)
To move the cursor
To select the configuration
data file function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOt1ER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ...>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
= UPGRADE
2
= DISPLAY
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF1: HOVE TOSIA
-SELECT CDF OPTION (1. 2)
1
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF3: ALARM
...>
Chapter 7. Programmable Line Speed (PLS)
7-1
Select option 2:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CDF - DISPLAY OPTION
-SELECT ONE DISPLAY OPTION (1 TO 4)
1
2
3
4
= ALL
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF3: ALARM
==>
TO 4)
FRAME
= EXPANSION FRAME
= PROGRAMMABLE LINE SPEED
(2
= BASIC
PF6:QUIT
This displays your current configuration. If you do not have a 3721, the line 3
EXPANSION FRAME is not displayed.
Select option 4:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PFl: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PROGRAMMABLE LINE SPEED FUNCTION
- ENTER A LINE ADDRESS (0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63)
PF3: ALARM
==>
PFS:QUIT
Enter the address of the line for which you want to display or update the speed.
7-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) •••>
T: TERHINA TE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PROGRAHHABlE LINE SPEED FUNCTION - DISPLAY
- ENTER A LINE ADDRESS (0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63)
PF3: ALARM
••>
LINE ADRESS - 60
CURRENT SPEED = 9600
LIC TYPE - LIC1
PF4:SPEED UPDATE
PF6:QUIT
PF7:PREVIOUS LINE
PF8:NEXT LINE
From the screen you may:
•
Press PF7 to display the previous available line.
•
Press PF8 to display the next available line.
•
Press PF6 to quit and display the CDF option screen.
•
Press PF4 to update the speed.
Chapter 7. Programmable Line Speed (PLS)
7-3
If you press PF4:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
PF2: CCU FNCTN
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PROGRAMMABLE LINE SPEED FUNCTION - UPDATE
PF3: ALARM
LINE ADDRESS = 64
CURRENT SPEED = 9600
LIC TYPE
= LIC1
- ENTER A DIGIT ( 0 TO 7) TO UPDATE CURRENT SPEEED ==>
4 = 38400
o = 2400
1 = 4800
5 = 55855
6 = 245760
2 = 9600
3 = 19200
7 = RPQ
PF6:QUIT
Update the speed as requested on the screen. The following message is displayed:
NEW SPEED xxxx BPS WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT SCANNER IML
or
NEW SPEED USING RPQ WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT SCANNER
IML
To IML the scanners, refer to Chapter 3.
When you have updated the speed of the desired lines, terminate the function.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette,
every time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
7-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 8. Configuration Data File (CDF) Function
Use this function to:
•
Upgrade the configuration data file, when there is a change to the existing
configuration. To upgrade the CDP the MOSS must be in MOSS ALONE
state. See Chapter 25, Machine Status Area.
•
Display the configuration data file (LICs, lines, channel adapters) of the 3720
basic frame and 3721 expansion frame.
•
Display and modify the speed of direct-attached lines. This option is
described in Chapter 7.
Selection:
To move the cursor
To select the configuration
data file function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
-SELECT CDF OPTION (1. 2)
1
= UPGRADE
2
= DISPLAY
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
==>
Chapter 8. Configuration Data File .(CDF) Function
8-1
Upgrading the CDF
Select option 1 from CDP option screen. The CDP upgrade starts immediately
and is automatic. The progression of the upgrade is displayed on the screen.
When the upgrade is completed, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOYE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CDF UPGRADE STARTED
CCU INFORMATION FETCHED
CHANNEL ADAPTER INFORMATION FETCHED
SCANNER/TRSS INFORMATION FETCHED
CDF UPGRADE COMPLETED
A CDP upgrade does not initialize the channel adapter addresses (ESCL, ESCH,
NSC), but it initializes the line clocking information to the default value for new
lines only (external clock). The channel addresses have been set up by the IBM
service representative during installation, according to your instructions.
Warning: After each CD F update, you must perform the checkout
described in one of the following manuals, depending on your
machine and model number:
8-2
•
3720 Modell Feature Addition Instructions, GA33-0110
•
3720 Model 11 Feature Addition Instructions, GA33-0111
•
3720 Model 2 Setup Instructions, GA33-0112
•
3720 Model 12 Setup Instructions, GA33-0113
•
3721 Models 1 and 2 Setup Instructions, GA33-0114.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Displaying the CDF
Select option 2 from the CDF option screen. The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
CDF - DISPLAY OPTION
-SELECT ONE DISPLAY OPTION (1 TO 4)
1
2
3
4
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
4)1
PF3: ALARM
==>
= ALL (2 TO
= BASIC FRAME : ~
= EXPANSION FRAME ~
= PROGRAMMABLE LINE SPEED
PF6:QUIT
"
To display successively the contents of the basic and expansion frames, and
the speed of the direct-attached lines.
G
To display or update the contents of the basic frame.
e
To display the contents of the expansion frame.
e
To display or update the speed of the direct-attached lines. Refer to
Chapter 7.
This screen display shows only the configuration of your machine. If your
configuration has only a basic frame then the menu displayed would be:
1 = ALL (2 TO 3)
2
BASIC FRAME
3 = PROGRAMMABLE LINE SPEED
Chapter 8. Configuration Data File (CDF) Function
8-3
Basic Frame Display
If you have the Basic Frame option, the following screen is displayed on a 3720
Model 2 or 12:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIC DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LIC POS:
3
2
LIC TYPE: 01
04
03
LINE ADDRESS (A) AND
A I A I
PORT1: 0 4 4 4
PORT2: 1 4 5 0
PORT3: 2 4 6 0
PORT4: 3
4 7 0
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
6
7
4
5
00
00
02
00
CABLE 10 INFO (I)
A I A I A
8
4 12 4 16
9
0 13 4 17
10 0 14 0 18
11 0 15 0 19
PF4:UPOATE
3720-2
PF6:QUIT
A
0
0
0
0
20
21
22
23
PF3: ALARM
A
o
o
o
o
24
25
26
27
0
0
0
0
PF8:FORWARD
The channel adapter information is not displayed for a 3720 Model 2 or 12.
8-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
The following screen is displayed on a 3720 Model I or 11:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LIC POS:
3
4
LIC TYPE: 01
04
03
3720-11
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
6
02
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
CHANNEL ADAPTERS
YIN TPS
NSC
ESC
A
LINE ADDRESS (A) AND CABLE 10 INFO (I)
AlA IA
AI
PORn: 0 4 4 4 S 4 12 4
PORT2: 1 4 5 0 9 0 13 4
PORT3: 2 4 6 0 10 0 14 0
PORT4: 3 4 7 0 11 0 15 0
CAl
B
L
H
N
42
00 CO CF
N
00000000
TRA INSTALLED: Y TIC INSTALLED: Y N
TIC ADDRESS :16 17
PF4:UPDATE
PF6:QUIT
PFS:FORWARD
The TRA/TIC information is displayed only for a 3720 Model 11 or 12 that has a
token-ring attachment. You can display token-ring information on its own with
the token-ring interconnection (TRI) function (see Chapter 12).
Note: The line address is found in column (A) for each PORTn row.
The 'CABLE ID INFO' (I) codes are:
o Not installed
1 LIC 1/2/3 wrap block
2 LIC3 wrap cable
4 Modem attachment
5 Direct attachment
6 Autocall
Refer to Chapter 1 for channel adapter numbering.
Chapter 8. Configuration Data File (CDF) Function
8-5
Expansion Frame
If you have the Expansion Frame option, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CONFIG DATA FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LIC POS:
2
LIC TYPE:
01
02
LINE ADDRESS (Al AND
A I
PORTl :
32 4
PORT2:
33 4
PORT3:
34 0
35 0
PORT4:
CABLE
A
3S
37
38
39
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
3
4
03
00
10 INFO
I
A
0 40
0 41
0 42
0 43
(I)
I
0
0
0
A
44
45
46
0 47
I
0
0
0
0
A
48
49
50
51
PF6:QUIT
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
5
6
7
8
00
00
00
CO
I
0
0
0
0
A
52
53
54
55
I
0
0
0
0
A
56
57
58
59
I
A
0 60
0 61
0 62
0 63
I
0
0
0
0
PF8: FORWARD
Programmable Line Speed Display/Update
This option is described in Chapter 7.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette every
time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
8-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF)
Use the LDF function to bring line parameters together in a unique file, the line
description file, and to compute the weights automatically. The line parameters
are:
•
•
•
•
•
Address
Symbolic name
Protocol
Speed
Weight (once computed).
The line description file may be printed out at the host. The print procedure is
documented in Advanced Communication Functions for Network Control Program
and System Support Programs for the 3720: Diagnosis Guide, SC30-3181.
To position the cursor
Selection:
8 0 0 (I
SEND
)
To select LDF function
Note: The line description function messages are described in Chapter 24. The
listing will direct you to the specific message description and action.
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF)
9-1
Display Mode
When you select this function for the first time, a screen similar to the following
one is displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE OESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERM!NATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
ADDRESS
NAME
o TO 27
32 TO 63
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PROTOCOL
NOT DESCRIBED
NOT INSTALLED
SPEED (BPS)
PF3: ALARM
WEICHT
Go
- ENTER ADDRESS OF LINE TO BE DISPLAYED ==>
PFS:UPDATE
All lines are in either the NOT DESCRIBED or the NOT INSTALLED status.
G
o
NOT DESCRIBED indicates that the line is installed but not yet described
in the line description file. Press PF5 to describe it.
NOT INSTALLED indicates that the line is not installed. Consequently, it
cannot be described.
To describe the lines in the NOT DESCRIBED status, press PF5 and follow the
procedure explained under "Update Mode."
9-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
When you select this function after an update, a screen similar to the following one
is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE DESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) _a>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
ADDRESS
0
1
TO
4
6
7
TO
16
17
32 TO
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-12
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
NAME
PROTOCOL
START/STOP
PARIS-01
3
NOT DESCRIBED
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 5
START/STOP
PARIS-03
15
NOT DESCRIBED
PLANT-O 1
TOKEN RING
NOT DESCRIBED
NOT INSTALLED
63
PF2: CCU FNCTN
SPEED (BPS)
1200
WEIGHT
3.7
1200
- ENTER ADDRESS OF LINE TO BE DISPLAYED (0-27. 32-63)
PFS:UPDATE
PF8:FORVARD
PF3: ALARH
3.7
N/A
=->
(Token-ring information is displayed only for a 3720 Model 11 or 12).
In display mode, you are informed of the ports that have been swapped using the
port swap function:
4
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 5
However, this information does not appear on the line description file print-out
that you can obtain at the host.
From either screen, you may:
•
Select another line, and remain in display mode
•
Press PF7 or PF8 (if displayed) to display the previous or next lines
•
Press PF5 to go to update mode.
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF)
9-3
Update Mode
To go from display mode to update mode, press PF5.
How to Select the Line to be Updated
The line that you can update is
e of the preceding screen.
To update the previously installed line, press PF7.
To update the next installed line, press PF8.
If the line you selected is a token-ring attachment, the following screen is
displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE OESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE 7
PROTOCOL:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
NAME:
TOKEN RINC
- PRESS SEND TO TRANSMIT DATA
PF4:DISPLAY
PF7:LINE t
o
9-4
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
ADAPTER: 2 BASe
- ENTER LINE NAME ==> PLANT-at
G/O
3720-12
TIC pas : 1
TIC TYPE: 1
PF3: ALARM
G
o
0
PF8:LINE 3
Give the address, adapter number, BASB for the basic frame, TIC
position, TIC type.
The line name must not be more than eight alphanumeric characters.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If the line you selected is not a token-ring attachment, the following screen is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE OESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE :2
PROTOCOl:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
NAME:
SCANNER: 1 BASB
UNDEFINED
SPEED: NONE
-->
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
LIC POS : 1
LIC TYPE: 1
PF3: ALARM
8
8
o CD
- ENTER LINE NAME
0
- SELECT A LINE PROTOCOl ...> 0
o .. UNDEFINED
1 .. BSC EBCDIC
2 .. START/STOP CHAR HODE
3 • BSC ASCII
4 - START/STOP
5 - BSC CHAR MODE
6 .. SOlC HDX
7
AUTOCALL
8
SDl.C FOX
=
- PRESS SEND TO TRANSMIT DATA
PF4:DISPlAY
PF7:LINE 1
8/8
=
PF8:LlNE 3
Give the address, scanner number, BASB for the basic frame, EXB for
the expansion frame, LIe position, and type of the line selected.
If you have already described this line in a previous update, the protocol
and speed are also displayed.
o
The line name must not be more than eight alphanumeric characters.
CD
You must select a protocol from among those displayed.
Once you have entered or modified the line name and protocol, press SEND, to
transmit that information and to add line 0 (line speed) on the next screen. Do
not press a displayed PF key before pressing SEND, otherwise the information
that you entered will be lost.
Note: For autocalllines, you are not required to enter the speed.
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF)
9-5
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE OESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
LINE 2
PROTOCOL:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
NAME: NICEOI SCANNER: 1 BASB
SOLC FOX
SPEED: NONE
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
LIe POS : 1
LIC TYPE: 1
PF3: ALARM
e
o
- ENTER LINE NAME ==> NICEOI
- SELECT A LINE PROTOCOL ==> 8
o z UNDEFINED
1 = BSC EBCDIC
2
START/STOP CHAR MODE
3 esc ASCII
4 START/STOP
5 = esc CHAR MOOE
7 = AUTOCALL
6 • SDLC HDX
8 • SOLC FOX
(0 TO 19200 BPS)
- ENTER LINE SPEED ==> 0
=
=
- PRESS SEND TO TRANSMIT DATA
PF7:LINE 1
PF4:DISPLAY
o
=
PF8:LINE 3
You must select a line speed within the indicated range.
Once you have entered the line speed, press SEND. Do not press a displayed PF
key before pressing SEND, otherwise the line speed will be lost.
e
is updated with the line name and 0 with the new protocol and speed, as
shown in the following screen.
(',
9-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Machine Status Area
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
CUSTot£R 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE DESCR FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE 2
PROTOCOL:
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
NAME: NICE01 SCANNER: 1 BASB
SOLC FOX
SPEED: 9600
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
LIC POS : 1
LIC TYPE: 1
- ENTER LINE NAME ••> NICEOI
- SELECT A LINE PROTOCOL ••> 8
o • UNDEFINED
1 • esc EBCDIC
2 • START/STOP CHAR H<>DE
3 • BSC ASCII
4 • START/STOP
~ • BSC CHAR HODE
6 • SOLC HDX
7 • AUTOCALL
B • SOLC FOX
- PRESS SEND TO TRANSMIT DATA
PF4:DISPLAY
PF7:LINE 1
PFB:LINE 3
The weight is computed but not displayed on this screen. See "Display Mode".
PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
In display mode:
PF5: To switch to update mode.
PF7: To scroll backward in the line description file.
PF8: To scroll forward in the line description file.
In update mode:
PF4: To switch to display mode.
PF7: To update the preceding installed line.
PF8: To update the next installed line.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette,
every time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
Chapter 9. Line Description File (LDF)
9-7
I
\
9-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 10. Port Swap
If a link to a port is unusable because of a LIe or scanner failure, you may
logically and physically switch that link from its original port to a spare one,
without having to regenerate the control program. Port swap is not allowed for
link IPL ports.
Use the port swap function to logically switch the ports by exchanging
information with the control program, and to create/update a MOSS file (the
port swap file). You may display the port swap file at any time to verify the ports
that are switched logically.
To switch ports, you must comply with the rules listed below:
•
The new port must be a spare, which was not defined at system generation.
•
The original port and the new port must be compatible LIe type, cable type,
protocol, and speed.
•
The line connected to the port to be switched must be inoperative
(disabled/deactivated). It must not be an autocallline, an OEM line, or a line
under control of EP.
Notes:
1.
The port swap function can be performed only under NCP Version 3 or later.
2.
The port swap function messages are listed in Chapter 24. This list directs you
to the specific message description and action.
Chapter 10. Port Swap
10-1
Switching Ports
Switching ports is done in two steps: logical switching with acknowledgment from
the control program, and physical switching. It is recommended that you follow
the procedure in this order:
1.
Make sure that MOSS is in MOSS-ONLINE status (field c of the MSA). If it
is not, do the following:
To select the CCU functions
o
0 0 (I
(2] (
I
SEND)
SEND)
To set MOSS online
To cancel the CCU functions
2.
Disable/deactivate the line at host if it is active.
3.
Select and perform the port swap function, as described under "Port Swap
Function Procedure" on page 10-3.
4.
Once you have logically switched all desired ports and received message
x SWAPPED TO y (x and y being the original and new ports), physically
switch the ports.
5.
When all ports are physically switched, enable/activate appropriate lines.
Note: Every time the CCU is re-initialized, all the ports that you have switched
logically (listed in the port swap file) are switched another time. It may happen,
at this time, that a switched port can no longer be switched logically. This is
indicated in the port swap file by the message REFUSED BY CTL PGM
followed by the reason for the refusal.
Resetting Ports
When you reset ports (switch back ports), the port swap file is updated. All the
information about reset ports is removed. The procedure to reset ports is
identical to the port switching procedure described under "Switching Ports."
10-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Port Swap Function Procedure
To position the cursor
Selection:
o0
(I
SEND
)
To select the port swap function
When you select the port swap function for the first time, the following screen is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP
--->
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA)
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
.SWAP PORT ==>
3720-1
SERIA~
NlIHBER:
FI~E
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
TO PORT ....>
o
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3:
A~RH
PFS:FORWARD
.NO SWAP FILED
o
You are prompted to enter the decimal address of the original port
(SWAP PORT = = > ) and that of the new port (TO PORT = = > ).
Chapter 10. Port Swap
10-3
Once you have entered the addresses, the screen is immediately updated, if the
switch is accepted (see screen below). If it is not accepted, a message explaining
the refusal is displayed, (refer to "Port Swap Refused").
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
.ADDRESS----NAME-------PRTOCOL----------SPEED(BPS)--WEIGHT
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 62
PAR 1ST
SDLC FDY
4800
12
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 2
NICEOI
SDLC FOX
4800
12
5
60
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 60
DALLASOI
SDLC FOX
4800
12
8
55
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 55
SDLC FOX
BOSTONOI
4800
12
1
62
11
:2
.SWAP PORT ==>
TO PORT ==>
PF7: BACKWARD
8
SWAPPED TO 55
The NAME, PROTOCOL, SPEED, and WEIGHT are automatically displayed.
To display the port swap file, use the PF7 and PF8 keys.
10-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
e
The following screen shows on line
that port 58 is refused because the port was
not spare when the CCU was re-initialized.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
. ADDRESS- - - -NAME - - - - - - -PRTOCOL - - - - - - - - - -SPEED (BPS) - -WEIGHT
3
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 61
4800
NICEOI
SDLC FDY
12
61
7
59
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 39
NYCE01
SOLC FOX
4900
12
9
58
4800
NICE02
SOLC FOX
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: 58 IS NOT A SPARE
12
10
57
SWAPPED TO ADDRESS 57
NYC03
SDLC FOX
.SWAP PORT -=>
4800
e
12
TO PORT ==>
PF7:BACKWARO
Chapter 10. Port Swap
10-5
Port Swap Refused: Incompatible LIe Types
If you enter ports for which port switching is refused because of LIe
incompatibility, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
.AODRESS----NAHE-------PRTOCOL----------SPEED(BPS)--WEIGHT
.SWAP PORT ==> 0
TO PORT
PF4:DISPLAY 0.84
REFUSED: INCOMPATIBLE LIC TYPES
==>
84
I
IIq
10-6
3720/3721 Communication Controilers Extended Services
From this screen, you may press PF4 to display information on the ports for
which port switching is refused. The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
SERIAL NJHBER:
3720-1
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) •••>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
. ADDRESS- - - -NAME-- --- --PRTOCOL- - - - --- ---SPEED (BPS) --WEIGHT
LINE 0
NAME: LINEO
SCANNER: 1 BASS
LIC POS : 1
PROTOCOL: START/STOP
SPEED: 19200 BPS LIC TYPE: 1
LINE 54 NAME:
PROTOCOL: UNDEFINED
SCANNER: 4 EXB
SPEED: NONE
LIC POS : 6
LIC TYPE: 3
PF3: ALARM
~
~
.SWAP PORT ••> 0
TO PORT ._> 84
PF5:BACK TO LIST
REFUSED: INCOMPATIBLE LIC TYPES
~/~
show the LIe types that are not compatible.
From this screen, press PF5 to return to the previous screen and select other
ports.
Chapter 10. Port Swap
10-7
Hazardous Port Swap: Incompatible Line Protocols
If you enter ports for which port switching may be hazardous because of line
protocol incompatibility, the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER IC:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
. SWAP PORT ==> 0
TO PORT ==> 63
PF4:DISPLAY 0.63
PF6:QUIT
WARNING: INCOMPATIBLE LINE PROTOCOLS. PRESS SEND TO BYPASS
From this screen you may:
•
Press SEND to continue. The line protocols might not have been updated in
the LDF file. Therefore, port switching may be possible.
•
Press PF4 n,n to display information on the lines for which port switching
may be hazardous.
On a display screen, you cannot switch ports.
•
10-8
Press PF6 to cancel the current switch request, and select new ports.
3720/372.1 Communication Controllers Extended Services
(
If you press PF4, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: PORT SWAP FILE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
.ADORESS----NAME-------PRTOCOL----------SPEED(BPS)--WEIGHT
NAME: LINEO
SCANNER: 1 LAB: 1 LIC POS : 1
LINE 0
SPEED: 19200 BPS LIC TYPE: 1
PROTOCOL: START/STOP
LINE 83 NAME: LINE83
PROTOCOL: SOLC FOX
SCANNER: 3 LAB: 2 LIC POS : 8
SPEED: 19200BPS LIC TYPE: 1
PF3: ALARM
G
0
.SWAP PORT ==> 0
TO PORT ==> 83
PFS:BACK TO LIST
WARNING: INCOMPATIBLE LINE PROTOCOLS
G/O show the line protocols that are not compatible.
From this screen, press PF5 to return to the previous screen.
PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF4: To display information on the lines for which port switching is not possible
or hazardous.
PF5: To go back to the screen on which you entered at least one port for which
port switching is not possible or hazardous.
PF6: To cancel the current switch request.
PF7: To display the previous ports in the port swap file.
PF8: To display the next ports in the port swap file.
Chapter 10. Port Swap
10-9
10-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
You may use the line interface display function when modifying the network and
installing terminals, and when you need information about lines. This function
allows you to display:
•
The type of control program (NCP or EP)
•
Line parameters
Line interface standard
Line type
Line protocol
Cable identification
Transmission mode
Clock type
Speed
•
Transmit and receive commands, and command status
•
States of the data set leads (interchange circuits)
•
32 bytes of transmitted data
•
32 bytes of received data.
Notes:
1.
To take full advantage of the line interface display function, the control program
should be loaded.
2.
The line interface display function messages are listed in Chapter 24. The
listing directs you to the specific message description and action.
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-1
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the line function
secondary menu
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF DPLY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
ENTER A DECIMAL LINE ADDRESS FROM 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63-=>
o
11-2
PF3: ALARM
~
Once you have entered the address and pressed SEND, the line parameter
screen is displayed.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Line Parameters
The parameters of the line that you selected on the previous screen are displayed
as shown below. For high speed lines (230 kbps and above) refer to "Parameters
for High Speed Lines."
Machi ne Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF OPLY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
ENTER A DECIMAL LINE ADDRESS FROM 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63 ==>
LINE 42 10 IN SCANNER 3
G
e
0
CONTROL PROGRAM:
LINE TYPE:
PROTOCOL:
TRANSMISION MODE:
CABLE 10:
CLOCK:
SPEED:
CCITT
V24
OR EIA RS232C
G
0
0
~
e
NCP
NON SWITCHED
SOLC
FULL DUPLEX
HODEM ATTACHMENT
BUSINESS MACHINE -INTERNAL
1200 BPS
e
PF5:REFRESH PF6:LINE PARAMETERS PF7:LEADS PF8:DATA
~
You may request the parameters of another line by entering its address.
e
The following information is displayed:
•
The line address that you specified on the previous screen or on line ~
•
The line address in the scanner and the scanner number
•
The line interface standard:
CCITT V.24 OR EIA RS232C
CCITT V.25 OR EIA RS366
CCITT X.21
WIDE BAND
CCITT V.35
G
The control program: NCP or EP
G
The line type: SWITCHED or NONSWITCHED
o
e
The line protocol
The transmission mode: FULL DUPLEX, HALF DUPLEX, or HALF
DUPLEX RTS PERMANENT
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-3
o
The cable identification:
CABLE NOT INSTALLED
LIClj2j4 WRAP BLOCK
LIC3 WRAP BLOCK
MODEM ATTACHMENT
DIRECT ATTACHMENT
AUTOCALL
o
e
The clock type: BUSINESS MACHINE INTERNAL, MODEM, or
BUSINESS MACHINE LOCAL ATTACHMENT
The speed for internal clock, high-speed lines, and direct-attached lines
From this screen, you may:
•
Display the parameters of another line, by entering its address on line
•
Press one of the PF keys displayed on the screen. See "PF Keys".
G, or
Parameters for High-Speed Lines
If you selected a high speed line (230 kbps and above), the following line
parameter screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF DPLY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
ENTER Y TO FORCE THE DISPLAY OF LINE LEADS ==>
WARNING: REQUEST OF LEADS MAY DISTURB THE DATA TRANSMISSION
LINE lOIN SCANNER 1
INFT STANDARD NOT ACCESSED
CONTROL PROGRAM:
LINE TYPE:
PROTOCOL:
TRANSMISION MODE:
CABLE 10:
CLOCK:
SPEED:
PF3: ALARM
G
NCP
NON SWITCHED
SDLC
FULL DUPLEX
CABLE 10 NOT ACCESSED
MODEM
230 KBPS
PF5:REFRESH PFS:LINE PARAMETERS PF7:LEADS PF8:DATA
LINE SPEED MAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE
This parameter screen warns you that requesting high-speed line information may
disturb the transmission of data. It does not display the line interface standard
nor the cable id O. These two parameters will be added to the screen if you
enter Yon line G.
e
11-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Data Set Leads
If you press PF7 on the Line Parameter screen, the Data Set Lead screen is
displayed. For high-speed lines (230 kbps and above) refer to "Data Set Leads
for High-Speed Lines."
Machi ne Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF DPLY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
G
ENTER A DECIMAL LINE ADDRESS FROM 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 83 ==>
LINE 42 10 IN SCANNER 3
CCITT V24 OR EIA RS232C
XMIT CHD: SDLC XHIT DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
RCV CHD: SDLC RCV DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
MODEM-OUT DTR ON }
RTS ON
NS
HODEM- IN DSR
RFS
RI
CD
DRS
MT
ON}
ON
ON
ON
.
G
43
o
TI
PF5:REFRESH PF8:LINE PARAMETERS PF7:LEADS PF8:DATA
The line interface standard is indicated on line
G.
Warning: When a data set lead is off, OFF is not displayed on the
screen. For example, in the above screen DRS means DRS OFF.
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-5
CCITT V.24 nonswitched DCE attachment
Go to page 11-10
CCITT V.24 switched DCE attachment
Go to page 11-11
CCITT V.24/V.35 direct attachment
Go to page 11-12
CCITT V.35 DCE attachment
Go to page 11-13
CCITT V.25 (autocall)
Go to page 11-14
CCITT X.21 DCE attachment
Go to page 11-15
Wide Band
o and G Refer to lines G and G on the Line Parameter screen
o
The last transmit and receive commands
•
The status of the transmit and receive commands
G
Modem-out data set leads: DCE-source
o
Modem-in data set leads: DTE-source
The abbreviations used on the Data Set Lead screens are the following:
For CCITT V24 and V35, Wide Band:
CD -
(109) Data Channel Received Line Signal Detector
(for CCITT V.24 only, CD is not significant in case of direct
attachment)
RFS - (106) Ready For Sending (CTS)
DSR - (107) Data Set Ready
DTR - (108/2) Data Terminal Ready
MT - Modem Test
DRS - (111) Data signaling Rate Selected
NS - New Sync (for CCITT V.24 only, NS is not significant in case of
direct attachment)
RI (125) Ring Indicator
RTS - (105) Request to Send
TI (142) Test Indicator
AGC - Automatic Gain Control
For CCITT V.25:
ACR - (205) Abandon Call and Retry
DSC - (204) Distant Station Connected
CRQ - (202) Call Request
DLO - (203) Data Line Occupied
DPR - (211) Digit Present
PND - (210) Present Next Digit
PWI - (213) Power Indication
NB8 - Digit signal 8
NB4 - Digit signal 4
NB2 - Digit signal 2
NB 1 - Digit signal 1
11-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
For CCITT X.21:
CI RT-
Control
Indicator
Receive
Transmit
From this screen, you may:
•
Display the data set leads of another line by entering its address on line
•
Press one of the PF keys displayed on the screen. See "PF Keys".
G or
Data Set Leads for High-Speed Lines
If you selected a high-speed line (230 kbps and above), the following screen is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF OPLY
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
ENTER Y TO FORCE THE DISPLAY OF LINE LEADS ==>
WARNING: REQUEST OF LEADS HAY DISTURB THE DATA TRANSHISSION
LINE 1 0 IN SCANNER 1
INFT STANDARD NOT ACCESSED
XHIT CHD: SOLC XHIT DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
PF3: ALARM
G
RCV CHD: SDLC RCV DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
PF5:REFRESH PF6:LINE PARAMETERS PF7:LEADS PF8:DATA
LINE SPEED HAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE
The Data Set Lead screen warns you that requesting high-speed line control leads
may disturb the transmission of data. It does not display the line interface
standard G nor the data set leads. They will be added if you enter Y on line G.
It might happen that the scanner cannot provide the data set leads, in which case
the following message is displayed:
LINE SPEED IS 230 KBPS OR ABOVE: LEAD STATE NOT ACCESSIBLE
You may terminate the function, using the terminate function, select another line,
or press a displayed PF key.
The Transmit and Receive Data screen is displayed when you press PF8 on the
Line Parameter screen or the Data Set Lead screen.
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-7
Transmit and Receive Data
The Transmit and Receive Data screen is displayed when you press PF8 on the
Line Parameter or on the Data Set Lead screen.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE INTERF DPLY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
e
ENTER A DECIMAL LINE ADDRESS FROM 0 TO 28 AND 32 TO 63
LINE 42 10 IN SCANNER 3
~
~
{
~
CCITT V24 OR EIA RS232C
XMIT CMO: SOLC XMIT DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
RCV CMD: SOLC RCV DATA
STATUS: IN-PROGRESS
SAMPLING OF XMIT
EA EB EC ED EE
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
FA FB FC FD FE
02 03 04 05 06
SAMPLING OF RCV DATA
F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC
FE FF 00 01 02 03 04
06 07 08 09 OA 08 CC
CE CF DO Dl D2 D3 D4
DATA
EF FO
F7 F8
FF 00
07 08
Fl
F9
01
09
4)
}
FD
05
CD
D5
e
•
PF5:REFRESH PF6:LINE PARAMETERS PF7:LEADS PF8:DATA
e and e refer to lines e and e on the Line Characteristic screen
Note: If you enter a new address on this screen, the line interface standard will
not be accessed. INTF STANDARD NOT ACCESSED will be displayed. 4)
and. Refer to lines 4) and. on the Data Set Lead screen
o
32 bytes of transmit data from the buffer
4) 32 bytes of receive data from the buffer
From this screen, you may:
11-8
•
Display the transmit and receive data of another line, by entering its address
on line
or
•
Press one of the PF keys ~ displayed on the screen.
e,
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF5: To refresh displayed line parameters, data set leads, or data. This allows
you to view permanently the updated image of the information that you selected.
To cancel the refresh mode, press BREAK (ATTN).
PF6: To display the parameters of the line that you selected.
PF7: To display the data set leads of the line that you selected.
PF8: To display the transmitted and received data of the line that you selected.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette every
time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-9
V.24 - Non-Switched DeE Attachment
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
DSR OFF
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
DTR OFF
- Activate the line (host side).
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
Duplex lines:
RTS OFF and
RFS OFF
- Check if RTS PERMANENT on Line Parameter screen. Press PF6.
-If permanent, activate the line.
-If not permanent, check the scanner and the system generation
parameters.
Duplex lines:
RTS ON and
RFS OFF
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
Half-duplex lines:
RTS and RFS do not flash
Because of synchronization between the refresh rate and the transmission
rate, data may never appear. To verify if data is being transmitted, press
PF8. If no data:
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
Half-duplex lines:
RTS ON and
RFS OFF
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
Point-to-point:
CD OFF
- Check data transmission. Press PF8.
If no data in receive buffer, suspect network problem.
Multipoint:
CD ON steady
- Check the local DCE, the link, or the remote site (network problem).
TION
- Reset the DCE test switch to normal operating position.
DRS OFF
ORSON
No action required. You may check that the speed matches that displayed on
the Line Parameter screen (PF6).
MTON
- Reset test condition at the host side.
NS
Not significant
RION
Not significant
All data set leads are OK but
there is traffic only on transmit
side
- Check terminal configuration at remote site and control program generation
parameters (for example, the remote terminal address, NRZI, or non-NRZI).
11-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
V.24 - Switched DeE Attachment
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
If 10811 (Connect Data Set to
Line)
DTRON
- Check the system generation parameters and line parameters (PF6).
If parameters OK, and RI = ON, check the DCE.
If 108/2 (Data Terminal Ready)
DTR OFF
- Activate the line (host side).
Auto-answer line 10811
(Connect Data Set to Line) or
10812 (Data Terminal Ready)
RI OFF and
DSR OFF
Incoming call: - Check the transmission line.
- Check the DCE.
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
RTS and RFS do not flash
- Check data transmission. Press PFB.
If no data:
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
CD OFF
- Check the DCE.
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
- Check the remote site or the system generation parameters.
TION
Significant only if DSR is ON. In this case, reset the DCE test switch to the
normal operating position.
MTON
- Reset test condition at the host side.
NS
Not significant
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-11
V.24/V.35 - Direct Attachment
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
DTR OFF
- Enable the line at the host side.
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
RFS OFF
DSR OFF
Same actions as DTR OFF
RTS OFF
CD OFF
All other data set leads are not
significant
(
\'-1
11-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
V.35 DeE Attachment
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead Is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
OSR OFF
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
OTR OFF
- Activate the line (host side).
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
Duplex lines:
RTS OFF
and
RFS OFF
- Check if RTS PERMANENT on Line Parameter screen. Press PF6.
-If permanent, activate the line.
- If not permanent, check the scanner and the system generation
parameters.
Duplex lines:
RTSON
and
RFS OFF
- Check the DTE-to-DCE cable connection.
- Check if the DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-13
V.25 (Autocall)
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
PWIOFF
- Check if the Automatic Calling Unit (ACU) is powered on.
- Check the ACU-to-DTE cable connection.
CRQ OFF
- Activate the ACU line (host side).
DLO OFF
- Check the ACU.
- Suspect the ACU-to-DCE cable.
PND does not flash
- Check the ACU.
- Suspect the ACU-to-DCE cable.
- If the cable is OK, suspect the network.
DPR does not flash
- Check the ACU-to-DCE cable.
- If OK, contact the appropriate service representative.
ACRON
- Check the ACU line. If OK, suspect the network.
RSE OFF (DSC)
-
11-14
Check the ACU line. If OK, suspect the network.
Press PF6 to display the Line Parameter screen.
Enter the address of the Data Transmission line, then press SEND.
Check the line parameters.
PF7 to display the data set leads according to the V.24 - Switched DCE
Attachment list, on page 11-11.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
X.21 DeE Attachment
1.
Scan this data set lead list.
2.
Perform the actions for the first lead listed in error.
3.
Restart transmission activity without performing the action for the next lead in error, if any.
If on the screen, the STATUS of
the data set lead Is:
Perform the following ACTIONS:
TOFF
C OFF
DTE not ready:
- Check the line parameters (PF6).
- If the problem persists, contact the appropriate 3720 service representative.
RON
I OFF
DCE not ready:
- Check if DCE is powered on and correctly connected.
- If the problem persists, contact the public switched network service
representative.
Chapter 11. Line Interface Display
11-15
11-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function
The token-ring interconnection (TRI) function provides the information relative
to the status and activity of a selected token-ring interface coupler (TIC). In
addition, a function is provided that will allow an "activate link" command to be
performed at the host. There are three basic functions available:
1.
Give status of the token-ring.
2.
Provide problem determination.
3.
Show token-ring activity.
This function can be used only on a 3720 Model 11 or 12 that has a token-ring
attachment.
Selection:
To position the cursor
000 ( I
SEtt1
)
To select the token-ring interconnection
function.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRI
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-11
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ==>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
TRA/TIC SELECT
• ENTER A DECIMAL LINE ADDRESS XX TO YY
TRA~
===>
LINE ADDRESS
TIC'S
• TYPE 'A' TO ALLOW 'ACTIVATE LINK' COMMAND ••> _
PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function
12-1
The table containing the installed TRAs, TIC, and corresponding line addresses
will be filled according to the configuration of the machine.
Allow 'Activate Link'
If the operator enters a line number and an 'A' in the space provided, the Allow
Activate Link function will be performed. This function is needed if:
1.
An automatic TIC dump is requested by NTRI, which causes the activate link
(from the host) to be inhibited.
2.
Before the autodump is completed, MOSS goes down or is unable to
complete the dump and does not re-enable the activate link.
Successful completion of this function will allow the host operator to activate the
token-ring attachment.
Token-Ring Interconnection
If the operator enters a valid line address only, the following screen is displayed:
o
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRI
3720-11
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
TOKEN RING INTERCONNECTION
NODE ADDR:
GROUP ADDRESS:
FUNCTIONAL ADDR: _ _ _
G
RING STATUS:
SIGNAL LOSS:
HARD ERROR:
SOFT ERROR:
TRANSMIT BEACON:
LOBE WIRE FAULT:
IR
BR
AUTO-REMOVAL ERROR 1: _
< TRI ERROR
<
MESSAGE
PF5:
o
12-2
REMOVE RECEIVED:
0
REFRESH
> COUNTER OVERFLOW:
>
AREA
PF6:
SINGLE STATION:
RING RECOVERY:
SELECT
The third line of the MSA contains the following information:
•
TRA 02
•
TRA mode (connect, disconnect or unknown)
•
TIC ID (1 or 2)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
•
G
e
e
TIC mode (idle, reset, initialized, open, closed, frozen, or disabled, see
page 25-15 and 25-16).
Node, group, functional addresses of the token-ring (in hex). This is
obtained from the TIC OPEN block (from NTRI).
TRM activity information: A display of the IR/BR bits of the selected TRA
and TIC ('on' or blank). The IR bit indicates that an interrupt is pending
from the selected TIC. The BR bit indicates that a data transfer request
(DMA) is pending for the TIC. A change of these values during refresh
indicates activity for the selected TIC.
Token-Ring Status: Selected bits from the token-ring status block (from
NTRI). The indicators are either 'on' or blank. Refer to the Figure on page
12-2.
The meaning of each ring status indicator is given below.
Ring Status
Indicator
Description
SIGNAL LOSS
A receiver exception currently exists in the TIC. The TIC is not receiving signals
from the ring. This is a temporary condition and will either be recovered by the
ring protocol or will go into a beacon condition (see HARD ERROR).
HARD ERROR
The TIC is transmitting or repeating beacon MAC frames. (See also
TRANSMIT BEACON). If this remains for more than 30 seconds, see the
Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide. Reactivate the link if
necessary.
The TIC has transmitted a soft error report frame. This is ring-recoverable. No
action required.
SOFT ERROR
TRANSMIT
BEACON
LOBE WIRE
FAULT
Used in conjunction with HARD ERROR. If both indicators are on, this TIC is
generating beacon frames. Same as HARD ERROR.
The TIC has detected an open or a short circuit in the lobe data path. Check
that the cable is connected to access unit. Reactivate the link for this TIC. If
persistent, see the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide.
AUTO
REMOVAL
ERROR 1
The TIC detected an internal hardware error during beacon auto-removal process
and removed itself from the ring. Reactivate the line for this TIC. If persistent,
call your service representative.
REMOVE
RECEIVED
The TIC received a remove MAC frame from the network manager and has
removed itself from the ring. Check with the token-ring operator why the 3720
was forced off the ring. When the problem is corrected, reactivate the line to this
TIC.
COUNTER
OVERFLOW
An error counter in the TIC has exceeded its maximum value of 255. No action
required. Counter values are reported to NPDA.
SINGLE
STATION
There are no other stations connected to this ring.
If other stations are known to be on the ring, see the Token-Ring Network
Problem Determination Guide. Otherwise, no action.
Figure 12-1 (Part 1 of 2).
Ring Status Indicator Description
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function
12-3
Ring Status
Indicator
Description
RING
RECOVERY
The monitor contention process is in progress on the ring. No action required. If
the ring does not recover, another ring status indicator should appear within 30
seconds.
Figure 12-1 (Part 2 of 2).
Ring Status Indicator Description
o
A message indicating an error condition of the selected TIC if one exists.
Possible messages are given below.
Token-Ring Interconnection Error Messages
Bring-Up Messages
BRING-UP ERROR 0 - INITIAL TEST ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR I - ROS CRC ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR 2 - RAM ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR 3 - INSTR. TEST ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR 4 - XOPjINTR TEST ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR 5 - PH HARDWARE ERROR
BRING-UP ERROR 6 - SIF REGISTER ERROR
If a bring-up error appears in the TRI error message area, an activate link should
be tried again from the host. If the error persists, call your service representative.
(NPDA Alert 1.)
Initialization Messages
INITIALIZATION ERROR 1 - INV. PARM. LENGTH
INITIALIZATION ERROR 2 - INVALID OPTIONS
INITIALIZATION ERROR 3 - INV. RCV BURST SIZE
INITIALIZATION ERROR 4 - INV. XMIT BURST SIZE
INITIALIZATION ERROR 5 - INV. DMA ABORT THRESH
INITIALIZATION ERROR 6 - INVALID SCB ADDRESS
INITIALIZATION ERROR 7 - INVALID SSB ADDRESS
INITIALIZATION ERROR 8 - MMIO PARITY ERROR
INITIALIZATION ERROR 9 - DMA TIMEOUT
12-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
INITIALIZATION ERROR 10 - DMA PARITY ERROR
INITIALIZATION ERROR 11 - DMA BUS ERROR
INITIALIZATION ERROR 12 - DMA DATA ERROR
INITIALIZATION ERROR 13 - ADAPTER CHECK
The meaning of each initialization error is given below.
Initialization
Error
Description
1 to 7
The specified initialization parameter was found to be invalid by the TIC
microcode. Check installation/generation parameters. When corrected, reactivate
the link to this TIC. If error persists, call your service representative.
The specified hardware problem has been detected by the TIC. Reactivate link to
this TIC. If error persists, call your service representative.
8 to 13
Figure 12-2.
Initialization Error Description
Open Messages
OPEN ERROR - INVALID PARAMETERS
OPEN ERROR I IN PHASE x - FUNCTION FAILURE
OPEN ERROR 2 IN PHASE x - SIGNAL LOSS
OPEN ERROR 3 IN PHASE x - WIRE FAULT
OPEN ERROR 4 IN PHASE x - FREQUENCY ERROR
OPEN ERROR 5 IN PHASE x - TIMEOUT
OPEN ERROR 6 IN PHASE x - RING FAILURE
OPEN ERROR 7 IN PHASE x - RING BEACONING
OPEN ERROR 8 IN PHASE x - DUPL NODE ADDR
OPEN ERROR 9 IN PHASE x - REQUEST PARAMETERS
OPEN ERROR 10 IN PHASE x - REMOVE RECEIVED
OPEN ERROR 11 IN PHASE x - IMPL FORCE RCVD
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function
12-5
Open Phases
o - LOBE MEDIA TEST
1 - PHYSICAL INSERTION
2 - ADDRESS VERIFICATION
3 - ROLL CALL POLL
4 - REQUEST PARAMETERS
The meaning of each open error is given below.
Open Errors
Description
INVALID
PARAMETER
An open parameter was found to be invalid by the TIC microcode. Check
installation/generation parameters. When corrected, reactivate the link to this
TIC. If error persists, call your service representative.
FUNCTION
FAILURE (1)
The lobe media test has failed, or another MAC frame was seen on the ring
during the lobe media test (Phase 0). Unplug the token-ring adapter cable from
its access unit. Reactivate the link to this TIC. If same symptom occurs, call
your service representative. Otherwise, there is a problem in the lobe, (see
Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide).
The TIC is detecting no signal on the ring at the receiver side. Reactivate the link
to this TIC. If error persists, see Token-Ring Network Problem Determination
Guide.
SIGNAL LOSS (2)
WIRE FAULT (3)
There was a fault on the TIC line. Reactivate the link to this TIC. If error
persists, see Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide.
FREQUENCY
ERROR (4)
A frequency error occurred on the TIC line. Reactivate the link to this TIC. If
error persists, see Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide.
TIMEOUT (5)
The TIC has not been able to complete the specified phase in the time allowed.
Reactivate the link to this TIC. If error persists, see Token-Ring Network
Problem Determination Guide.
RING FAILURE
The TIC is the active monitor and cannot complete the ring purge process in the
time allowed. Reactivate the link to this TIC. If error persists, see Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide.
The monitor contention process was not completed in the time allowed or a
beacon frame was received. Reactivate the link to this TIC after 30 seconds. If
error persists, consult Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide.
(6)
RING
BEACONING (7)
DUPL NODE
ADDRESS (8)
Some other adapter on the ring has the same specific address as this TIC. Check
installation/generation address for this TIC. If no problem is found, see
Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide.
REQUEST
PARAMETER (9)
The parameter server was not able to provide the requested parameters in the
time allowed. Reactivate the link to this TIC. If error persists, see Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide.
A remove force MAC frame was received during the open process by this TIC.
Check with the token-ring operator. Correct problem, and then reactivate the
link to this TIC.
REMOVE
RECEIVED (10)
Figure 12-3 (Part 1 of 2).
12-6
Open Error Description
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Open Errors
Description
IMPL FORCE
RECEIVED (11)
An IMPL force MAC frame was received by the TIC and the adapter has been
closed. The adapter is in the same state as after initialization and will have to be
opened again.
Figure 12-3 (Part 2 of 2).
Open Error Description
Receive Messages
RECEIVE ERROR
Transmit Messages
TRANSMIT ERROR
If a receive or transmit error appears in the TRI error message area, an activate
link should be tried again from the host. If the error persists, call your service
representative.
PF Keys
PF5: To activate a periodic refresh of the display. To cancel the refresh mode,
press ATTN.
PF6: To bring back the TRAjTIC Select screen.
Termination
To terminate the line interface display function:
or
Select a function from the CCU function menu.
Chapter 12. Token-Ring Interconnection Function
12-7
12-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
In the text that follows:
•
Modem refers to IBM 386x and 586x modems or to other modems
that activate, when in test/loop mode, data set ready (DSR)
or other interface signals as indicated in the CCITT V54 recommendations.
•
Cable refers to NTT cables or to other cables that have
NTT-like wrap capabilities.
You may use the Wrap Test function as a problem determination aid, to
determine whether:
•
The modem is functionally operational (wrap test at modem level).
•
The path from the 3720 to the NTT cable, excluding the modem, is
functionally operational (wrap test at cable level).
At each level, you can perform two types of tests: the data wrap test and the
control lead wrap test.
Host
I---
Channelattached
3720
Lie wrap
Tailgate wrap
I-r---
Local
modem
/
I
I
Remote
modem
~
Remote unit
)
""'
~
NIT cable wrap
""'~
modem localloopback (loop 3)"
)
* Modem local loopback is referred to as loop 3 in the CCITT V54
recommenda tions.
Notes:
1.
You cannot use the wrap test function on a line that is being traced (line trace
function) or tested (line test function). These functions are described in
Chapter 21.
2.
To execute the wrap test function, the CCU control program must be running
(PROCESS and RUN are displayed in the machine status area (MSA), see
Chapter 25), and MOSS must be online (MOSS-ONLINE is displayed in the
AfSA).
( ,
\
\
i
I
I
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
1'3-1
Modem Level Wrap
The modem level wrap on the 3720 can verify the path after the cable end and
within the modem.
•
Data Wrap Test
The 3720 transmits defined data patterns on the 'transmit data' line and
verifies that these patterns are wrapped back and received correctly on the
'receive data' line. Any discrepancy is detected by the 3720. The test can be
run any number of times consecutively. You may use the default data wrap
patterns or you may create your own personal data wrap patterns. Default
data wrap patterns are provided according to line protocol (for example,
BSC, ASCII).
•
Control Lead Wrap Test
The 3720 transmits a defined pattern on the control leads to the modem. The
modem is controlled by these control leads and always reacts the same way to
a given configuration of the control leads. The modem wraps the transmitted
pattern back to the 3720 in order to determine the status of the modem (the
modem may not react to invalid configurations of the transmitted control
leads). The control leads are continuously tested when the 3720 is in normal
operation mode, or when a data wrap test is being performed.
A modem level control lead default pattern is provided only for the IBM 386x
modems. The manner in which other types of modem wrap the control leads
cannot be determined. Therefore, no default control lead patterns are provided
for modems other than the IBM 386x modems. You must create your own
personal control lead wrap patterns.
NTT Cable Level Wrap
Using the NTT cable level wrap, the 3720 can verify the path up to, and
including, the cable end. To perform the NTT cable level wrap, you must have a
Test/Operate switch at the end of the cable.
•
Data Wrap Test
The 3720 transmits defined data patterns on the 'transmit data' line and
verifies that these patterns are wrapped back and received correctly on the
'receive data' line. Any discrepancy is detected by the 3720. The test can be
run any number of times consecutively. You may use the default data wrap
patterns or you may create your own personal data wrap patterns. Default
data wrap patterns are provided according to line protocol (for example,
BSC, ASCII).
13-2
3720/372i Communication Controilers Extended Services
•
Control Lead Wrap Test
The 3720 transmits a defined control lead pattern on the transmit interface
and verifies that the pattern is wrapped back and received correctly on the
receive interface. Any discrepancy is detected by the 3720. You may use the
control lead default patterns or create your own personal control lead
patterns.
LIe Level Wrap
Thi~
tests the LIC internally, whether or not a cable or tailgate wrap block is
present. The 3720 transmits defined data patterns and verifies that these patterns
are wrapped back and received correctly. Any discrepancy is detected by the
3720. The test can be run any number of times consecutively. You may use the
default data wrap patterns or you may create your own personal data wrap
patterns.
Note: For the LIC type 3 port the plugs are reversible. In order to fully test the
card, reverse the wrap cable after the first test pass and run the test again.
Tailgate Level Wrap
A tailgate wrap block must be inserted into the position being tested instead of
the cable to the modem. The 3720 transmits a defined tailgate pattern on the
transmit interface and verifies that the pattern is wrapped back and received
correctly on the receive interface. Any discrepancy is detected by the 3720. You
may use the tailgate default patterns or create your own personal tailgate
patterns.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-3
Wrap Test Selection
Selection:
8
o0
To position the cursor
(I
SEND
)
To select the wrap test function
After you have selected the wrap test function, the wrap test Initialization screen
is displayed.
13-4
3720/3721 Communication Controilers Extended Services
Wrap Test Initialization
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl -==>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP TEST INITIALIZATION
-ENTER LINE ADDRESS (0 TO 27 OR 32 TO 63) ==>
-ENTER WRAP TYPE C1. 2)
1 DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
==>
:II
-ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 TO 4)
==>
1 = MODEM
4 = TAILGATE
2 = NTT CABLE
3 = LIC (DATA WRAP ONLY)
-LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
To initialize the wrap test:
1.
Deactivate/disable, from the host, the line that you want to test.
2.
Select appropriate options on G,
3.
Press SEND to display the Wrap Test Selection screen. If at
0, and G·
0
you select:
go to "Data Wrap Test Pattern Selection" on page 13-6.
2
go to "Control Lead Wrap Test Pattern Selection" on page 13-8.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-5
Data Wrap Test Pattern Selection
If you selected data wrap, the following screen is displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL t-U1BER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP PATTERN SELECTION
LINE ADDRESS: SO
LCD 4: START/STOP 9/7
TYPE: DATA
CNTRL PCM: NCP
G
LEVEL: MODEM
LIC TYPE: 1
SELECT ONE OPTION (1 TO 3)
==>
1 = USE DEFAULT PATTERN
2 = DISPLAY DEFAULT PATTERN
3 = CREATE PERSONAL PATTERN
o
o
o
o
PFS:CANCEL
G
o
Sums up the information you entered in the Wrap Test Initialization screen.
Displays supplementary information that you did not enter in the Wrap Test
Initialization screen, such as the line control definition (LCD).
The line control definition that follows is that defined at system generation.
3 - autocall
4- start/stop 9/7
6 - start/stop 10/8
9-SDLC
C - BSC EBCDIC
D - BSC ASCII
E - BSC ASCII TRSP (transparent - EP only).
o
13-6
According to the LCD value C, D, or E (BSC only), one of the following
may be displayed:
•
TEST IN TRANSPARENT MODE (y,N) = = >
To choose between transparent mode and non-transparent mode, when
both modes are possible. (In transparent mode, control characters are
considered as data.)
•
TRANSPARENT MODE IS NOT SUPPORTED if you defined the line
in emulation mode or in NCP-ASCII.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
•
e
ONLY TRANSPARENT MODE IS SUPPORTED if you defined the
line in EP-ASCII (LCD = E).
In BSC only, the following prompt is displayed:
EIB or ITB MODE (y,N) = = >
In NCP, if you enter Y, ITBs will be taken as control characters and not as
data in your personal pattern. (There is no ITB in default patterns.)
In EP, if the line has been defined in ITB mode at generation, you must
enter Y, otherwise enter N.
G
If you enter:
go to "Wrap Test Start" on page 13-10.
2
go to "Default Patterns" on page 13-31.
3
go to "Personal Patterns" on page 13-19.
PF Key
PF5: Cancels the Wrap Test function and display the Wrap Test End screen.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-7
Control Lead Wrap Test Pattern Selection
If there is a default pattern available, the following screen is displayed after you
have initialized the wrap test (Wrap Test Initialization screen):
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP PATTERN SELECTION
LINE ADDRESS: 60
LCD 4: START/STOP 9/7
TYPE: CONTROL LEAD LEVEL: MODEM
CNTRL PCM: NCP
LIC TYPE: 1
G
o
o
SELECT ONE OPTION (1 TO 3)
==>
1 = USE DEFAULT PATTERN
2 = DISPLAY DEFAULT PATTERN
3 = CREATE PERSONAL PATTERN
o
o
PFS:CANCEL
G
o
Sums up the information you entered in the Wrap Test Initialization screen.
Displays supplementary information that you did not enter in the Wrap Test
Initialization screen, such as the line control definition (LCD).
The line control definition that follows is that defined at system generation.
3 - autocall
4 - start/stop 9/7
6 - start/stop 10/8
7 - start/stop 11/8
9-SDLC
C - BSC EBCDIC
D - BSC ASCII
E - BSC ASCII TRSP (transparent - EP only)
0/0
If you selected MODEM, the following is displayed:
WARNING: MODEM CONTROL LEAD DEFAULT PATTERN
APPLIES ONLY TO IBM 386X MODEMS
If you selected NTT CABLE, the following is displayed:
WARNING: CABLE CONTROL LEAD DEFAULT PATTERN
APPLIES ONLY TO NTT CABLES
13-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
4) If you enter:
go to "Wrap Test Start" on page 13-10.
2
go to "Default Patterns" on page 13-31.
3
go to "Personal Patterns" on page 13-19.
If there is no default pattern for the line that you selected, you have to create your
own patterns. The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP PATTERN SELECTION
LINE ADDRESS: 60
LCD 4: STARTISTOP
9/7
TYPE: CONTROL LEAD LEVEL: MODEM
CNTRL PGM: NCP
LIC TYPE: 1
NO DEFAULT PATTERN
o
o
PRESS SEND TO CREATE YOUR PERSONAL PATTERN
PF5:CANCEL
0/0
Same as 0/0 on Control Lead Wrap Test Pattern Selection screen.
When you press SEND, you are prompted to create your personal pattern. Go to
"Personal Patterns" on page 13-19.
PF Key
PF5: To cancel the wrap test function and display the Wrap Test End screen.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-9
Wrap Test Start
After you have selected the default pattern, or after you have created your own
pattern, the following screen is displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP TEST START
LINE ADDRESS: SO
LCD 4: START/STOP 9/7
TYPE: DATA
CNTRL PGM: NCP
ENTER NUMBER OF WRAPS (1-255) OR P ==>
P = PERMANENT WRAP
LEVEL: MODEM
LIC TYPE: 1
0
PF5:CANCEL
o
&
Enter the number of times the transmit pattern will be sent. Enter P to wrap
for an indefinite period of time.
Take the following actions, depending on the wrap level (MODEM, CABLE,
LIC, or TAILGATE) that you have selected:
Option MODEM:
SELECT APPROPRIATE TEST ON THE MODEM,
THEN PRESS SEND TO START THE WRAP
On 386x modems, switch to the localloopback test position (loop 3) or
to the remote loopback test position (loop 2). On other modenls, switch
to the appropriate test position.
Option NTT CABLE:
TAKE APPROPRIATE ACTION ON NTT CABLE,
THEN PRESS SEND TO START THE WRAP
On the NTT cable, PN 2667349, set the Test switch to TEST.
Option LIC:
-
13-10
PRESS SEND TO START THE WRAP
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Once you have pressed SEND, the wrap test starts.
Option TAILGATE:
PLUG APPROPRIATE WRAP FACILITY AT TAILGATE,
THEN PRESS SEND TO START THE WRAP
Once you have pressed SEND, the wrap test starts.
PF Key
PF5: To cancel the wrap test function and display the Wrap Test End screen.
Wrap Test in Progress
Once you have entered the number of wraps and pressed SEND, the following
screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) am=>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP TEST IN PROGRESS
LINE ADDRESS: 80
LCD 4: START/STOP 9/7
TYPE: DATA
CNTRL PGM: NCP
LEVEL: MODEM
LIe TYPE: 1
PRESS ATTN IF YOU WANT TO STOP WRAP
To stop the wrap before the end, press BREAK (ATTN). This is the only way
you can stop the wrap if you entered P.
Note: If Alarm A15 is displayed (to indicate a solid error), cancel the Wrap Test
function (PF5) and perform the actions requested for Alarm AIS.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-11
PF Keys
If you press BREAK (ATTN), to get control of the operator console, the
following two PF keys are displayed:
PF4: To return to previous state and continue the wrap test.
PF5: To stop the wrap test and display the Wrap Test Result screen.
13-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Wrap Test Results
When the last wrap is completed or after you have stopped the wrap test, the
following result screen is displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP TEST RESULT
LINE ADDRESS: 60
LCD 9: SDLC
NBR OF WRAPS
TRANSMITTED: 001
TRANSMIT:
TRANSMIT:
SCF=OO
SCF=OO
TYPE: DATA
CNTRL PGM: NCP
LEVEL: HODEM
LIC TYPE: 4A
NBR OF WRAPS
RECEIVED: 001
LCS=OO
LCS=CA
NBR OF WRAPS
INCORRECT: 001
SES=OO
SES=OO
- PRESS SEND TO DISPLAY FIRST INCORRECT PATTERN
PF4:VRAP TEST INITIALIZATION
WRAP TEST COMPLETED
4)
0
•
o
4) Gives the total number of wrap patterns transmitted and received, and the
number of patterns incorrectly received.
A received pattern is considered as incorrect when it does not match the
expected pattern. See G under "Personal Patterns." For the default pattern,
the transmit and expected patterns are identical.
Under EP, a pattern not received is considered as incorrect. This is not true
under NCP.
•
When the scanner detects an error, the following fields are displayed to give
specific information on the error: the Status Control Field (SCF), Line
Communication Status byte (LCS), Secondary Status Field (SES). The SCF,
LCS, and SES codes are illustrated on the next page.
TRANSMIT: SCF =
RECEIVE: SCF =
o
LCS=
LCS=
SES=
SES=
SCANNER AND/OR LINE TIME-OUT is displayed when, for example:
•
The wrap facility is not operational (Test/Operate switch not on test).
•
The scanner does not operate normally.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-13
Fix the wrap facility or re-IML the scanner and perform the Wrap Test
function again. If it recurs, contact the person in charge of the 3720 problem
determina tion.
o
PRESS SEND TO DISPLAY FIRST INCORRECT PATTERN is displayed
only when there is an incorrect pattern.
PF Key
PF4: To initialize a wrap test on any line.
13-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Meaning of SCF, LCS, and SES Codes
SCF
LCS
SES
Meaning
4x
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
Oy
1x
1x
1x
1x
1x
.x
.x
.x
04
04
.x
Ox
04
04
.x
.x
.x
8x
8x
.x
.x
.x
.x
.x
00
CO
C2
C4
C6
C8
CA
CC
CE
00
02
06
08
E2
EE
F2
F4
F6
F8
FA
FB
80
86
87
88
8A
9A
9B
E2
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
80
48
40
40
00
10
08
02
01
01
Buffer request
AIO error
Adapter interface check
Communication scanner error
Front end scanner failing to answer
Front end scanner internal error
LlC driver checkllCC internal error
LlC or scanner error
LlC or ICC interface error
No interrupt from front end scanner, or receive text time-out
Command rejected (wrong interface, invalid command)
FES error reporting path check
Invalid level 2 interrupt
CTS dropped
OSR dropped
CTS failed to come up
OSR failed to come up
No cable installed
OSR/CTS failed to drop
X.21 disconnect OCE clear received
X.21 disconnect OCE clear received + time-out during clear
Time-out (nothing received)
X.21 time-out on proceed to select
X.21 time-out on proceed to select + time-out during clear
OLE-EOT disconnect sequence
Lost data
X.21 CPS error
X.21 CPS error + time-out during clear
Modem retrain
Bad pad (BSC)
Format exception (BSC)
Abort-line idle (SOLC)
Abort (SOLC)
CRC check (SOLC or BSC)
Flag off boundary (SOLC)
OLE error (BSC)
Length check (BSC)
Early flag (SOLC)
x
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
=
0: halt or abort
1: service request
2: overrun or underrun
3: modem check
4: data stored
5: end of message
6: data transmitted
7: receive sequence
y = 0 if NCP or character mode
y = 4 if EP and normal mode
. = the displayed digit is not significant
* The displayed value is not significant
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-15
Incorrect Data Wrap Pattern
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE AOORESS: 80
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
OATA WRAP: INCORRECT PATTERN
EXPO:
RCVO:
00 01 02 03 04 05 08 07 08 09 OA DB DC 00 OE OF
00 01 02 03 04 OF 08 07 OB 09 OA OB DC 00 DE OF
EXPO:
RCVO:
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 10 1E IF
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 10 1E 1F
EXPO:
RCVO:
20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F
EXPO: 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
RCVO: 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
PF4:TEST RESULTS
Ci) The expected pa ttem (EXPD)
G
The received pattern (RCVD)
The cursor shows the first error. The screen that is displayed does not necessarily
show the beginning of the pattern but the portion that contains the difference. To
display all the expected and received patterns, use thePF7 and PF8 keys.
If there is an incorrect pattern, make sure that it does not result from:
•
An incorrect action when setting up the cable or modem for the wrap test.
•
A personal pattern incorrectly entered.
•
The selection of an inappropriate default pattern.
If it does result from one of these actions, restart the wrap test.
If it does not, contact the service representative responsible for the defective
equipment.
Note: When a solid error is detected, a BER (Type 11, ID A2 or Bl) is recorded
in the BER file, immediately followed by Alarm A15.
13-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
PF4: To leave the Incorrect Pattern screen and display the Wrap Test Result
screen.
PF7: To display the previous screen of the incorrect pattern.
PF8: To display the next screen of the incorrect pattern.
Incorrect Control Lead Pattern
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 60
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: INCORRECT PATTERN
TRANSMITTED PATTERN:
11000011
10000011
EXPECTED PATTERN:
10100011
10000011
RECEIVED PATTERN:
00000000 00000000
PF4:TEST RESULTS
Note: The control lead pattern bit definitions are listed under "Control Lead Bit
Definition" on page 13-28.
PFKey
PF4: To leave the Incorrect Pattern screen and display the Wrap Test Result
screen.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-17
Wrap Test End
The Wrap Test End screen is the following:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
WRAP TEST END
LINE ADDRESS: 60
LCD 9: SOLC
TYPE: CNTRL
CNTRL PGH-NCP
LEVEL: MODEM
LIe TYPE: 1
PF4:WRAP TEST INITIALIZATION
The Wrap Test End screen is displayed when:
•
The Wrap Test cannot be initialized.
The reason for the abnormal termination is given by a message. Perform the
action required by the message, then press PF4 to reinitialize the wrap.
•
You canceled the test by pressing PF5. The following message is then
displayed:
WRAp FUNCTION CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST
PFKey
PF4: To initialize a wrap test on any line.
13-18
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Personal Patterns
You are allowed to create a personal pattern if you selected to do so during the
Wrap Test Pattern selection:
- SELECT ONE OPTION (1 to 3) = = > 3
If you specified data wrap at Wrap Test Initialization (option 1), you are
prompted to enter your personal data wrap pattern. If you specified control lead
wrap at Wrap Test Initialization (option 2), you are prompted to enter your
personal control lead wrap pattern. Information on how to create personal
patterns, as well as an example for each of the types of personal patterns, is
presented on the following pages.
Personal Data Wrap Pattern
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 60
TRANSMIT PATTERN
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP:PERSONAL PATTERN
COPY (Y.N)
EXPECTED PATTERN
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
WHEN PATTERN COMPLETE ENTER C. THEN PRESS SEND ==>
PF6:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
The screen work area that you use to create your personal data patterns is divided
into two areas separated by a vertical row of Y s. (See '~Example of the Creation
of a Personal Data Wrap Pattern.")
0
•
The left area
•
The right area 0 is used to enter the expected pattern.
•
The letter Y on each line is used to indicate whether or not the expected line
is identical to the transmit line.
Line
0
is used to enter the transmit pattern.
is explained under "Is Your Pattern Complete" later in this chapter.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-19
You are free to enter your personal data wrap patterns the way you wish. The
only rules that apply to creating your patterns are:
•
You must enter two hexadecimal characters at a time. Each pair of
characters must be separated from the next by one blank (space bar).
•
Each transmit and expected personal data wrap pattern must not be shorter
than 8 nor longer than 540 hexadecimal characters.
•
You cannot use more than three screens to enter your personal patterns. On a
single screen, you cannot enter more than 180 characters for the transmit
pattern and 180 for the expected pattern. To go from one screen to another,
do as follows:
(
(
(PF8)
•
SEND)
To transmit what you entered on the screen.
To display an empty screen, in order to enter
more characters.
When both patterns on a line are the same, leave the Y unchanged; when they
are different, replace Y by N.
Contents of Personal Data Pattern
According to the line protocol, the pattern should start with a combination of the
following characters:
•
Transmit control byte
•
End-of-message search argument (EOM)
•
Padding character
•
Synchronization characters.
If you entered Y on line
e of the Data Wrap Test Pattern selection screen:
- EIB OR ITB MODE = = > Y
you have to follow the rules described under "EIBjITB".
13-20
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Figure 13-1 tells you, by line protocol, which of these characters have to be
entered before the data. These characters are transmitted but not expected.
Protocol
Control Byte
Transmit
Argument
EOM Search
Characters
Padding
Synchronization
SDLC
No
No
No
No
SSC (normal
mode)
Yes
No
No
No
SSC
(character
mode)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Start/Stop
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Figure 13-1.
Characters to be Entered Before Data in Data Wrap Pattern
NCP Transmit Control Byte
The NCP transmit control byte contains coded instructions to the scanner that
specify the initial and final control characters to be used in a transmission. It also
contains an indicator that specifies whether leading graphics are to be sent. The
transmit control byte has the following format:
0-2: Initial Control Sequence (ICS)
3-6: Final Control Sequence (FCS)
7: Leading graphics are possible if this bit is 1, not possible if this bit is 0
Figure 13-2 explains all transmit control bytes (BSC ASCII and BSC EBCDIC).
The first column gives, for each transmit control byte, the hexadecimal value that
you must enter when you create your personal pattern. It is also the value
displayed on the default data wrap pattern screen.
Hex Value
Meaning
00
07
Turn line around and monitor
Send ENO, turn around, and receive response
(ENQ may be in a data stream of leading graphics)
Send ACK-O, turn around, and receive
Send NAK, turn around, and receive
Send RVI, turn around, and receive
Send ACK-1, turn around, and receive
Send WACK, turn around, and receive
Send STX-ENQ (TTD), turn around, and receive
Send STX-data-ETX, turn around, and receive
Send STX-data-ETB, turn around, and receive
Send DLE-STX-data-DLE-ENQ, turn around, and receive
Send DLE-STX-data-DLE-ITS
Send DLE-STX-data-DLE-ETX, turn around, and receive
Send DLE-STX-data-DLE-ETS, turn around, and receive
Send SOH-data-ENQ, turn around, and receive
Send SOH-data-ETX, turn around, and receive
Send SOH-data-ETB, turn around, and receive
Send EOT, turn around, and monitor
Send EOT, turn around, and level 2 interrupt
Send DLE-EOT, turn around, and level 2 interrupt
OD
OF
1A
1D
1E
26
32
34
46
48
52
54
66
72
74
80
98
9C
Figure 13-2.
NCP Transmit Control Byte for Data Wrap Patterns
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-21
EP Transmit Control Byte
In non-transparent mode, the EP transmit control byte is X'OO'.
In transparent mode, the EP transmit control byte is X' 40'.
EOM Search Argument
The EOM search argument is the copy of the last character of the pattern. It is
transmitted but not expected in return. It tells the control program what the last
expected character is.
Padding Characters
Padding characters are used to insert timing characters into the data stream.
These characters can be used to accommodate the operation of some mechanical
action at a station or can be used to prevent distortion to characters due to
modem turnaround activity.
•
For leading pad: X'55' or X'FF' in BSC character mode, and X'PF' in
Start/Stop
•
F or trailing pad: X'FF'.
Synchronization Characters
Synchronization characters are transmitted on the line but are not expected in
return. They are:
•
For BSC ASCII: X'16'
•
For BSC EBCDIC: X'32'.
EIB/ITB
Apply the following rules if you entered Y on line
Pattern Selection screen:
- EIB or ITB
= =
e of the Data Wrap Test
> Y
•
In NCP, the ITB character X'IF' must be immediately followed by X'OO', in
both the transmit and expected patterns.
•
In EP:
ETB and ETX characters must be immediately followed by X'OO' only in
the expected patterns.
If the ITB characters are to be considered as control characters on the
line being tested (system generation), the ITB characters must be
immediately followed by X'OO' in the expected patterns only.
13-22
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Creating Your Personal Data Wrap Pattern
Once the Personal Data Wrap Pattern screen is displayed, the cursor is positioned
at the first unprotected field. First enter one line of transmit pattern (see
"Contents of Personal Data Pattern"). Then:
- If the transmitted and expected characters are the same, do not enter the
expected ones. Press three times:
to position the cursor to the next transmit line.
If the transmitted and expected characters are different, replace Y by N as
explained below:
Enter the expected characters.
(
~) To position the cursor at the next transmit line.
- If you expect no characters, replace Y by N and move to the next transmit
line, as follows:
(
~) Twice, to position the cursor to the next transmit line.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-23
Is Your Pattern Complete?
When you have entered all the characters of the transmit and expected patterns
(one to three screens), notify the 3720 that your patterns are completed as follows:
1. Reply C on line
" o f the last screen only:
-WHEN PATTERN COMPLETE ENTER C. THEN PRESS SEND
2. (
I
SEND
==>
)
3. The wrap test starts.
Note: If you enter more than one screen, reply C (for completion) only on the
last screen. If you press SEND without entering C, the patterns are not
considered as complete.
Personal nata Wrap Pattern PF Keys
PF5: To cancel the wrap test function and display the Wrap Test End screen.
PF6: To ignore the patterns that you are creating and display the Wrap Test
Selection screen.
PF7: To display the previous screen that you have just created, if you wish to
modify it.
PF8: To display the next screen, in order to enter more characters or to modify
characters that you have already entered.
Warning: When you have entered or changed characters on a
screen, press SEND before pressing either PF7 or PF8. Otherwise,
the characters entered or changed on the current screen will be lost.
13-24
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Example of the Creation of a Personal Data Wrap Pattern
Let's assume that you want to create a transmit pattern and an expected pattern,
between which the differences are: the transmit control byte (32), which is
transmitted but not expected; and 18 and 19, which are expected instead of 16
and 17.
Transmit pattern: 320005 07 OB OC OD OE OF 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Expected pattern:
00 05 07 OB OC OD OE OF 11 12 13 14 15 18 19
The following describes one way of creating your patterns. Enter one blank only
(space bar) between each pair of hexadecimal characters.
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-25
1.
32
2.
00 05 07 08 OC 00 OF
3.
12 13 14 15
4.
16 17
~,)
(
~I)
(
11
(
~)
(
~, )
(
® ( ~)
~)
(
(
~I )
:., )
18 19
It results in the following screen:
Machine Status Area
(
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
LINE ADDRESS: SO
DATA WRAP:PERSONAL PATTERN
TRANSMIT PATTERN
COpy (Y.N)
EXPECTED PATTERN
32
N
00 05 07 08 OC 00 OE OF 11 Y
12 13 14 15
Y
16 17
N 18 19
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
WHEN PATTERN COMPLETE ENTER C. THEN PRESS SEND
PF6:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
5. Reply C to the following request:
WHEN PATTERN COMPLETE ENTER C. THEN PRESS SEND
6. (
13-26
I
SEND
)
To start the wrap test.
3720/3721 Gommunication Controllers Extended Services
==>
==>
PF3: ALARM
\
Personal Control Lead Wrap Pattern
The personal control lead wrap pattern consists of four bytes of control lead.
Each bit within the byte is represented on the screen by a period. When you
create your pattern you replace the periods by a zero or a one to represent the
logical level of that control lead. The relationship between the transmitted and
expected control leads is described for the NTT cable and for IBM 386x modems
on pages 13-45, 13-46, and 13-47. For others modems, refer to appropriate
modem documentation.
The bit meaning is given under "Control Lead Bit Definition."
•
Byte 0 contains a control lead pattern to be transmitted.
•
Byte 0 contains the expected control lead pattern resulting from byte
•
Byte G contains a control lead pattern to be transmitted.
•
Byte 0 contains the expected control lead pattern resulting from byte G.
O.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: SO
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: PERSONAL PATTERN
ENTER TRANSMIT PATTERN
==>
ENTER EXPECTED PATTERN
==>
o
0
o
4)
PFS:CANCEL PFS:QUIT
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-27
Control Lead Bit Definition
Bit 0 is the leftmost bit in the byte.
LIC 1 (RS232jCCITT V.24)
Transmit byte
0
or
e
Expected byte
0
or 4)
Bit
Meaning
Bit
Meaning
0
1
Data terminal ready (DTR) .
Request to send (RTS)
New sync.
Data signaling rate selector
(DSRS)
Test control
Not used (always 0)
Not used (always 1)
Not used (always 1)
0
1
2
3
Data set ready (DSR)
Ready for sending
Ring indicator (RI)
Receive line signal detector
(RLSD)
Test indicator (TI)
Not used (always 0)
Not used (always 1)
Not used (always 1)
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
5
6
7
LIC 1 (RS366jCCITT V.25) - Autocall
Transmit byte 0 or
13-28
e
Expected byte
0
or 4):e
Bit
Meaning
Bit
Meaning
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Digit signal 8
Digit signal 4
Digit signal 2
Digit signal 1
Call request
Digit present
Not used (always 1)
Not used (always 1)
0
1
2
Power indication
Data line occupied
Present next digit
Abandon call and retry
Call originator status
Not used (always 0)
Not used (always 1)
Not used (always 1)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
3
4
5
6
7
Creating Your Personal Control-Lead Wrap Pattern
To create your personal control-lead pattern, do as follows:
1. Replace the eight periods of byte
0
by zeros and ones, then press:
2. Replace the eight periods of byte
G
by zeros and ones, then press:
2. Replace the eight periods of byte
0
by zeros and ones, then press:
2. Replace the eight periods of byte
0
by zeros and ones, then press:
(
(
SEN)
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-29
Example of the Creation of a Personal Control Lead Wrap Pattern
Let's assume that you want to create a personal control lead wrap pattern for the
following lines, which are being wrapped at the modem cable end for a LIC 1
(RS232jCCITT V.24):
Request to send -- > Ready for sending
-- > Receive line signal detect
Data terminal ready -- > Data set ready
Furthermore, let's assume that you want to:
•
Activate only the request-to-send line and check that the ready-for-sending
and the receive-line-signal-detect lines are activated
and then
•
Activate only the data-terminal-ready line and check that the data-set-ready
line is activated.
Enter your patterns according to the bit definitions for the LIC 1 (RS232jCCITT
V.24) given under "Control Lead Bit Definition." From these bit definitions, the
personal control lead pattern is:
TRANSMIT PATTERN = = > 01000011 10000011
EXPECTED PATTERN = = > 01010011 10000011
To enter these patterns, refer to "Creating Your Personal Control Lead Wrap
Pattern."
13-30
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Default Patterns
Default patterns are predefined wrap patterns that are ready for use. There are
two types of default patterns: data and control lead. Both the data wrap and
control lead default patterns are illustrated in the following pages.
Data Wrap Default Patterns
Data wrap default patterns are available according to line protocol (SDLC, BSC,
SIS) for all LIC types. There is no restriction on whether the wrap is at cable or
modem level. The available data wrap default patterns are:
SDLC
BSC NCP-EBCDIC Non-transparent
BSC NCP-EBCDIC Transparent
BSC NCP-ASCII Non-transparent
BSC EP-EBCDIC Non-transparent
BSC EP-EBCDIC Transparent
BSC EP-ASCII Non-transparent
BSC EP-ASCII Transparent
BSC EP Character mode - EBCDIC Non-transparent
BSC EP Character mode - ASCII Non-transparent
SIS - Seven bits
SIS - Eight bits
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-31
Control Lead Default Patterns
Control lead default patterns are available at:
•
NTT cable level, for:
LIC type 1 (RS232/CCITT V.24) when using theNTT cable PN 2667349,
and
LIC type 1 (RS366/CCITT V.25) when using the NTT cable PN 2667696
•
Modem level, only for 386x/58xx modems
To use the control lead default patterns at the modem level on modems other
than an IBM 386x modem, be sure that the functions provided by your
modem are strictly identical to those provided by the 386x/58xx modems. If
they are not, create your own personal pattern.
•
LIC Tailgate.
PF Keys
PF4: To start the wrap test function with the displayed default pattern.
PF6: To leave the Default Pattern screen and display the Wrap Test Selection
screen.
PF7: To display the previous Default Pattern screen.
PF8: To display the next Default Pattern screen.
13-32
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SDLC Default Pattern (LCD = 9)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS:
SERIAL NlIt1BER:
3720-1
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUHENT
PADDING ANDIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 01 02 03 04 05 08 07 08 09 OA OB DC OD DE
10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 lA 1B lC 10 IE
20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E
30 31 32 33 34 35 38 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E
40 41 42 43 44 45 48 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E
50 51 52 53 54 55 58 57 58 59 5A 58 5C 50 5E
80 81 82 83 84 85 88 67 88 89 6A 68 6C 60 6E
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 78 7C 70 7E
PF4:START WRAP PF8:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
OF
IF
2F
3F
4F
SF
6F
7F
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
~I
v
80
90
AO
BO
CO
DO
EO
FO
81
91
Al
Bl
C1
Dl
E1
F1
82
92
A2
82
C2
D2
E2
F2
83
93
A3
B3
C3
D3
E3
F3
84
94
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
SERIAL NUM8ER:
3720-1
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
85
95
AS
B5
C5
D5
E5
F5
86
98
A6
86
C6
D8
E8
F8
87
97
A7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
PF4:START WRAP PFS:QUIT
8B
98
A8
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
89
99
A9
B9
C9
09
E9
F9
8A
9A
AA
SA
CA
DA
EA
FA
8B
98
AB
B8
CB
DB
EB
FB
8C
9C
AC
BC
CC
DC
EC
FC
BD
9D
AD
BO
CD
DD
ED
FD
8E
9E
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
8F
9F
AF
BF
CF
DF
EF
FF
PF7:BACKWARD
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-33
BSC NCP - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = C)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 32
PADDING ANDIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS:
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 lA IB lC 10 IE
20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2E 2F
30 31 33 34 35 36 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA SB SC SD 5E SF
60 61 62 63 64 65 86 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 60 6E SF
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
PF4:START WRAP PF6:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
80
90
AD
BO
CO
DO
EO
FO
81
91
Al
Bl
Cl
Dl
El
Fl
82
92
A2
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
83
93
A3
B3
C3
D3
E3
F3
PF4:START WRAP
13-34
84
94
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
85
95
A5
B5
C5
D5
E5
F5
86
96
A6
B6
C6
D6
E6
F6
87
97
A7
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
88
98
A8
B8
C8
D8
E8
F8
PF6:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
89
99
AS
B9
C9
09
E9
F9
8A
9A
AA
BA
CA
DA
EA
FA
8B
9B
AB
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
8C
9C
AC
BC
CC
DC
EC
FC
80
9D
AD
BD
CD
DD
ED
FD
8E
9E
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
8F
SF
AF
BF
CF
DF
EF
FF
PF7: BACKWARD
PF3: ALARM
BSC NCP - EBCDIC Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = C)
Machine Status Area
3720-1
CUSTOMER 10:
SERIAL NlJoBER:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ...=>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROl. BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: :52
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF
10 11 12 13 14 1:5 16 17 18 19 lA lB lC 10 1E 1F
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
:50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 87 88 89 6A 8B 6C 60 6E SF
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
PF6:QUIT
PF8: FORWARD
PF4:START WRAP
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
80
90
AO
BO
CO
DO
EO
FO
81
91
A1
B1
Cl
01
E1
F1
82
92
A2
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
83
93
A3
B3
C3
03
E3
F3
PF4:START WRAP
84
94
A4
B4
C4
04
E4
F4
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
85
95
A5
B5
C5
05
E5
F5
8S
9S
AS
BS
CS
OS
ES
FS
87
97
A7
B7
C7
07
E7
F7
PFS:QUIT
88
98
A8
B8
C8
08
E8
F8
89
99
A9
B9
C9
09
E9
Fa
8A
9A
AA
BA
CA
OA
EA
FA
8B
9B
AB
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
8C
9C
AC
BC
CC
DC
EC
FC
80
90
AD
BO
CD
DO
ED
FD
8E
9E
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
8F
9F
AF
BF
CF
OF
EF
FF
PF7:BACKWARO
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-35
BSC NCP - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Pattern (LCD=D)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS:
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 32
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 05 07 08 OC 00 OE OF
10 11 12 13 18 18 19 1C 10 1E
25 27 2F
3C 3F
40 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
80 81 SA 6B 8C 60 6E 6F
79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
PF4:START WRAP
PF6:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
81
91
A1
CO
DO
EO
FO
82
92
A2
C1
01
E2
F1
83
93
A3
C2
02
E3
F2
84
94
A4
C3
03
E4
F3
PF4:START WRAP
13-36
85
95
A5
C4
04
E5
F4
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
86
96
A6
C5
05
E6
F5
87
97
A7
C6
06
E7
F6
88
98
A8
C7
07
E8
F7
89
99
A9
C8 C9
08 09
E9
F8 F9
PF6:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF7: BACKWARD
PF3: ALARM
BSC EP - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = C)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 00
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
02
00 04 05 OS 07 08 09 OA DB OC 00 DE OF
11 12 13 14 15 1S 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 10 1E
20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2E 2F
30 31 33 34 35 3S 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 4S 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 5S 57 58 59 5A 5B SC 50 5E SF
SO S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SS S7 S8 S9 SA SB se SO SE SF
PF4:START WRAP
PFS:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
LI NE
ADDRESS: 1
70 71 72 73
80 81 82 83
90 91 92 93
AO A1 A2 A3
BO B1 B2 B3
CO Cl C2 C3
DO 01 02 03
EO El E2 E3
FO Fl F2 F3
03
PF4:START WRAP
74
84
94
A4
B4
C4
04
E4
F4
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
75
85
95
A5
B5
C5
OS
E5
F5
7S
8S
9S
AS
BS
CS
OS
ES
FS
77
87
97
A7
B7
C7
07
E7
F7
PFS:QUIT
78
88
98
A8
B8
C8
08
E8
F8
79
89
99
A9
B9
C9
09
E9
F9
7A
8A
9A
AA
BA
CA
DA
EA
FA
7B
8B
9B
AB
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
7C 70
80
9C 90
AC AD
BC BO
ec CO
DC DO
EC EO
FC Fo
ac
7E
8E
9E
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
7F
8F
9F
AF
BF
CF
OF
EF
FF
PF7:BACKWARD
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-37
BSC EP - EBCDIC Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = C)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARtf
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 40
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
10 02
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 lA IB lC ID IE IF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C SO 6E 6F
PF4:START WRAP
PFS:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F
AO Al A2 A3 A4 AS A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF
BO Bl B2 83 B4 85 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF
CO Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CO CE CF
DO 01 02 D3 04 D5 DS 07 08 D9 DA DB DC DO DE OF
EO El E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF
FO Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FO FE FF
10 03 (CHARACTER' '10" NOT TO BE RECEIVED)
PF4:START WRAP
PF6:QUIT
PF8:BACKWARO
13-38
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF3: ALARM
BSC EP - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = D)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: D
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO 51A
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 00
PADDING ANDIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
02
00 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF
11 12 13 14 18 19 lA IB lC 10 IE
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 58 5C 50 5E 5F
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 S8 S9 SA SB SC SO 6E 6F
PF4:START WRAP
PFS:QUIT
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
03
PF4:START WRAP
PF6:QUIT
PF8:BACKWARD
Chapter l3. Wrap Test
13-39
BSC EP - ASCII Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = E)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LI NE ADDRESS: 0
3720-1
PFl: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 40
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
10 02
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 OA OB OC OD DE OF
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 lA lB lC lD IE IF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 38 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 48 47 48 48 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA 5B 5C 5D 5E SF
80 81 82 83 84 85 68 87 68 68 6A 8B 8C 80 8E 8F
PF4:START WRAP
PF6:QUIT
PF8:FORVARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
13-40
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 78 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F
03
(CHARACTER "10' 'NOT TO BE RECEIVED)
PF4:START WRAP
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF4:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF8:BACKVARD
PF3: ALARM
BSC EP Character Mode - EBCDIC Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD=C)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
LI NE ADDRESS: 0
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: 03
PADDING ANOIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS: 55 55 32 32
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
02
00 04 05 08 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 DE OF
11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 10 1E
20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2E 2F
30 31 33 34 35 38 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3E 3F
4041 4243444546474849 4A 4B.4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
80 81 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 60 6E 6F
PF4:START WRAP
PF8:QUIT
PF8:FORWARO
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
74
84
94
A4
B4
C4
D4
E4
F4
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
LINE ADDRESS: 0
70 71 72 73
80 81 82 83
90 91 92 93
AO A1 A2 A3
BO B1 B2 B3
CO C1 C2 C3
DO D1 D2 03
EO E1 E2 E3
FO F1 F2 F3
03
PF4:START WRAP
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
75
85
95
A5
B5
C5
D5
E5
F5
76
86
98
A8
86
C8
06
E6
F8
77
87
97
A7
87
C7
07
E7
F7
78
88
98
A8
88
C8
08
E8
F8
PF8:QUIT
79
89
99
A9
89
CS
09
E9
F9
7A
8A
9A
AA
8A
CA
OA
EA
FA
7B
8B
9B
AB
88
CB
DB
EB
F8
7C
8e
9C
AC
8C
CC
DC
EC
FC
70
8D
9D
AD
80
CD
DO
ED
FO
7E
8E
9E
AE
8E
CE
DE
EE
FE
7F
8F
SF
AF
8F
CF
OF
EF
FF
PF8:BACKWARO
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-41
BSC EP Character Mode - ASCII Non-Transparent Default Data Pattern (LCD = D)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DA TA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
LI NE ADDRESS: 0
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOH SEARCH ARGUMENT: 03
PADDING AND/OR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS: 55 55 16 16
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
02
00 06 07 09 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF
11 12 13 14 18 19 lA IB lC 10 IE
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 29 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
80 81 82 83 84 85 88 87 S9 89 8A SB SC SO 8E 8F
PF4:START WRAP
PFS:QUIT
PF9:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
13-42
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
70 71 72 73 74 75 78 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
03
PF4:START WRAP
SERIAL NUMBER:
PFS:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF8: BACKWARD
PF3: ALARM
Start-Stop - Seven Bits Default Data Pattern (LCD = 4)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL 8YTE OR EOH SEARCH ARGUMENT: 7F
PADDING ANDIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS: FF
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA 08 OC 00 OE OF
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 18 1C 10 1E 1F
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 28 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
80 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 60 6E SF
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
PF6:QUIT
PF4:START WRAP
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-43
Start-Stop - Eight Bits Default Data Pattern (LCD = 6 or 7)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 1
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT CONTROL BYTE OR EOM SEARCH ARGUMENT: FF
PADDING ANDIOR SYNCHRONISATION CHARACTERS: FF
TRANSMIT AND EXPECTED CHARACTERS:
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 lA IB lC 10 IE IF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 20 2E 2F
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 4F
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 50 5E 5F
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 60 6E 6F
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 70 7E 7F
PF6:QUIT
PF4:START WRAP
PF8:FORWARD
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
81
91
A1
Bl
C1
01
E1
Fl
82
92
A2
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
83
93
A3
B3
C3
03
E3
F3
PF4:START WRAP
13-44
84
94
A4
B4
C4
04
E4
F4
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DATA WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
LINE ADDRESS: 1
80
90
AO
BO
CO
DO
EO
FO
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
85
95
A5
B5
C5
05
E5
F5
86
96
A6
B6
C6
06
E6
F6
87
97
A7
B7
C7
07
E7
F7
88
98
A8
B8
C8
08
E8
F8
89
99
A9
B9
C9
09
E9
F9
8A
9A
AA
BA
CA
OA
EA
FA
PF6:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
8B
9B
AB
BB
CB
DB
EB
FB
8C
9C
AC
BC
CC
DC
EC
FC
80
90
AD
BD
CD
DO
ED
FO
8E
9E
AE
BE
CE
DE
EE
FE
8F
9F
AF
BF
CF
OF
EF
FF
PF8:BACKWARO
PF3: ALARM
LIC Type 1 (RS232/CCITT V.24) - NTT Cable (PN 6398782) Control Lead Default
Pattern
The default pattern illustrated below is provided for the control lead wrap only if
the modem cable is NTT cable PN 6398782. This cable has a Test/Operate switch
which allows the following wrapping:
Request to send -- > Ready for sending
-- > Receive line signal detect
Data terminal ready -- > Data set ready
The bit meaning is given on page 13-28.
Machine Status Area
3720-1
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT PATTERN:
11000011 10000011
EXPECTED PATTERN:
11010011 10000011
PF4:START WRAP
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF6:QUIT
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-45
LIC Type 1 (RS366/CCITT V.25 - Autocall) - NTT Cable
The default control lead wrap pattern illustrated below is provided for NTT Cable
PN 6398786. The wrapping is as follows:
Digit signal 8 -- > Wrap back digit 8 (not a CCITT recommendation)
Digit signal 4 -- > Data line occupied
Digit signal 2 -- > Abandon call and retry
Digit signal 1 -- > Call originator status (distant station connected)
Digit present -- > Present next digit
Call request
-- > Power indication
The bit meanings are given on page 13-28.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT PATTERN:
11111111 11111111
EXPECTED PATTERN:
11111011 11111011
PF4:START WRAP
13-46
3720-1
PF6:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF3: ALARM
LIC Type 1 - IBM 386X Modem Control Lead Default Pattern
The default pattern illustrated below is provided for the control lead wrap only if
the modem is an IBM 386x or 586x modem. The wrapping is as follows:
Data terminal ready -- >
Data set ready (except for the IBM 3863 and 3869
Model 2 for which DSR is always on)
Request to send -- >
Ready for sending.
Test indicator is always on
The bit meanings are given on page 13-28.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT PATTERN:
11111011 10000011
EXPECTED PATTERN:
11011011 10001011
PF4:START WRAP
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF6:QUIT
Chapter 13. Wrap Test
13-47
LIe Tailgate Default Pattern
The default pattern illustrated below is provided for the tailgate. Get the wrap
block for the type of LIe being tested. Remove the cable from the position you
want to test and replace it with the wrap block. When the test is completed
successfully, remove the wrap block and replace it with the cable you took out.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
LINE ADDRESS: 0
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CONTROL LEAD WRAP: DEFAULT PATTERN
TRANSMIT PATTERN:
11111011 10000011
EXPECTED PATTERN:
11111011 10100011
PF4:START WRAP
13-48
3720-1
PF6:QUIT
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF3: ALARM
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
Definitions
In the text that follows, these definitions apply:
Requesting Controller, or Requester: The controller that is selected by the
operator as the controller that initiates the link test operations. It sends the data
over the link, and expects responses from the responding controller.
Responding Controller, or Responder: The controller that is selected by the
operator as the responder. It receives the test frames from the requesting
controller and sends them back.
Note: The definitions of requester and responder are completely independent of
whether the controllers are channel- or link-attached.
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-1
Program Environment
The stand-alone link test (called simply "link test" in the rest of this manual) tests
an intermediate network node (INN) link between two IBM communication
controllers. The INN link is an SDLC leased or manually switched line. In
addition, the link to be tested must be defined as an IPL port in the IPL port
table of the requester (and also in the responding controller, if the link test
program is to be used as the responder). The link test consists of two programs:
•
Requester link test program, for use in the requester
•
Responder link test program, for use in the responder.
The programs are resident in the MOSS, and can be run even when the control
program cannot be loaded. This is particularly useful for link-connected
controllers in cases where the control program cannot be loaded over the normal
IPL link(s). It is not essential for the Link Test program to be running in the
responder, as the responding station can be any product capable of replying
correctly to the SDLC 'Test' frame. This is the case with the IBM
communication controllers when running the IBM-supplied Network Control
Program (NCP).
Notes:
14-2
1.
If the link test program is running in both controllers, an operator must be
present at both locations; if only the requester is running the link test, the
operation of the responder can be unattended.
2.
The link test program should preferably be run in the link-attached controller
only, as this mode causes the least disturbance to the network. However, using
the link test responder program as the responder may be necessary if it is
required to collect statistics at the responder.
3.
When using the NCP as the responder, the NCP must activate the link under
test and the physical unit (requester). A 'pending activation' status must be
raised before the test can proceed.
4.
Restriction: When a 37~5 Communication Controller is used as the responder,
the test frame must be a null frame (without data).
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SDLC Test Frame
The format of the SDLC Test frame is shown below. Refer to IBM Synchronous
Data Link Control: General Information, GA27-3093 for further information on
SDLC.
SDLC FRAME
Frame Check Sequence
(2 bytes)
INFORMATION
(variable length in multiples of 8 bits)
Notes:
1.
The address field contains the address of the responder to which the test frame
is sent.
2.
The information field can be either of the default patterns, or the personal
pattern. The personal pattern may be null.
3.
The frame sent back by the responder should be identical to the frame sent by
the requester.
•
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-3
Link Test Function Procedure
Before Starting
To perform a link test, load the link test program (requester) into the requester.
In addition, load the responding station with the link test responder program if
you want to use it as the responder.
Warning: The link to be tested must be defined as an IPL port in
the IPL port table of the requester. The controller address, of the
responder side, must be defined in the IPL Port Common Options
screen. I t must also be defined as an IPL port in the responder, if
the link test program is to be used as the responder. When the
requester is a link-attached 3720, as is usually the case, the link will
probably already be defined as an IPL port. The controller
address, of the responder side, must be defined in the IPL Port
Common Options screen.
The IPL port table(s) must be updated before loading takes place (Chapter 6). If
you change the IPL port table(s), you must reload the corresponding link testes).
Do not forget to restore the original contents of the IPL port table(s) when you
have finished using the link tests.
Notes:
When defining the IP L ports, pay particular attention to the following points:
1.
Verify the parameters of the link (duplex or half-duplex, switched or
nonswitched, and direct attachment/external clock). If the link test is to be
used in the wrap mode at the modem (local or remote) level, the IP L port must
be defined as full-duplex.
2.
If the responder is the Link Test program, verify that the IP L ports are defined
identically at both ends of the link.
Error messages are described starting in Chapter 24.
14-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Requester
Warning: Loading the link test program destroys the control
program.
Loading the Stand-Alone Link Test Program
1.
Disable all channel ports and power up the 3720 if not already done.
2.
Perform a MOSS IML from the control panel.
3.
Define the intermediate network node (INN) link as an IPL port in the IPL
port table.
4.
Enter LOQ followed by SEND to select function Load Link Test Requester.
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
STAND-ALONE LINK TEST PROGRAM IPL
LOADING IN PROGRESS AT REQUESTER
AFTER 'LINK TEST PROGRAMS LOADED' MSG • ENTER T IN THE
SIA AREA. THEN SELECT "LT" TO START THE TEST
PF4:STOP
PFS:RESUME
The machine status area shows the progression of the loading process.
Note: If an error occurs during IPL Phase 3, the following message is
displayed:
IPL PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 LINK TEST PROGRAM ABEND
5.
When LINK TEST PROGRAM LOADED is displayed in the MSA, enter T
followed by SEND to terminate IPL.
6.
Enter LT followed by SEND to select the Link Test function.
7.
The initialization menu is displayed.
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-5
Link Test Initialization Screen
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
REQUESTER
- LINK ADDRESS
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
INITIALIZATION
(0-27. 32-83)
- RESPONDER ADDRESS (00 TO FF)
14-6
SERIAL NUMBER:
==>
0
==>
G
1.
Enter the link address 0 The link address is the address of the 3720 port to
which the link cable is connected.
2.
Enter the responder address
The responder address is the address that is
placed by the requester in the SDLC test frame. It has already been defined
in the IPL port common options for the responder. This address does not
change when the responder sends back the test frame to the requester unless
the broadcast address (X'FF') is used in this case.
3.
Press SEND. When the initialization is successful, the options screen replaces
the initialization screen.
e.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Options Screen
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
3720-1
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
REQUESTER
TEST OPTIONS
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
-ENTER PATTERN OPTION (0.1.2)
o = CREATE PERSONAL PATTERN
1 a USE DEFAULT PATTERN NUHBER 1
2 = USE DEFAULT PATTERN NUHBER 2
==>
-ENTER COUNT OF TEST (1 TO 99) OR P
P = PERHANENT
==>
PF3: ALARH
C)
==>
-SELECT TEST HODE (lOR S)
I = INVESTIGATION HODE (STOP ON ERROR)
S = STATISTICAL HODE
1.
Select the pattern option O. You have three possibilities:
•
Enter 0 to create your own pattern (see Personal Pattern screen).
•
Enter 1 to select the 128 bytes from X'OO' through X'7F'.
•
Enter 2 to select the 128 bytes from X'80' through X'FF'.
Both the IBM NCP and the Link Test Responder programs can buffer a full
128 bytes. Other responders may be limited to less than 128 bytes; for
example, the controller load/dump program (CLDP) is limited to 32 bytes. In
this case, there will be an INVALID DATA RECEIVED message if the test
message sent by the requester was longer than the limit.
2.
3.
Select the count option C). You have two possibilities:
•
Enter a count from 1 to 99 as requested by the prompt message.
Counting takes place from 1 to the count that you have entered.
•
Enter P to select the permanent count. Counting takes place from 1 to
65535, and then wraps back to O.
Select the mode option G. You have two possibilities:
•
Enter I to select the investigation mode. The test stops on the first error
detected, and information relative to the error is displayed. The test can
be restarted, and will then stop on the next error, if any.
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-7
•
4.
Enter S to select the statistical counters mode. Error counts are kept in
statistical counters; an error does not stop the test (unless the error
disables the line).
Press SEND to validate the selection. One of the following screens will be
displayed, depending on the options that you entered:
•
Investigation mode screen
•
Statistical mode screen
•
Personal pattern screen.
Note: Whatever the mode you selected, the test stops when the specified count of
tests (if any) is exhausted and the link test function is terminated. You can also
stop the test at any time by pressing the BREAK (ATTN) key. You may then
decide to continue the test or to terminate the link test function by entering T.
Investigation Mode Screen
This screen is displayed when you selected the investigation mode from the
options screen. The test stops on the first error detected, and the error data is
displayed (see "Requester Error Screen Example" below).
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
REQUESTER
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
INVESTIGATION MODE
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
PERMANENT TEST
CURRENT COUNT
PRESS ATTN TO STOP THE TEST
The screen above shows the 'permanent test' option selected in the first line. If
you selected the count option, the first line appears as follows:
REQUESTER INVESTIGATION MODE TEST COUNT = xx
14-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
The link test function terminates when the specified count (if any) is reached. The
message
COUNT OF TESTS EXHAUSTED - LINK TEST FUNCTION COMPLETED
is then displayed in the message area. The CURRENT COUNT is incremented
from 1 to the user-specified count or, for a permanent test, from 1 to 65535,
wrapping back to O.
1.
Press BREAK (ATTN) to stop the test.
2.
Press PF4 to continue the test, or end the link test function by entering T.
Note: When using the broadcast address (X'FF'), the test stops and the following
message is displayed:
ADDRESS RECEIVED: XX
where XX is the address of the responder.
Requester Error Screen Example
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
REQUESTER
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
INVESTIGATION MODE
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
PERMANENT TEST
CURRENT COUNT
HARDWARE ERROR ON TRANSMIT
SCF:
LCS:
SES:
PF4: CONTINUE
SCF, LCS, and SES are described on page 14-16.
Press PF4 to continue the test, or T followed by SEND to end the link test
function.
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-9
Statistical Counters Screen ,
The counters are refreshed twice per second. When the value of a counter
changes, this count is highlighted for two seconds. The screen has the following
format:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
REQUESTER
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
STATISTICAL COUNTERS
TEST FRAMES SENT OK
TEST FRAMES RECEIVED OK
INVALID ADDRESS FIELD RECEIVED
INVALID CONTROL FIELD RECEIVED
INVALID/TOO MICH DATA RECEIVED
COMMAND REJECT RECEIVED
HARDWARE ERROR
ON TRANSMIT:
SCANNER ERROR
ON TRANSMIT:
TRANSMISSION ERROR ON TRANSMIT:
TIMEOUT
ON TRANSMIT:
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
TEST COUNT = NN
ON
ON
ON
ON
RECEIVE:
RECEIVE:
RECEIVE:
RECEIVE:
PRESS ATTN TO STOP THE TEST
For the permanent test, the counters can count up to 65355, wrapping back to O.
14-10
1.
Press BREAK (ATTN) to stop the test.
2.
Press PF4 to continue the test, or T followed by SEND to end the link test
function.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Personal Pattern Screen
This screen allows you to create a personal pattern of up to 128 bytes.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
PERSONAL PATTERN
- ENTER PAIRS OF HEX CHARACTERS SEPARATED BY ONE BLANK
==> 00 01 02 04 OB 10 20 40 BO AB AC AE CC CF DO EE <==
<=..
==> EF FF 24 4B BB SF
==>
<==
<==
==>
<==
==>
<==
==>
==>
<==
==>
<==
- ENTER C WHEN PATTERN IS COMPLETE==>
PFS:QUIT
1.
Enter the pattern as pairs of hexadecimal characters separated by a single
blank as shown on the screen above.
It is possible to send an empty (null) data pattern; to do this, enter C, then
press SEND.
This may be useful if you wish to send an empty message consisting only of a
header and a trailer.
2.
Enter C followed by SEND to check the data for valid hexadecimal
characters.
3.
The investigation mode screen or the statistical counters screen is displayed,
depending on the option specified in the OPTIONS screen.
Notes:
1.
You can return to the OPTIONS screen at any time by pressing PF6.
2.
Both the IBM NCP and the Link Test Responder programs can buffer a full
128 bytes. Other responders may be limited to less than 128 bytes; for example,
the controller load/dump program (CLDP) is limited to 32 bytes. In this case,
there will be an INVALID DATA RECEIVED message if the test message sent
by the requester was longer than the limit.
3.
The null pattern must be used if the responder is a 3705 Communication
Controller running NCP.
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-11
Responder
Warning: Loading the link test program destroys the control
program.
Loading the Stand-Alone Link Test Program
1.
Disable all channel ports and power up the 3720 if not already done.
2.
Perform a MOSS IML from the control panel.
3.
Define the intermediate network node (INN) link as an IPL port in the IPL
port table.
4.
Enter LOS followed by SEND. The screen displays:
LOADING IN PROGRESS AT RESPONDER
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
STAND-ALONE LINK TEST PROGRAM IPL
LOADING IN PROGRESS AT RESPONDER
AFTER 'LINK TEST PROGRAMS LOADED' MSG. ENTER T IN THE
SIA. THEN SELECT " LT"
TO START THE TEST
The machine status area shows the progression of the loading process.
14-12
5.
When LINK TEST PROGRAM LOADED is displayed in the MSA, enter T
in the selection area to terminate IPL.
6.
Enter LT followed by SEND to select the link test function.
7.
The initialization menu is displayed.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Initialization Screen
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
RESPONDER
INITIALIZATION
- LINK ADDRESS (0-27. 32-83)
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
o
=m>
1.
Enter the link address 0 This is the address of the 3720 port to which the
link cable is connected.
2.
Press SEND. When the initialization is completed, the initialization screen
changes to:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
RESPONDER
INITIALIZATION
- LINK ADDRESS (0-27. 32-83)
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
==>
INITIALIZATION COMPLETED
- PRESS SEND TO START THE TEST
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-13
3.
Press SEND.
4.
The initialization screen is replaced by the statistical counters screen.
Statistical Counters Screen
The counters are refreshed twice per second. When the value of a counter
changes, this count is highlighted for two seconds. The screen has the following
format:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF:' LOGOFF
RESPONDER
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
STATISTICAL COUNTERS
TEST FRAMES RECEIVED OK
TEST FRAMES SENT OK
INVALID ADDRESS FIELD RECEIVED
INVALID CONTROL FIELD RECEIVED
MORE THAN 128 BYTES RECEIVED
HARDWARE ERROR
SCANNER ERROR
TRANSMISSION ERROR
TIMEOUT
ON
ON
ON
ON
TRANSMIT:
TRANSMIT:
TRANSMIT:
TRANSMIT:
ON RECEIVE:
ON RECEIVE:
ON RECEIVE:
PRESS ATTN TO STOP COUNTER REFRESH
When you press BREAK (ATTN), the screen is frozen, but the test (and counter
incrementation) continues.
1.
If no error was detected, press PF4 to restart counter refreshing.
2.
If at least one error was detected:
Press PF4 to restart counter refreshing, or
Press PF5 to display the last error that was detected (see "Responder
Error Screen Example").
14-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Responder Error Screen Example
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:LINK TEST
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
RESPONDER
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NJtIBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
LAST DETECTED ERROR
HARDWARE ERROR ON TRANSMIT
SCF:
LCS:
SES:
PF4: CONTINUE
SCF, LCS, and SES are described on page 14-16.
Press PF4 to redisplay the statistical counters screen, and to restart counter
refreshing.
Note: If an error disables the line, the function is terminated and the message
area displays:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
You must now select the link test function (LT) to restart the test (reloading of
the link test program is not necessary).
Chapter 14. Stand-Alone Link Tests
14-15
Meaning of SCF, LCS, and SES Fields
The following list includes only transmission faults; for other values of these
fields, consult your IBM service representative.
SCF
LCS
SES
Meaning
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
E2
EE
F2
F4
F6
F8
E2
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
40
00
10
08
01
CTS dropped
DSR dropped
CTS failed to rise
DSR failed to rise
Cable not installed
DSR/CTS failed to drop
Modem retrain
Abort line idle
Abort
CRG check
Flag off boundary
Early flag
**
**
**
**
**
Where:
** may be any value.
xx is a byte whose bits have the following meaning:
Bit
Meaning
0
Halt/abort
Service request
Overrun/underrun
Modem check
Data stored
End of message
Data received
Receive sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
The disk functions allow you to:
•
Install new microcode for an engineering change (EC).
•
Save the disk onto diskettes, once you have installed microcode fixes (MCFs),
upgraded your 3720, or modified your files such as LDF, IPL port tables,
control program procedures.
•
Restore the disk from the diskettes if you suspect that the new release you
installed, or the latest update in your files, is incompatible with your
applications, or if your disk has been replaced, or you suspect a disk problem.
•
Initialize the diskette.
•
Put the disk recording arm back to the landing zone.
Warning
Before selecting the Disk Functions, set MOSS offline:
MOSS-OFFLINE is displayed in the MSA.
To move the cursor
Selection:
o0
(I
SEND
)
To select disk functions
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-1
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
DISK FUNCTION SELECTION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
- SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWINC FUNCTION ==>1
2
3
4
5
= EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
= SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
= RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
= DISKETTE INITIALIZATION
= POSITION
DISK RECORDING ARM BACK TO LANDING ZONE
If you selected option:
1,
2,
3,
4,
5,
15-2
go
go
go
go
go
to
to
to
to
to
page
page
page
page
page
15~3
15-8
15-15
15-20
15-23
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF3: ALARM
EC Microcode Installation
To install a new EC, you received four diskettes: two sets of a primary and a
secondary diskette. Each set is labeled "Normal" and "Backup". Use the normal
set for first installation, then use the backup set thereafter.
EC installation is performed in two steps:
1.
Check that both diskettes belong to the same EC.
2.
Copy the diskettes onto the disk.
To move the cursor
Selection:
o
0 (I
CD ( I
SEND
SEND
To select disk/unctions
)
To select
)
Ee microcode installation
Checking the Diskettes
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT PRIMARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PF6:QUIT
Once the primary diskette is mounted, you are prompted to check if it is the
correct diskette.
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-3
Machine Status Area
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OISK FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
MOUNTED PRIMARY DISKETTE IDENTIFICATION
EC NUMBER
INTERNAL 10
= XXXXXXX
= YYYYYYYY
o
- PLEASE CONFIRM (YIN) ==>
PFS: QUIT
0 is not the correct one, enter N. You are then
invited to mount the correct primary diskette.
If the EC number displayed on
If the EC number is correct, enter Y.
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
- MOUNT SECONDARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PFS:QUIT
15-4
3720i3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
Once the secondary diskette is mounted, both diskettes are compared.
•
If both diskettes match, you are prompted to mount the primary diskette to
start EC installation. See "Copying the Diskettes" on page 15-6.
•
If both diskettes do not match, the following screen is displayed:
MaChine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DISKETTES DO NOT BELONG TO THE SAME PAIR :
PRIMARY EC NUMBER : XXXXXXX INTERNAL 10 : YYYYYYYY
SECONDARY EC NUMBER : XXXXXXX INTERNAL 10 : YYYYYYYY
~
- PRESS SENO
PF6:QUIT
6) Either the EC number or the internal identification of the secondary diskette
does not match that of the primary diskette.
Press SEND and mount the correct secondary diskette.
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-5
Copying the Diskettes
If both diskettes belong the same Be, the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ._=>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT PRIMARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PF8:QUIT
If you mount a diskette that is not the previous primary diskette checked, you will
be invited to mount the correct one.
When the primary diskette is copied, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT SECONDARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
WARNING:
15-6
FROM NOW ON. SELECTING TERMINATE CAUSES MOSS DOWN AND THE DISK IS DESTROYED
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If you mount a diskette that is not the previous secondary diskette checked, you
will be invited to mount the correct one.
When the BC installation is completed, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
EC MICROCODE INSTALLATION
EC XXXXXXX CORRECTLY INSTALLED. PRESS SEND
- PERFORM MOSS IML FROM CONTROL PANEL (NO OTHER ACTION IS POSSIBLE)
PFS:QUIT
When MOSS is IMLed, the 3720 function menu is displayed, unless there is a
pending function. In this case, the CCU Function menu is displayed.
Warning
•
A new release (BC) of the microcode also contains microcode fixes
(MCFs). Once you have installed the new release, apply these MCFs,
which are now on your disk:
8 0 0 0 ((
o (I
SEN)
)
SEN)
)
to select MCF function
To apply them automatically on the disk.
For more information on the MCF function, go to page 16-3.
•
Once you have installed the new EC and applied MCFs, you should
save your disk onto:
The primary backup diskette
The secondary backup diskette
The 3721 backup diskette, if you have a 3721.
If you have any diskette problems, try your normal copy and request a second set
from IBM.
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-7
Save Disk onto Diskettes
Disk contents are saved on two or three diskettes. When the disk is saved, these
diskettes are named:
•
Primary diskette
•
Secondary diskette
•
3721 diskette.
Use the backup of each diskette.
Use this function to:
•
Create a backup copy of initial diskettes
•
Copy the MOSS disk files after new microcode fixes have been applied
•
Copy the disk after changing link IPL Ports, PLS, CDF, LDF, and MLT
files, and control program procedures.
This enables you to restore the disk from diskettes in case the disk becomes
unusable owing to bad information on the disk, or physical damage.
The disk contents are saved on two diskettes for a 3720, or three diskettes for a
3720 and 3721. These diskettes must be compatible with the MOSS disk format,
either:
•
The primary and secondary backup diskettes for a 3720, or primary,
secondary, and expansion diskettes for a 3720 and 3721 that you received for
installation, or
•
Diskettes formatted with the diskette initialization function described later in
this chapter.
Warning: Use PC diskettes with part number 2HC 6109660 or
equivalent (double,,;sided, high-density).
Diskette Terminology
The word mount is used on the screens, or in this manual, to mean:
1.
Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
2.
Close the diskette drive door (by turning or pulling the door latch).
All diskettes for initial installation or new engineering changes (called Ee or
microcode fixes) are supplied by IBM in two sets:
•
15-8
Normal primary and secondary for the 3720, expansion for the 3721
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
•
Backup, primary, and secondary for the 3720, expansion for the 3721.
Use the normal diskettes for the first installation or first application of microcode
fixes, then use the backup set thereafter.
When MOSS requests you to mount a spare diskette, the prompt on the screen
will refer to FIRST, SECOND, or 3721 (Expansion) diskette. When you save the
contents of the MOSS disk onto diskettes, the prompt on the screen will refer to
PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or 3721 (Expansion) diskette.
Do not forget to label the diskettes and their covers to indicate clearly what they
are.
Selection:
8
00
To move the cursor
((SEND
0((SENO
To select disk junctions
To select save disk onto diskettes function
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-9
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
- DATE: 20/10/85 (MM/DD/YY)
- ENTER SAVE ID (FROM 1 TO 8 CHARACTERS)
- DO YOU WANT TO SAVE ALSO 3721 INFORMATION
(Y OR NO)
PF3: ALARM
....>
0
==>
e
PF6:QUIT
o
e
15-10
You must enter a save identification. It will help you identify the level of
the diskettes.
If you have a 3721 you need to save information about the 3721, enter Y.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Creating the Primary Diskette
You are prompted to mount a diskette on which primary information will be
saved. This diskette will become the primary diskette.
Warning: This diskette must be formatted. If it is not, use
function 6: Diskette Initialization (Page 15-20).
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT FIRST DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PF6:QUIT
When completed, the following is displayed:
DISK SAVED ONTO PRIMARY DISKETTE. REMOVE DISKETTE THEN
PRESS SEND
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-11
Creating the Secondary Diskette
You are then prompted to mount another diskette on which secondary
information will be saved. This diskette will become the secondary diskette.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER IC:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT SECOND DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
When completed, the following is displayed:
DISK SAVED ONTO SECONDARY DISKETTE. REMOVE DISKETTE
THEN PRESS SEND
15-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Creating the 3721 Diskette
If you decided to save 3721 information, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
HOUNT A DISKETTE TO SAVE 37YY INFORMATION. THEN PRESS SEND
When the save is completed, the following message is displayed:
DISK SAVED ONTO 3721 DISKETTE. REMOVE DISKETTE THEN PRESS
SEND
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-13
When diskettes are created, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SAVE DISK ONTO DISKETTES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
DISK CORRECTLY SAVED. TAKE NOTE OF THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
DATE
xx/xx/xx (MM/DD/YYI
EC
XXXXXXX
SAVE ID
XXXXXXXX
INTERNAL ID
HH/MM/SS
THEN PRESS SEND
All the information displayed on the above screen should be written on the
primary, secondary, and 3721 diskettes on which you just saved the disk. It will
help identify your diskettes.
15-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Restore Disk from Diskettes
Restoring the disk from the diskettes is performed in two steps:
1.
Check that both diskettes belong to the same pair.
2.
Copy the diskettes onto the disk.
Note: You can restore the disk only from the diskettes that you created using the
save function.
To move the cursor
Selection:
o 0 (I
o (I
SEND
SEND
To select disk functions
)
To select restore disk from diskettes function
)
Checking the Diskettes
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT PRIMARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PF8:QUIT
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-15
You are then invited to check the primary diskette that you have just mounted:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
37:20-1
SERIAL NUHBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
PF3: ALARM
MOUNTED PRIMARY DISKETTE IDENTIFICATION :
CREATED ON
SAVE 10
INTERNAL 10
=MM/DD/YY
(MM/DD/YY)
= XXXXXXXX
= YYYYYYYY
o eo
- PLEASE CONFIRM (YIN) ==>
PF6:QUIT
Check if the information on 00
diskette:
o
C)
e
e corresponds to what is written on the
is the date of the save.
is the save identification you entered when you saved the disk onto the
diskettes.
was automatically created during the save.
If one of the above does not correspond to what is written on the diskette, enter
N followed by SEND.
If it is the correct diskette, enter Y followed by SEND. The following message is
then displayed:
PRIMARY DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS
Once the primary diskette is checked, you are requested to mount the secondary
diskette.
15-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If the secondary diskette does not match with the primary diskette, the following
screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ==>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2:CCU FNCTN
RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
PF3: ALARM
DISKETTES DO NOT BELONG TO THE SAME PAIR :
PRIMARY CREATED ON : MM/DD/YY SAVE 10 : XXXXXXXX INTERNAL ID : YYYYYYYY
SECONDARY CREATED ON : MH/DD/YY SAVE ID : XXXXXXXX INTERNAL ID : YYYYYYYY
- PRESS SEND
PF6:QUIT
Press SEND and mount the correct secondary diskette.
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-17
Restoring the Disk
If both diskettes match, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
RESTORE DISK FROH DISKETTES
PF3: ALARM
- HOUNT PRIMARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
PF6:QUIT
If you mount a diskette which is not the checked primary diskette, you will be
invited to mount the correct one.
When the primary diskette is copied, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
PF3: ALARM
- HOUNT SECONDARY DISKETTE. THEN PRESS SEND
WARNING: FROH NOW ON. SELECTING TERMINATE CAUSES MOSS DOWN AND THE DISK IS DESTROYED
15-18
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
If you mount a diskette which is not the previous secondary diskette checked, you
will be invited to mount the correct one.
When the restore is completed, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) .....>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
RESTORE DISK FROM DISKETTES
DISK CORRECTLY RESTORED. PRESS SEND
- PERFORM MOSS IHL FROM CONTROL PANEL (NO OTHER ACTION IS POSSIBLE)
PF6:QUIT
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-19
Diskette Initialization
Use the Diskette Initialization function to format your diskettes. Diskette
initialization is performed in two phases.
1.
Formatting
2.
Checking
Warning: Use PC diskettes with part number 2HC 6109660 or
equivalent.
To move the cursor to the selection area.
Selection:
00 ( I
SEND
To select disk functions
To select diskette initialization
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
DISKETTE INITIALIZATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- PLEASE CONFIRM YOUR SELECTION (Y OR N) ==>
PF6:QUIT
If you enter N, the Disk Function Option screen is displayed.
If you enter Y, you are invited to mount the diskette to be formatted.
15-20
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
DISKETTE INITIALIZATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- MOUNT THE DISKETTE YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE. THEN PRESS SEND
PFS:QUIT
Once you have pressed SEND, diskette initialization starts and the following
messages are displayed to show the progress:
DISKETTE FORMATTING IN PROGRESS
DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS
If the diskette initialization ends without errors, the message DISKETTE
INITIALIZATION SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED is displayed.
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-21
If there are errors, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTot£R 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) .."'=>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
DISKETTE INITIALIZATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
DISKETTE INITIALIZATION UNSUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED:
NUMBER OF TRACK(S) IN ERROR WHILE FORMATTING
NUMBER OF TRACK(S) IN ERROR WHILE CHECKING
WARNING: DO NOT USE THIS DISKETTE TO SAVE YOUR DISK.
PF6:QUIT
You cannot use this diskette to save your disk.
15-22
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
XXX
XXX
PF3: ALARM
Position Disk Recording Arm Back to Landing Zone
Use this function to position the recording arm of the disk back to its landing
zone before removing power from your 3720.
To move the cursor to the selection area.
Selection:
00 ( I
SEN')
To select disk functions
)
To position disk recording
arm back to landing zone
Once selected, the function is immediately started. When completed, the
following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK FUNCTIONS
SERIAL NUMBER:
37:20-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
DISKETTE INITIALIZATION
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
POSITION DISK RECORDING ARM BACK TO LANDING ZONE
DISK RECORDING ARM IS NOW POSITIONED ON LANDING ZONE
WARNING: SELECTING TERMINATE RESTARTS DISk ACTIVITY
PF6:QUIT
Chapter 15. Disk Functions
15-23
(
15-24
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs)
Between two major engineering changes, modifications may be made to the
microcode. The modifications, referred to as microcode fixes (MCFs), are given
to you by your IBM service representative, by means of an MCF file transfer or a
set of new diskettes.
Use the MCF function to:
•
Apply (upgrade) all MCFs transferred to you.
•
Restore the microcode, if you think the MCFs are incompatible with your
applications.
•
Display a history table that gives you the latest level of your microcode.
•
List all MCFs that have been applied in an earlier upgrade of the microcode.
They are referred to as "old" MCFs. Old MCFs can no longer be restored,
they are a permanent part of the code.
•
List of MCFs that have just been transferred, whether or not applied. They
are referred to as "new" MCFs.
Notes:
1.
You cannot use the MCF function when MOSS is online (Chapter 19). Check
the status of MOSS in MSA field x.
2.
All MCFs transferred together onto your disk are applied or restored together.
You cannot apply or restore an MCF individually.
3.
The group of MCFs applied or restored together is identified by the number of
the last MCF in the group.
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs)
16-1
Selecting the MCF Function
To move the cursor
Selection:
o
0 0 ((
SEND
)
To select the MCF function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ==->
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
MCF MANAGEMENT
LAST APPLIED MCF = MCFID19
- SELECT ONE OPTION (1 TO 5)
1
2
3
4
5
==>
= DISPLAY HISTORY TABLE
= AUTOMATIC UPGRADE OF THE
= AUTOMATIC RESTORE OF THE
= LIST OLD MCF(S)
= LIST
MICROCODE
MICROCODE
NEW MCFIS)
Once you have selected an option, you are requested to enter the date.
16-2 3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Applying MCFs
All MCFs are applied automatically as soon as you have selected the functions.
Selection:
o (I
SEN)
To select automatic upgrade of the microcode
)
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
IDENTIFIER
HCFI D28
HCFID29
HCFID30
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
UPGRADE OF MICROCODE
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN
1/1
APPLIED
APPLIED
APPLIED
- UPGRADE COHLETED. PRESS SEND
When all MCFs are applied, the following message is displayed:
UPGRADE COMPLETED, PRESS SEND
Once the upgrade is completed, you must IML MOSS. The procedure is given in
Chapter 2.
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs)
16-3
Data and Disk Errors While Applying MCFs
If an MCF cannot be applied, a screen similar to the following is displayed that
tells you why the MCF was not applied.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
IDENTIFIER
HCFID20
MCFID21
MCFID22
MCFID23
HCF I 024
MCFID25
HCFID26
HCFID27
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
UPGRADE OF MICROCODE
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN 112
APPLIED
APPLIED
APPLIED
APPLIED
APPLIED
APPLIED
NOT APPLIED: MCF DATA DOES NOT MATCH 'MODULE DATA'
==>
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
- UPGRADE ABORTED. PRESS SEND
Press SEND.
All applied MCFs will be restored, but the MCF function will not be canceled.
If a disk error occurs while applying MCFs, the MCF function is canceled, and
the following message is displayed, and MCFs are not restored:
DISK(ETTE) ERROR: MCF FUNCTION CANCELED
16-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Restoring MCFs
If the last-applied MCFs appear to be incompatible with your applications, you
may restore the previous MCFs. All the previously applied MCFs are restored
automatically as soon as you have selected the function.
Selection:
o (I
SEN:)
)
To select automatic microcode restore
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
IDENTIFIER
RESTORE OF MICROCODE
HCFID22
HCFID21
HCFID20
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN 111
RESTORED
RESTORED
RESTORED
- RESTORE COHLETED. PRESS SEND
When all the previous MCFs are restored, the following message is displayed:
RESTORE COMPLETED, PRESS SEND
Once the restore is completed, you must IML the MOSS. The procedure is given
in Chapter 2.
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs)
16-5
Displaying the MCF History Table
The MCF history table lists all upgrades and restores brought to the microcode.
(] ( I
Selection:
SENJ
)
To display the history table
A screen similar to the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
0
CODE
CODE
CODE
CODE
CODE
CODE
CODE
CODE
UPGRADED TO LEVEL
UPGRADED TO LEVEL
UPGRADED/RESTORE FAILED
RESTORED TO LEVEL
UPGRADED TO LEVEL
UPGRADED TO LEVEL
UPGRADED TO LEVEL
RESTORED TO LEVEL
PFS:BOTTOM
PF6:QUIT
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN 112
MCF HISTORY
MM/DD/YY
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
00/00/00
SERIAL NUMBER:
LEVEL
MCFID4
MCFID8
MCFID4
MCFID8
MCFID10
MCFID12
MCFIDI0
G
PF8:FORWARD
This table gives you the latest level of the microcode.
16-6
o
Date of the apply or restore
e
The level is identified by the last MCF that has been applied or restored.
3720i3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Displaying Old MCFs
Old MCFs are those already applied in an earlier upgrade of the microcode.
They can no longer be restored.
Selection:
o (I
SEN)
)
To list old MCF( s)
A screen similar to the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
IDENTIFIER
OLD HCF(S)
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN 1/ 3
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
MCFID1 A ==>
MCFID2 A ==>
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
MCFID3 A ==>
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
MCFID<4 A·">
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDODDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
MCFID5 A ==>
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
MCFID6 A ==>
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG
MCFID7 A ==>
MCFIDB A =->
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
(A-APPLIED. OLD MCF(S) ARE ALWAYS APPLIED)
- TO SCAN AN MCF. ENTER S AGAINST IDENTIFIER
PF6:QUIT
PF5:BOTTOM
PF8:FORWARD
Old MCFs are always applied. They can no longer be restored.
Chapter 16. Microcode Fixes (MCFs)
16-7
Displaying New MCFs
New MCFs are those just transferred or received with new diskettes, whether or
not applied.
To list New MCF( s)
Selection:
A screen similar to the following is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MICROCODE FIXES
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
IDENTIFIER
NEW MCF (S)
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
SCREEN 11 2
MCFID20 N ==> TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
MCFID21 N ==> uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuUUUU
MCFID22 N ==> VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
MCFID23 N ==> WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWVWVWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MCFID24 N ==> xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MCFI D25 N ==> YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
MCFID26 N ==> ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
MCFID27 N ==> 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
(A=APPLIED. N=NON-APPLIED)
- TO SCAN AN MCF. ENTER S AGAINST IDENTIFIER
PF6:QUIT
PF5:BOTTOM
PF8:FORWARD
16-8
3720i3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 17. Machine Level Table (MLT)
Use this function to display the level of modifications of microcode and control
programs. It displays:
•
The control program version that is loaded in the CCU
•
The control program load name (8 characters)
•
The control program load id (8 characters)
•
The EC level of the microcode
•
The EC message
•
The last-applied MCF
•
The date of the last-applied MCF.
Selection:
To position the cursor
To select the machine level
table function
Chapter 17. Machine Level Table (MLT)
17-1
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: MACHINE LVL TABLE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
CONTROL PROGRAM: EP
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
o
EC LEVEL : 021180E
LAST APPLIED MCF : H180A011
o
3720-1
PF3: ALARM
VHSPAR14 VERSION4
~
ON 07/29/85
Displays the control program identification when the control program is
loaded. If no control program is loaded, then the message NO CONTROL
PROGRAM LOADED is displayed.
~
Displays the last EC level.
G
Displays the last-applied MCF and the date it was applied.
Warning: Save the new information onto the backup diskette,
every time you update the file (see Chapter 15).
17-2
3720/3721 Communication Controliers Extended Services
Chapter 18. Disk IPL Information
Use the disk IPL Information function to:
•
Display the status of control program load modules and dump, as well as the
automatic dump/load option setting on the MOSS disk
•
Change the automatic dump/load option setting
•
Purge the control program dump file;
Note: The automatic dump/load feature is also referred to as Automatic
IPL/Dump.
To move the cursor
Selection:
o0
0 (I
SEND
)
To select Disk IPL information
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK IPL INFO
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
CP RUNNING:
DISK CONTENTS:
LOAD MODULES:
DUMP:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN (LOAD MODULE STATE)
NNNNNNNN (LOAD MODULE STATE)
NNNNNNNN (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
AUTO DUMP/LOAD:
ACTIVE LOAD MODULE:
PF4: CHANGE AUTO DUMP/LOAD OPTION
YES
NNNNNNNN
PFS:PURGE DUMP
Chapter 18. Disk IPL Information
18-.1
Display Disk IPL Information
o
e
Displays the name of the control program, if there is one, that is running in
the CCU.
Displays the name and status of load modules on the disk. Load modules
are in one of three states:
•
Load module transfer complete. This is indicated by displaying the
name of the load module and the date and time (mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss)
that the load module was saved to the controller disk.
•
Load module is currently being saved to disk. This is indicated by
displaying the name of the load module, followed by the words 'SAVE
IN PROGRESS'.
•
Load module save suspended. No activity has been recorded in the last
five minutes. This is indicated by displaying the name of the load
module, followed by the words 'SAVE SUSPENDED'.
The host operator can purge this partial load module. However, it is not
considered as a valid load module, and will be purged during IPL or
overwritten by the MOSS if the space on the disk is needed for another load
module.
e
e
Displays the name of the control program, if there is one, and the date and
time (mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss) that it was saved to the disk.
Displays the setting of the automatic dump/load option:
•
YES - automatic dump/load set
•
NO - automatic dump/load not set.
If the automatic dump/load option is set, and the controller has a failure, the
control program is dumped to the controller hard disk, and then
automatically reloaded from the MOSS disk. If there is already a dump on
the disk, no dump or load is performed.
In addition, if the automatic dump/load option is set, the MOSS
automatically loads the active control program load module from the
controller hard disk at power on/reset or at a request from the MOSS
console. In this case, no dump is performed.
o
Displays the name of the active load module on the disk. The active load
module is the one currently loaded and running in the CCU, if it was saved
to disk when it was loaded, or loaded from the disk. If no control program
is currently running, the active load module is the name of the last disk load
module that was active. In the event of an automatic IPL, the active disk
module is loaded into the CCU.
Pressing SEND from this screen will refresh the disk IPL information
display.
18-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Change the Automatic Dump/Load Option Setting
To change the automatic dump/load option setting, press PF4 from the Disk IPL
Information display. The setting will change from 'YES' to 'NO' or from 'NO' to
'YES' on the screen.
If there is no active disk load module, you cannot change the automatic
dump/load setting from 'NO' to 'YES'. If you try to do this, the following
message is displayed:
REQUEST REJECTED - NO ACTIVE LOAD MODULE ON DISK
If you try to use this function when the MOSS is busy processing a host
command, the following message is displayed:
REQUEST REJECTED - DISK UPDATING NOT ALLOWED
If you get this message, wait a few minutes, then try again.
Purge the Dump File
To purge the dump file on the disk, press PF5 from the Disk IPL Information
display. If a dump exists on the disk, you are asked to confirm the purge dump
request, as shown on the following screen:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISK IPL INFO
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
CP RUNNING:
DISK CONTENTS:
LOAD MODULES:
DUMP:
AUTO DUMP/LOAD:
ACTIVE LOAD MODULE:
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN (LOAD MODULE STATE)
NNNNNNNN (LOAD MODULE STATE)
NNNNNNNN (MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS)
YES
NNNNNNNN
- PLEASE CONFIRM THE DUMP PURGE (Y OR N) THEN PRESS SEND
=->
PF6:QUIT
Enter Y to confirm the request, or N to cancel it. PF6 (Quit) will also cancel it.
If the request is confirmed, the dump is purged from the disk, and the Disk IPL
Information screen is update'd.
If no dump exists on the disk, the following message is displayed:
Chapter 18. Disk IPL Information
18-3
REQUEST REJECTED - DUMP FILE DOES NOT EXIST
If you try to use this function when the MOSS is busy processing a host
command, the following message is displayed:
REQUEST REJECTED - DISK UPDATING NOT ALLOWED
If you get this message, wait a few minutes, then try again.
I~
\~
18-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
The CCU functions are described in this chapter in alphabetic order. They are:
•
Address compare and branch trace parameter display
•
CCU state
•
Channel adapter state
•
Display/alter
•
Display long
•
MOSS offline
•
MOSS online
•
Reset address compare
•
Reset branch trace
•
Reset CCU /LSSD
•
Set address compare
•
Set branch trace
•
Terminating CCU functions
Note: CCU function messages are described in Chapter 24. The data exchange
function is described in Chapter 21.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-1
Address Compare and Branch Trace Parameter Display
Use the ACjBT parameters function to display the parameters of the current
address compare and branch trace functions.
To display
Selection:
o
0 0 (I
SEN)
}
ceu Function menu
To select ACjBT parameters
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: AC/BT PARAMETERS
-=..>
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA)
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
ADDRESS COMPARE PARAMETERS
CURRENT VALUES
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
BRANCH TRACE PARAMETERS
CURRENT VALUES
AC TYPE
CCU ACTION
MOSS ACTION
= SINGLE
= LI-I
= NO
CCU STOP
• NO
WRAP STOP = YES
STOP ON AC = YES
ADDRESS 1
ADDRESS 1
.. 001234
=L
LOWER LIMIT .. 001234
UPPER LIMIT = 023456
ADDRESS 2
ADDRESS 2
TRACE LEVELS= 1 2
PF4:TO RESTART LATEST AC
PF5:TO RESTART LATEST BT
For a description of the displayed values, refer to "Set Address Compare" and
"Set Branch Trace" functions earlier in this chapter.
PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF4: To restart the latest AC. If there is no active address compare, this starts
an address compare using the displayed parameters.
PF5: To restart the latest BT. If there is no active branch trace, this starts a
branch trace using the displayed parameters.
19-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
CCU State
Use the CCU state function to display the state of the CCU.
To display CCU Function menu
Selection:
o
0
(2] ( (
SEND
)
To select CCU state
The following screen is displayed in refresh mode.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CCU STATE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
CCU STATE:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
XXX
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
o
- PRESS BREAK TO STOP REFRESH
o
The CCU state may be:
RUN: Indicates that instructions are being executed and data transferred.
WAIT: Indicates that the CCU control program is in WAIT state: no
instruction is being performed.
To stop refreshing, press BREAK (ATTN).
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-3
Channel Adapter State (3720 Modell and 11 Only)
Use the channel adapter state function to:
•
Display the state of each channel adapter (enabled or disabled) as well as the
current interface
•
Display the registers of each channel adapter.
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
To select CHL ADAPT STATE
00(ISEND
The Channel Adapter State Display screen is displayed.
Channel Adapter State Display
Once you have selected the function, the channel adapter state screen is
automatically displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CHL ADAPTER STATE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CHANNEL ADAPTER STATES
INTERFACE A
CHANNEL ADAPTERS
INTERFACE STATE
ENBL
2
DSBL
INTERFACE B
CHANNEL ADAPTERS
INTERFACE STATE
DSBL
2
DSBL
ENBL=ENABLED DSBL=DISABLED NCAI=CA NOT INSTALLED
STOP THE CCU THEN PRESS PF4 TO DISPLAY CA REGISTERS
Refer to Chapter 1 for channel adapter numbering.
19-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF3: ALARM
Channel Adapter Register Display
Warning: The channel adapter register display function should be
performed only by trained personnel.
When you display channel adapter registers, the channel adapter auto-selection
mechanism is disabled, if it was initially enabled.
To display the input registers of the channel adapters, you must first display the
channel adapter state. (Take note of the channel adapter state for later
reference.) Then:
CD 0] 0 ( I SEND)
8
To stop the CCU
To display the following screen:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CHL ADAPTER STATE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIAl ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
REG X'E'
= 0000
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SELECTED CA = 1
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
~
ENTER A CA NUMBER ==>
OR PRESS SEND TO DISPLAY THE REGISTERS OF THE SELECTED CA
~
"v'
\
~
Gives the contents of the input register X'E', which is common to all
channel adapters.
SELECTED CA is the number of the channel adapter automatically selected
by the control program.
NONE is displayed instead of SELECTED CA = x if no channel adapter
was selected automatically by the control program.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-5
e
Enter the number of the channel adapter whose registers you want to
display, then press SEND;
or
only press SEND to display the registers of the channel adapter that has
been automatically selected by the control program (SELECTED CA = on
line 0).
The CA registers are then displayed as illustrated in the next screen.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CHL ADAPTER STATE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CHANNEL ADAPTER NUMBER 1
REG X'O'
8800 C002 0000 C004
REG X'4'
D7C5 C440 4000 0080
REG X'S'
C004
REG X'C'
LSR 30
SEND: REDISPLAY
e
0000 0000 0000 2000
A-REG 0000 0000 0000 0000
B-REG 0000 0000 0000 0000
PF8:QUIT
The LSR displayed on this line gives the pointer to the channel adapter cycle
steal.
A description of the registers is given in 3725 and 3720 Principles of Operation.
The only two actions that you can now perform are:
19-6
•
Press SEND to redisplay the registers once, and/or
•
Press PF6 if you want to display other CA registers or terminate the function.
The next screen will be displayed.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CHL ADAPTER STATE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
- PRESS PF4 OR PFS
PF4:ENABLE CA AUTO SELECT PFS:QUIT (AUTO SELECT DISABLED)
Now you have the choice of enabling the CA auto-selection mechanism or leaving
it in disabled state. Press the appropriate PF key:
PF4: To enable the channel adapter auto-selection mechanism and display the
channel adapter state screen.
PF6: To leave the channel adapter auto-selection mechanism in disabled state
and display the channel adapter state screen.
Once the channel adapter state screen is displayed, you may either terminate the
function or display other channel adapter registers.
Termination
You can terminate this function only from the channel adapter state screen.
EJ0(ISEND
Notes:
1.
Before you terminate the function, do not forget to restart the CCU, using the
Start CCU function.
2.
If you displayed channel adapter registers, it is recommended that you set the
channel adapter auto-selection mechanism to its initial state: enabled or
disabled. Refer to ((Channel Adapter Register Display."
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-7
DisplayIAlter
Use the display/alter function to
•
Display CCU storage and local store registers (LSRs), or
•
Alter the CCU data being displayed.
Selection:
To display CCU function menu
o
0 (I
SEt«)
)
To select display/alter
The display function screen is displayed.
Display
After you have selected the display/alter function, select the CCU data that you
want to display.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISPLAY/ALTER
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
-ENTER:
S
L
V
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
FOLLOWED BY STORAGE ADORESS
FOLLOWED BY LSR NUMBER
(WORK REGISTERS)
PFB:ST
19-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
==>
(
You may display, on the same screen, any or all of the following CCU data:
16 bytes of CCU storage
Example: If you enter S1234, 16 bytes are displayed, starting from the
byte at address 1234.
4 LSRs
Example: If you enter L6, four LSRs are displayed, starting from LSR6.
4 work registers
Enter only W to display the first four work registers, then press PF8 to
display the last four.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISPLAY/ALTER
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
-ENTER:
3720-1
PF1: HDVE TO SIA
S FOLLOWED BY STORAGE ADDRESS
L FOLLOWED BY LSR NUHBER
W (WORK REGISTERS)
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
==> W
S 001234 0800 0000 8800 0000 0800 0000 0200 4020
L 06
100010 000000 OBC9C6 OBC9C2
W 00
00212A 000008 000000 02226C
PF4: ALTER PF5: REFRESH
PFS:ST
PF7:BACKWARD PF8:FORWARD
Once a line is displayed, you may display another one. To do so, enter another
CCU data request. Ten lines are available for display on the screen. When the
screen is filled up, it wraps around. The latest displayed line (the current line) is
highlighted.
An explanation of the CCU data displayed (as shown on previous screen):
CCU storage:
S 001234 0800 0000 8800 0000 0800 0000 0200 4020
The letter S (storage) is followed by the address of the first halfword
displayed on this line. Each halfword is separated by two protected blanks.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-9
Local storage registers and work registers:
L 06
100010 000000 OBC9C6 OBC9C2
W 00 00212A 000008 000000 02226C
The letter L (LSR) or W (work register) is followed by the number of the first
register displayed on this line. Registers are separated by two protected blanks.
Once a line is displayed, you may do one of the following:
•
Press SEND to redisplay the current line.
•
Press PF5 to refresh the current line.
•
Press PF7 to display the preceding 16 bytes of storage or the previous four
LSRs.
•
Press PF8 to display the next 16 bytes of storage, the next four LSRs, or the
next four work registers.
•
Enter more CCU data (S, L, or W).
•
Press PF4 to alter data (see "Alter").
•
Press PF6 to start the CCU.
Display PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF4: To switch to alter mode. See "Alter."
PF5: To refresh data every 500 ms. This allows you to view permanently the
updated image of the data that you selected (CCU storage, LSRs, or work
registers). To cancel the refresh, press BREAK (ATTN).
Pressing SEND, in display mode, re-displays the selected CCU data once.
PF6: To start the CCU without selecting function Start CCU.
PF7: To display the preceding 16 bytes of storage, four LSRs, or four work
registers.
PF8: To display the next 16 bytes of storage, four LSRs, or four work registers.
19-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Alter
To alter CCU data (storage, LSRs, and work registers), you must first select the
Display/Alter function and display the CCU data that you want to alter (as
explained in "Display").
To alter storage or LSRs, the control program may be either running or stopped;
but, to alter work registers, it must be stopped. To stop the CCU, if you have
already selected the display/alter function, do as follows:
To display CCU function menu
CD (2] 0 ( I
SEN)
)
To stop the CCU
If you try to use alter while the CCU is not stopped, the message
FIRST STOP THE CCU is displayed.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-11
How to Alter
Assume the display/alter function is already selected and the CCU data to be
altered is already displayed.
1.
(PF4)
To switch from display mode to alter mode
The addressed line is redisplayed on the line below
and on the second line of the work area.
The cursor is positioned at the first character
that may be modified on that second line.
The following message is displayed on the P F key line
MISUSE OF ALTER MAY GIVE UNEXPECTED RESULTS
2. Alter the data.
3. (
I
SEN)
To transmit altered data. The altered line moves
below its original position and the redisplayed
line. It becomes the third line of data indicated
for that address. The screen is now in display mode.
4. Select another address if you want to alter
more data and switch to alter mode (go to step 1).
or
(2] ( I
SEN)
}
To cancel
Note: If you alter data and redisplay it while the control program is running, the
redisplayed data may not match with what you altered. (That is, the system may
have altered the data before you redisplayedit.)
19-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Branch Trace Buffer Allocation
The branch trace buffer address and length are provided by the control program
after the 3720 initialization. However, if you execute a branch trace before the
control program is loaded, you have to allocate the branch trace buffer, as
follows:
To display CCU function menu and select
the display/alter function.
2.
3
.
Enter L7C then
r::1
~
( I sam
)
To display LSRs starting from LSR X'7C'.
to select the Alterfiunction .
4.
Update LSR X'7C' with buffer length. The maximum buffer
length is X' FFFO'. The last digit of the buffer length
must always be O.
5.
Update LSR X'7D' with buffer address
+ X'18'
Note: To alter only the buffer length, you just have to update LSR X'7C' (see
step 4 above).
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISPLAY/ALTER
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
L 7C
L 7C
PF4:DISPLAY
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
0007E8
000818 001244
00003C
0007E8
0007E8
000818 001244
000818 001244
00003C
00003C
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
MISUSE OF ALTER MAY GIVE UNEXPECTED RESULTS
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-13
Alter PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF4 to cancel the alter request and return to display mode.
PF5 to refresh data every 500 ms. This allows you to view permanently the
updated image of the data you selected (CCU storage, LSRs, or work registers).
To cancel the refresh, press BREAK (ATTN).
Pressing SEND, in alter mode, redisplays the selected CCU data once.
PF6 to start the CCU without selecting Start CCU function.
PF7 to display the preceding 16 bytes of storage, four LSRs, or four work
registers.
PF8 to display the next 16 bytes of storage, four LSRs, or four work registers.
19-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Display Long
Use the display long function to display CCU storage, LSRs, work registers, or
CCU input registers.
Selection:
To display
eeu function menu
To select display long function
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISPLAY LONG
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
-ENTER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
S FOLLOWED BY STORAGE ADDRESS =->
L FOLLOWED BY LSR NUMBER
W (WORK REGISTERS)
REGISTERS X'71' TO X'7F'
PFS:BT BUFFER PF6:CCU START
You may display, on the same screen, one of the following:
128 bytes of CCU storage
Example: If you enter S1234, 128 bytes are displayed, starting from the
byte at address 1234.
16 LSRs
Example: If you enter L4, 16 LSRs are displayed, starting from LSR 4.
All work registers
Enter only W to display all the work registers.
CCU input registers from X'71' to X'7F'
Enter only I to display all CCU input registers from X'71' to X'7F'. The
following screen is then displayed.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-15
Note: You cannot use the display long function to display the X'70'
register~
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DISPLAY LONG
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERHINATE OFF: LOGOFF
-ENTER:
3720-1
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
71
S FOLLOWED BY STORAGE ADDRESS
L FOLLOWED BY LSR NUMBER
W (WORK REGISTERS)
REGISTERS X'71' TO X'7F'
OODOCO 000002 000000
74
001E8C
OODOOO 000000 3FOOOO
78
00000o
000100 052201 000818
7C
0007E8
000000 000000 000000
PF5:BT BUFFER
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
==> I:
PF6:CCU START
CCU storage, LSRs, and work registers are presented on the screen in a similar
way to the data displayed by the display falter function. The input registers are
displayed as follows:
I 74 001E8C 000000 000000 3FOOOO
The letter I (for input register) is followed by the number of the first input register
displayed on the line. Input registers are separated by two protected blanks.
19-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Differences Between the DisplayI Alter and Display Long Functions
DISPLAY/ALTER
-
It displays on one line:
16 bytes of storage; or
four LSRs; or
four work registers.
It alters displayed data.
It does not displays on same screen
CCU storage, LSRs, and work
registers.
I t uses the Refresh command.
DISPLAY LONG
It displays on several lines:
128 bytes of storage; or
16 LSRs; or
all work registers; or
all CCU input registers from X /71
to X/7F'.
It does not alter displayed data.
It does not display on same screen
CCU storage, LSRs, and work
registers.
It does not use the Refresh
command.
I
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-17
Displaying Branch Trace Buffer
To display the branch trace buffer:
The first 128 bytes of the branch trace buffer are displayed. The contents of the
first 24 bytes are:
bytes 0-1
Buffer length excluding header (maximum X/FFFO/)
bytes 2-3
Reserved
byte 4
Branch trace options (x = non-significant bit):
xxI. .. x.
xx.1 .. x.
xx .. l.x.
xx ... 1x.
xx .... x1
branch trace active
WRAP
BT STOP ON AC
CCU STOP
MOSS interrupt requested (address compare function)
bytes 5-7
Lower limit address
byte 8
01. ... 00
0.1. .. 00
0.. 1 .. 00
0... 1.00
0.... 100
Program level interrupt traced
level 1
level 2
level 3
level 4
level 5
bytes 9-11
Upper limit address
byte 12
Reserved
bytes 13-15
Address of the first branch trace entry (buffer address +
X/18/).
byte 16
Reserved
bytes 17-19
Address + 8 of the last branch trace buffer entry used,
when the branch trace was stopped
byte 20
Reserved
bytes 21-23
Address of the last branch trace buffer entry of the buffer
Each branch trace entry is eight bytes long and contains:
byte 1
bytes 2-4
byte 5
bytes 6-8
19-18
Come-from program level interrupt (04 means level 4)
Come-from address
Go-to program level interrupt
Go-to address
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
Use the following PF keys only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF5: To display the branch trace buffer.
PF6: To start CCU without selecting function
ceu Start.
PF7: To display the preceding 128 bytes of storage or 16 LSRs.
PF8: To display the next 128 bytes of storage or 16 LSRs.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-19
MOSS Offline
Use the MOSS offline function to set MOSS offline (logical disconnection
between MOSS and the control program).
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
o0
0 (I
SEN)
)
To select MOSS offline
This function is immediately performed. MSA field c displays
MOSS-OFFLINE, and the hex display is FEE.
If you press BREAK (ATTN) while the function MOSS Offline is in progress, the
following two PF keys are displayed:
PF4: To return to the previous status.
PF5: To quit and select another function although MOSS remains offline.
Note: You cannot set MOSS offline while transferring a MOSS or scanner dump
to the host.
19-20
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
MOSS Online
Use the MOSS online function to set MOSS online to the control program and
reset the date and time.
To display
Selection:
o
0 0 ((
SEt«)
)
eeu function menu
To select MOSS Online
This function is immediately performed. MSA field c displays MOSS-ONLINE,
and the hex display is 000.
If you press BREAK (ATTN) while the function MOSS Online is in progress, the
following three PF keys are displayed:
PF4: To return to the previous status.
PF5: To quit and select another function although MOSS remains online.
PF6: To start the CCU functions.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-21
Reset Address Compare
Use the reset address compare function to cancel the current address compare.
To display
Selection:
o0
CD ( I
SEND
)
eeu function
menu
To select reset address compare
When the address compare is canceled, the Address Compare Parameter screen is
displayed. See "Address Compare and Branch Trace Parameter Display".
Reset Branch Trace
Use the reset branch trace function to cancel the current branch trace.
To display
Selection:
o0
(2] ( I
SEND
)
eeu function
menu
To select reset branch trace
When the branch trace is canceled, the Branch Trace Parameter screen is
displayed. See "Address Compare and Branch Trace Parameter Display".
!
I
\
19-22
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Reset CCU ILSSD
Use this function to reset the entire CCU (LSSD, IOC, local store registers, 3720
storage). The channel adapter registers are not reset.
This function destroys the current state of the CCU control program. The only
way to restart the 3720 is to IPL it.
To display CCU junction menu
Selection:
o
0 8 (I
SEND
)
To select reset CCUjLSSD
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
WARNING:
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
THIS FUNCTION DESTROYS THE CCU CONTROL PROGRAM
ANSWER YES OR N TO CONFIRM ==>
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-23
Set Address Compare (AC)
Use the set address compare function to force the CCU to perform a specific
action whenever a storage address that you specified is detected during a specific
storage access operation.
You can execute simultaneously an address compare and a branch trace. (See
"Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace". and the description of line
G of the first screen of the branch trace function.)
Selection:
To display
o
0 (I
SEND
)
eeu function
menu
To select set address compare
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: SET ADDR COMPARE
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
ADDRESS COMPARE SELECTION
- ENTER ADDRESS COMPARE TYPE (S. D)
S = SINGLE
D = DOUBLE
- ENTER CCU ACTION (I. S. N)
I = LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT
S = CCU STOP
N = NO ACTION
- MOSS INTERRUPT (Y. N)
N = NO
Y = YES
==>
S
0
==>
I
e
==>
N
G
PF3: ALARM
PF4 : LATEST SELECTED ADDRESS COMPARE OPTIONS
o
Selecting the address compare type:
SINGLE (Single Address Compare): You will be requested to enter a
unique storage address and one or more storage access operations. When
the storage address is detected during anyone of the storage access
operations, the CCU action (selected on line G) is executed.
19-24
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DOUBLE (Double Address Compare): You will be requested to enter two
addresses: the first one must be a load or store instruction address; the
second one, a storage address to be accessed by the selected instruction.
When both addresses are detected simultaneously, the CCU action (selected
on line G) is executed.
4) Selecting the CCU action:
LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT - CCU level 1 interrupt
CCU STOP - Control program stop and cycle steal stop
NO ACTION - No CCU action is required
e
Selecting MOSS INTERRUPT:
•
If you enter Y, a MOSS level I interrupt is requested to display address
compare results in MSA field d.
•
If you enter N, address compare results are not displayed in the MSA.
e,
If you select S (CCU STOP) on line
address compare results are
always displayed, whether you selected MOSS INTERRUPT = = > Y
or N.
Once you have entered the different parameters on the screen, press SEND. The
following screen is then displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: SET ADDR COMPARE
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
SINGLE AC - CCU LVL1 OPTION - NO MOSS INTERRUPT
e
- ENTER STORAGE ADDRESS (1 TO 6 DIGITS)
11=>
~
- ENTER 1 TO 4 STORAGE ACCESSES (L. S. C. I)
L = LOAD
S = STORE
C .. CYCLE STEAL
I = INSTRUCTION
....>
0
PF3: ALARM
PF4 : LATEST SELECTED ADDRESS COMPARE VALUES
e
This line shows up the parameters that you selected on the preceding screen.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-25
o
o
The storage address must be in the range of the CCU storage.
The storage accesses are:
LOAD: The selected action is performed after a load instruction has accessed
the storage address that you selected on line O.
STORE: The selected action is performed after a store instruction has
accessed the storage address that you selected on line O.
CYCLE STEAL: The selected action is performed after the cycle steal
mechanism has accessed the storage address that you selected on line O.
INSTRUCTION: The selected action is performed after the execution of the
instruction for which you specified the address on line O.
Once you have entered all the parameters on the screen, press SEND.
The Address Compare is then started. The term AC appears in the MSA field d
and the following screen displays the parameters that you have selected.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: SET ADDR COMPARE
AC
3720-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PFl: MOVE TO SIA
ADDRESS COMPARE PARAMATERS
CURRENT VALUES
AC TYPE
CCU ACTION
MOSS ACTION
= SINGLE
ADDRESS 1
ACCESS 1
= 001234
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
= Ll- I
= NO
=L
ADDRESS 2
ACCESS 2
PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY FUNCTION MENU
This screen remains displayed until you press ENTER to display the function
menu, or cancel the address compare (Reset Address Compare) and select
terminate function.
19-26
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Notes:
1.
To set a new address compare when the CCU stops because of a previous
address compare (STOP-AC in MSA fzeld g), you need not select function
Reset Address Compare, but only do the following:
2.
If, after a successful address compare (hit) with CCU STOP, you set another
address compare at the same instruction address + 2, +4, or +6, the address
compare may be unsuccessful.
3.
lfyou set a double address compare with storage access operation LOAD, the
address compare may be successful on a store instruction that accesses the same
data address when the store instruction immediately precedes or follows the load
instruction. This is also true for a store instruction.
Address Compare Cancel
To cancel the address compare:
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
o0
0 ((
SEN)
)
To select reset address compare
The terminate function does not cancel the address compare but only the set
address compare function.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-27
Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace
If you specify option CCU STOP in either the address compare or the branch
trace when running simultaneously, the option applies only to the address
compare function. For example, if you simultaneously execute these two functions
with:
CCU STOP for BT,
the CCU will stop if the address compare is successful, but will not stop upon
reaching the end of the branch trace buffer.
Note: If you specify Y, or accept the default (also Y), for ENTER Y FOR BT
BUFFER WRAP on the Set Branch Trace menu, the CCU will stop upon
rea,ching the end of the branch trace buffer.
Address Compare PF Key
Use the following PF key only when they are displayed on the screen.
PF4:LATEST ADDRESS COMPARE VALUES, or
PF4:LATEST ADDRESS COMPARE OPTIONS - to display the parameters of
the last address compare transmitted. This is helpful when you want to execute
an address compare several times with the same or nearly the same parameters.
Machine Status Area (MSA)
a
9
I
I
m
b
c
d
h
i
j
n
I
I
e
k
I
I
f
I
service personnel only
(
19-28
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
MSA field d is reserved for the CCU address compare. It displays:
AC
(An Address Compare is set).
If you selected MOSS INTERRUPT = = > Y or CCU STOP, the following
information is added:
HIT
(A single or double address compare is successful).
Note: Field g displays STOP-AC when the CCU control program is stopped
because of the address compare, and field f displays the address of the last
instruction executed.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-29
Set Branch Trace (BT)
Use the set branch trace function to save in the branch trace buffer information
about non,sequential instructions, such as, when a branch is executed or a new
program lev.el is entered. The information saved is: come-from interrupt level,
come-from address, go-to interrupt level, and go-to address.
You can execute simultaneously a branch trace and an address compare. Refer to
"Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace".
Notes:
19-30
1.
Before executing a branch trace, make sure that the branch trace buffer is
allocated. If it is not, allocate it. Refer to "Branch Trace Buffer Allocation,"
page 19-13.
2.
To prevent unwanted trace records due to IOO-millisecond timer-level 3
interrupts to and from the wait state:
•
The code traced should not include any level 3 code associated with the
servicing of timer interrupts.
•
Local store register X'lS' should be set to a storage address outside the
range of the storage block being traced. Register X'lS' must be set to this
value only while the CCU is in the Wait state.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Selection:
To display CC U function menu
To select set branch trace
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: SET BRANCH TRACE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) =.->
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
- ENTER Y FOR CCU STOP ON BT BUFFER FULL
==>
N
- ENTER Y FOR BT BUFFER WRAP
==>
Y
- ENTER Y FOR BT STOP ON AC
->
N
- ENTER LOWER LIMIT ADDRESS (1 TO 6 DICITS)
==>
- ENTER UPPER LIMIT ADDRESS (1 TO 6 DIGITS)
==>
- BLANK THE UNWANTED LEVEL INTERRUPT(S)
==>
12345
PF3: ALARM
0
G
e
G
G
0
PF4:LATEST SELECTED BRANCH TRACE VALUES
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-31
You are requested to choose from among the following parameters:
o
If you enter Y, the CCU stops when the buffer is full. See following
description for line
e and figure below.
Warning: Option CCU STOP = = > Y can interrupt your
applications.
G
e
If you enter Y, recording resumes at the wrap address when the buffer is full;
if you enter N, the branch trace function is deactivated when the buffer is
full.
If you enter Y, the branch trace is deactivated when a simultaneous address
compare is successful, and the CCU stops if you entered Y on line O.
C!) Lower and upper limit addresses: addresses of the lower and upper limits of
CCU storage to be traced. These limits must be in the range of the storage.
The lower limit address must be smaller than the upper limit address.
Note: A branch trace may be stored starting at the specified lower limit
address minus 4 or 2.
o
To blank an interrupt level, use the DEL CHAR key or override the
corresponding number by a blank character (space bar).
Branch trace options are as follows:
BT Options
When buffer is full:
Action(s)
CCU STOP = Y
and
WRAP = Y
CCU stops;
BT remains active.
(However, if an address
compare is active, the
CCU does not stop.)
Select function Start CCU
to restart the CCU and to
resume BT at the wrap
address.
CCU STOP = Y
and
WRAP = N
CCU stops;
BT is deactivated.
Select function Start CCU
to restart the CCU.
e
Note: More information on CCU STOP is given under the description for line
and under "Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace" on page 19-28.
19-32
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Once you have entered all the parameters on the screen, press SEND. The branch
trace is then started. BT appears in MSA field j and the following screen displays
the parameters that you have selected.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: SET BRANCH TRACE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) =m=>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
BRANCH TRACE PARAMETERS
CURRENT VALUES
-CCU STOP
-WRAP MODE
-STOP ON AC
= NO
= YES
= NO
-LOWER LIMIT
-UPPER LIMIT
=
001234
-TRACE LEVELS
=1 2
= 023456
Branch Trace Buffer
The branch trace buffer is defined at control program generation time. Its
address and length are provided by the control program to MOSS when the 3720
is initialized. The length is in local store register (LSR) X'7C', and the address of
the first branch trace entry in LSR X'7D'. The address of the next branch trace
entry to be recorded is in LSR X'7B'.
To display the branch trace buffer, use the Display Long function. The buffer
contents is given in "Displaying Branch Trace Buffer" on page 19-18.
If you execute a branch trace before the control program is loaded, you must first
allocate the branch trace buffer. To do so, refer to "Branch Trace Buffer
Allocation" on page 19-13.
The branch trace buffer can be transferred to the host via a 3720 NCP dump.
The procedure is described in Advanced Communications Function for Network
Control Program and System Support Programs: Diagnosis Guide, SC30-3181.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-33
Branch Trace Extra Records
Under certain circumstances, the branch trace buffer may contain records showing
the entry and the exit of the CCU through some program level without
instruction execution at that level. In order to recognize such records, it is
necessary to understand the operation of the interrupt change mechanism and the
exact contents of the branch trace record.
When the CCU is operating at a given level (call it level A) and an interrupt to a
higher level (level B) occurs, the CCU will return to the original level (A) after an
Exit instruction is executed at the new level (B).
When an interrupt to another level (call it level C), higher in priority than level A,
~:.; pending or occurs immediately after the Exit instruction in level B, the CCU
will not execute instructions in the original level A, but will immediately go to the
ultimate level (C) and begin instruction execution there.
This sequence occurs for example when an error condition occurs due to the
I-fetch of the first instruction in level A. This error condition includes storage
protect violation, address exception, invalid OP code, and an IN/OUT instruction
in level 5.
The following examples show this in more detail.
Example 1: Pending Lower Level Interrupt
The CCU is executing at level 4 when a level 2 interrupt occurs. Before level 2
has finished executing, a level 3 interrupt occurs.
Levels:
5
4
3
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0---~---------+--------~
-
~
G
x Level3
\ Interrupt
X'FE09'
=r- EXIT:
Ie
~=======:)L~i--;XV;'~60rlfO~O''----:
==8
Note: Addresses are for example only.
19-34
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
X'91A2'
Example 2: Higher Level Interrupt During Exit Instruction
The CCU is executing an Exit instruction at level 3 when a level 2 interrupt
occurs:
Levels:
5
4
3
2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o --::----:l~-!
X'E322'
==EXIT:
==X'63EO'
X'E322' iC
Level 2
x
Interrupt
X'9000'
e
Note: Addresses are for example only.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-35
Example 3: Back-to-Back Interrupts
The CCU is executing an interrupt to level 2 when a level 1 interrupt occurs.
Levels:
5
2
3
4
o
Level 1
Itt
I------r-----.~~~i--~-~~ n errup
--r-
X'A212'
......~,
Level2 PEA'!
X'9300'
Level 2
Interrupt
--
Level 1 PEA
X'BIOO'
Note: Addresses are for example only.
When the branch trace mechanism is active, for each branch (instruction with R
field = 0, Exit instruction, or interrupts) a record is stored, including:
19-36
•
The 'came from' program level
•
The 'came from' instruction address, which is the address of the last
instruction executed
•
The 'went to' program level
•
The 'went to' instruction address, which is the address of the next instruction
to be executed if no interrupt occurs.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
As a result, the branch trace records are as follows:
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
Came from
Went to
A 0200 91A2
B 0400 91A2
B 0400 FE09
C 0300 6000
Came from
Went to
A 0300 63EO
B 0400 63EO
A 0400 E322
C 0200 9000
Came from
Went to
A 0400 A212
B 0200 A212
B 0200 9300
C 0100 BI00
From a user viewpoint, the only record of interest is the transition from A to C,
since instructions are executed in these program levels only:
Example 1:
Example 2:
Example 3:
0200 91A2
0300 63EO
0400 A212
0300 6000
0200 9000
0100 BI00
The other parts of the records do not show machine failures but are a natural
consequence of the hardware implementation.
If certain program levels are not being traced, some or all of the above
information may be missing. The resulting records are shown below:
Example 1:
Level 2 traced only:
0200 91A2
0400 FE09
Level 3 traced only:
0400 91A2
0300 6000
Level 4 traced only:
0200 91A2
0400 91A2
0400 FE09
0300 6000
Level 5 traced only: No record
Level 1 traced only: No record
Example 2:
Level 3 traced only:
0300 63EO
0400
E322
Levels 3 and 2 traced only:
0300 63EO
0400 63EO
0400
0200
E322
9000
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-37
Simultaneous Address Compare and Branch Trace
If you specify option CCU STOP in the branch trace when running
simultaneously with the address compare, the option applies to the Address
Compare function but not to the Branch Trace function. For example, if you
execute these two functions simultaneously with:
CCU STOP for BT,
the CCU will stop if the address compare is successful, but will not stop upon
reaching the end of the branch trace buffer.
Note: If you specify Y, or accept the default (also Y), for ENTER Y FOR BT
BUFFER WRAP on the Set Branch Trace menu, then the CCU will stop upon
reaching the end of the branch trace buffer.
Termination
To cancel the branch trace function:
To display CCU junction menu
Selection:
o0
(2] (
I
SEND
)
To select reset branch trace
The terminate function does not cancel the branch trace but only the set branch
trace function.
The branch trace may be automatically canceled when:
The buffer is full and you specified NO WRAP (WRAP = N), or
A CCU address compare is successful and you specified Branch Trace
Stop On Address Compare (BT STOP ON AC = Y).
19-38
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
Use the following PF key only when it is displayed on the screen.
PF4: To display the parameters of the last BT transmitted. This might be helpful
if you want to execute the same BT several times.
Machine Status Area (MSA)
a
9
I
I
m
b
c
d
h
i
j
n
J
I
e
k
I
I
f
I
service personnel only
Field j displays BT whenever the branch trace is active.
Chapter 19. CCU Functions
19-39
Terminating CCU Functions
To terminate a CCU function:
Selection:
EJ
o (I
To position the cursor
SEND
)
To terminate
The CCU function is terminated and the CCU function menu is displayed.
19-40
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
The Immediate functions are described in this chapter in alphabetical order. They
are:
•
•
•
•
•
r~1
v
Bypass CCU check
Bypass IOC check
CCU level 3 interrupt
CCU normal mode
Log off
•
•
Query CCU date and time
•
Reset CCU check
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reset IOC
Stop on IOC check
•
Terminate
Reset CCU
Reset I -step
Set I-step
Start CCU
Stop CCU
Stop on CCU check
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-1
Bypass CCU Check
Use the bypass CCU check function to allow the CCU to continue to run when a
check condition occurs.
Selection:
EJ
To display
eeu function
To select bypass
menu
eeu check
This function is immediately performed. MSA field b displays
BYPASS-CCU-CHK.
('
\j
20-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Bypass IOC Check
Use the bypass laC check function to let the CCU continue to run when an
laC-detected level 1 interrupt occurs (default).
Selection:
To display CCU function menu
To select bypass IOC check
This function is immediately performed. MSA field h displays BYP-IOC-CHK.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-3
CCU Level 3 Interrupt
Use the CCU Level 3 interrupt function to request a CCU level 3 interrupt. See
bit 6 of byte 0 of the input X'7F' register in the 3725 and 3720 Principles of
Operation.
Selection:
To display CCU function menu
o
8 CD ( I
This function is immediately performed.
20-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SEN)
)
To select CCU level 3 interrupt
CCU Normal Mode
Use the CCU normal mode function to leave instruction step mode and return to
normal mode (no address compare, no branch trace).
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
o0
(I
SEtI)
)
To select CCU normal mode
The function is immediately performed. PROCESS is displayed in field a of the
MSA.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-5
Logoff
You can logoff the operator console only when a main menu is displayed and no
function is pending. In any other situation, one of the following messages will be
displayed:
PERFORM OR TERMINATE THE PENDING FUNCTION
Before logging off, you have to perform or terminate the pending function.
To position the cursor
Selection:
o
On the Local Console:
0 0 (I
SEN)
}
to select logoff
Once logged off, the copyright screen is displayed.
On the Remote Console: Once logged off, message "TERMINAL
DISCONNECTED" is displayed.
20-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Query CCU Date and Time
Use the query CCU date and time function to display the date and time in the
operator control message area.
Selection:
To position the cursor
o (I
SEND
)
To select query
eeu date and time
In an NCP environment, the date and time come from the host. In an EP
environment, the date is not displayed (only 00/00/00) and the time (hh:mm:ss)
represents the period that elapsed since the last MOSS IML.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-7
Reset CCU
Use the reset CCU function to stop the control program processing and the cycle
steal mechanism. MSA field g displays RESET.
Selection:
To select CCU function menu
o
0 0 (I
SEND
)
To select CCU reset
Once selected, this function is executed immediately. No further action is
required.
The only way to restart the 3720 is to IPL it.
20-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Reset CCU Check
Use the reset CCU check function to reset the CCU CHECK condition. The
CCU remains stopped (HARD STOP is displayed in MSA field g). To restart the
CCU, press PF6.
Selection:
(PF2)
o
To display CCU function menu
0 0 ( I SEND)
To reset CCU check
This function is immediately performed.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-9
Reset IOe
Use the reset IOe function to generate a 'reset tag' pulse on the IOe bus.
Selection:
To display
( PF2 )
o0
0 (I
This function is immediately performed.
20-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SEN)
)
ceu function menu
To reset the IOC
Reset I-Step
Use the reset I -Step function to reset the control program to normal processing.
Selection:
EJ
o
To display CCU function menu
0
{(SEtt1
To select reset I-Step
This function is immediately performed. MSA field a displays PROCESS.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-11
Set I-Step
Use the set I-Step function to set the control program to instruction step mode;
that is, the control program and the cycle steal mechanism stop after the current
instruction has been executed (MSA field g = STOP-PGM). The next instruction
is executed when the CCU start function is selected, that is when
are pressed.
Selection:
To display CCU function menu
To select set I-step
This function is immediately performed. MSA field a displays I-STEP. When the
current instruction has been executed, STOP-PGM is displayed in field g.
Note: In instruction step mode, if you modify the contents of the instruction
address register (Alter function on work register 0), the next instruction may not
be the expected one.
20-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Start CCU
Use the start CCU function to resume processing the control program. When the
control program is in instruction-step mode, the start CCU function causes the
execution of the next instruction. To set the control program in instruction-step
mode, use function set I-Step, described on page 20-12.
Selection:
To select CCU function menu
To select CCU start
Once selected, this function is executed immediately. No further action is
required. When the CCU is started,MSA field g displays RUN.
The start CCU function is not allowed to resume CCU processing if CCU is in
STOP mode, because of a hardcheck or a reset (MSA field g).
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-13
Stop CCU
Use the stop CCU function to stop the control-program processing immediately
after the current instruction has been executed. MSA field g displays
STOP-PGM.
Warning: Stopping the CCU can interrupt your applications.
Selection:
To select CCU function menu
o
(2]
0 ((
SEN)
)
To select CCU stop
Once selected, this function is executed immediately. It requires no further action.
To resume processing the control program, use the CCU start function.
20-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Stop On CCU Check
Use the stop On CCU Check function to cancel Bypass CCU Check. The CCU
stops when a CCU check condition occurs (default).
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
o
CD 0 ( I
SEND
)
To select stop On CCU check
This function is immediately performed. MSA field b displays
STOP-CCU-CHK.
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-15
Stop On IOC Check
Use the stop On 10C Check function to force the CCU to hardcheck when an
10C-detected level 1 interrupt occurs.
To display
Selection:
o
0 0 ((
SEN)
}
To select stop on
This function is immediately performed. MSA field h displays
STOP-IOC-CHK.
20-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
eeu function
menu
Ioe check
Terminate
Use the terminate function to cancel the active function and display the 3720
Function menu or the pending function if any.
Selection:
To position the cursor
(2] ( ,
SEtt1
To terminate
Once selected, this function is executed immediately. No further action is
required.
When switching between functions, the terminate function has a slightly different
action. (See 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide).
Chapter 20. Immediate Functions
20-17
20-18
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
Control Program Procedure description starts in Chapter 22.
To execute any of the following NCP and EP functions, use the Data Exchange
function, described in this chapter. This function allows you to select and to
provide data to the NCP or EP functions and subroutines.
NCP functions are:
Line Test
Dynamic Store
Display of Storage
Display of Register
Channel Discontact
Address Trace
Channel Adapter Trace
EP functions are:
Line Test
Display of Character Control Block
Line Trace (level 2, level 3) and Scanner Interface Trace
Present Status on Channel
Display of Storage
Multi-Subchannel Line Access (MSLA)
Channel Adapter Reset
Subchannel Switching
The above NCP and EP functions are also used in the control program
procedures.
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-1
Conventions
In the procedures given in this chapter, the following conventions, in addition to
those described in the Preface, are used:
NCP
Decision. In this example, you have
to decide between NCP and NCPjPEP.
Boxes in each procedure show information that is displayed on the screen. All
you have to do is to enter the characters that are printed in bold type. In the
following example, you are required to enter 8002, 1, and Y.
DATA==>
8002
FUNCTION==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
Y
When entering the data exchange function, you do not have to specify the
FUNCTION = = > and CCU LVL3 = = > values if you already specified the
same values in a previous data exchange. However, in the following NCP and EP
function procedures, FUNCTION = = > and CCU LVL3 = = > values are
always shown, even when repetitive, for clarity.
(
21-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Data Exchange
Use the data exchange function to transfer to the CCU control program, the
information necessary to select and execute NCP or EP functions and subroutines.
To display CCU function menu
Selection:
o0
0 (I
SEN)
)
To select data exchange
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: DATA EXCHANGE
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
DATA ==>
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
FUNCTION ==>
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
CCU LVL3 ==>
PF4:LATEST DATA EXCHANGE VALUES
The values that you enter in the data exchange operands (DATA,
FUNCTION, and CCU LVL3) must not conflict with the control program
requirements.
DATA = = > xxxxxx
To provide data to the control program function.
xxxxxx is a string of up to 6 hexadecimal digits, which is transferred to CCU
via the CCU X'71' input register (operator address/data entry register). For
example, xxxxxx can be a storage address or a subroutine code.
If you enter 6 digits, the leftmost digit must not exceed 3.
If you do not enter a value, the last one entered is taken.
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-3
FUNCTION= = > xx
To call the control program function to be performed.
xx is the function code. It is a decimal value from 1 through 16. This code is
transferred to the CCU via the CCU X'72' input register (operator
display/function select register).
The value 11 indicates that a storage address is being transferred. Letter S
may be substituted for the value 11. In a similar manner, value 12 and letter
R can be used to indicate a register address.
If you do not enter a value, the last one entered is taken.
CCU LVL3 = = > Y or CCU LVL3 = = > N
Y:
An Operator Level 3 Interrupt is requested to signal to the control
program that the function specified in FUNCTION = = > is to be
performed.
N:
An Operator Level 3 Interrupt is not requested and the function
specified in FUNCTION = = > will not be performed.
If you specify CCU LVL3 = = > N, the data exchange is treated as a no
operation. Re-enter with CCU L VL3 = = > Y.
CCU LVL3 Default Value: When you use the data exchange function for the
first time, the default value is Y; then it is replaced by the value that you
entered in the previous data exchange.
Every time you press SEND, the information that you entered or modified is
transmitted and you are prompted another time. When the screen is full, it wraps
around.
PFKey
Use the following PF key only when it is displayed on the screen.
PF4: To display the contents of the CCU input X'71' and X'72' registers (values
of the latest data exchange).
21-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NCP and EP Functions in an NCP Environment with PEP
In an NCP environment with PEP, you may execute either NCP functions or EP
functions. Before executing any function, you have to switch control to either
NCP or EP mode.
Switching Control to NCP Mode
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
PF2
~0 (
0
I
(
DATA==> C
~
I
SEND
FUNCTI ON==> 7
)
CCU LVL3==> Y
To select the data exchange
function.
I
To switch to NCP mode. If
successful, MSA fields e
and k display:
e = X71 :OOOOOC
k = X72:00000C
I
SEND
)
If the control program is
EP, MSA fields e and k
display:
e
k
Figure 21-1:
= X71 :000000
= X72:000000
Switching Control to NCP Mode
)
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-5
Switching Control to EP Mode
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
To select the data exchange
function.
FUNCTION==> 7 CCU LVL3==> y
To switch to NCP mode. If
successful, MSA fields e
and k display:
e
= X71 :OOOOOE
k = X72:00000E
If the control program is
EP, MSA fields e and k
display:
e
= X71 :000000
k = X72:000000
Figure 21-2.
21-6
Switching Control to EP Mode
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NCP - Line Test
Use this function to test NCP lines via the operator console. The line test
function consists of an initialization subroutine, a series of test subroutines, and
an end-test subroutine.
Notes:
1.
If a line is in use by the line test function, it is not available to the host.
2.
If a line is in use by the system, it is not available to the line test function.
Therefore, the line must always be deactivated before the line test is initialized.
3.
Always use subroutine X'50' to end all test functions, to ensure availability of
the line to the host.
To run the EP line test function in a PEP environment, switch control to EP
mode and use the EP line test function.
While the line test function is being performed, codes are displayed in MSA fields
e and k to show normal processing indications and errors. These codes are
described in Figure 21-5.
All subroutine line tests are described in Figure 21-4.
Chapter 21. How to Execute N CP and EP Functions
21-7
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
FUNCT I ON==>
2
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To initialize the line test for
the NCP line address yz
(hexadecimal)
MSA field k
equal to
X72:00FFFF
MSA field k different from X72:00FFFF
An error occurred. See the description
of the error in Chapter 24.
FUNCTION==>
w = flag
2
CCU LVL3==>
y
xx = subroutine code
yz = variables
w, xx, yz are explained in
Figure 21-4
MSA field k different from X72:00FFFF
An error occurred. See the
description of the error in chapter 24.
Another
subroutine
or more data
characters
to enter
No more subroutines or data
FUNCTION==>
2
CCU LVL3==>
y
To end the line test
function.
The line test is ended.
Figure 21-3.
21-8
Line Test Procedure
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
To execute any of the subroutines described in Figure 21-4, enter:
DATA= = > wxxyz FUNCTION = = > 2 CCU LVL3= = > Y
w, xx and yz values are given in the second, third, and fourth column of the
following figure.
Subroutine Name
w
xx
yz
Description
Initialization
0
20
yz
To accept the relative hexadecimal line number (yz) of the line to be
tested. This subroutine must be executed before any other line test
subroutine because it collects all the information about the line and
saves it in the LTS control block. It also initializes the fields in the LTS
so that the test will run properly.
Enable
0
40
00
To issue a Setmode and Enable to the line. This subroutine is for leased
lines only.
Note: This subroutine is required on leased lines before any
Transmit/Receive subroutine is attempted.
Auto-Answer or
Manual Dial
w
46
yz
To issue a Setmode and Monitor Incoming Call to the line and to
complete the connection when the terminal calls in or someone manually
dials out.
If w = 0, the subroutine ends after the connection is established.
If w = 1, the Receive Mode subrouti ne (X' 4A') is executed after the
connection is established. (See Note 3.)
If w = 2, the Transmit Buffer subroutine (X'4F') will be executed after the
connection is established. (See Note 3.)
y and z are meaningful only if w = 1 or 2. They are set the same as for
subroutines X'4A' and X'4F'.
Notes:
Dial Digit Load
0
47
Oz
1.
Subroutine X' 46' is required on auto-answer and on manual dial lines
before any other Transmit/Receive subroutine is attempted.
2.
If a hardware ID is received from the device, it is saved in the LTSRID
field upon completion of this subroutine and may be displayed using
subroutine Display LTS (X'4C') with yz=46.
3.
Subroutine (X' 46') may no t be chained to Receive Mode (X' 4 A') or
Transmit Buffer (X' 4F) on an SDLC line because these two
subroutines do not support SDLC.
To load each dial digit (z = 0 to 9), one by one, into a data area to be used
by the Dial Operate subroutine (X'48'). X'F' must be the last digit. It
indicates the end of the dialed digits. The special characters X' A' to X'D'
are also accepted.
Notes:
Figure 21-4 (Part 1 of 5).
1.
To resume entering the dial digits from the beginning, enter X' F.
2.
Only 15 digits may be entered if the line is X.2I, because a special digit
is inserted at the end.
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-9
Subroutine Name
w
xx
yz
Description
Dial Operate
w
48
yz
To issue a Setmode and Dial to the line and to complete the connection
using the digits entered with subroutine Dial Digit Load (X'47').
If w = 0, the subroutine ends after the connection is established.
If w = 1, the Receive Mode subrouti ne (X'4A') is executed after the
connection is established. (See Note 3.) If w = 2, the Transmit
Buffer subroutine (X'4F') will be executed after the connection is
established. (See Note 3.)
y and z are meaningful only if w= 1 or 2. They are set the same as for
subroutines X'4A' and X'4F'.
Notes:
Receive Mode (SSC
and Start/Stop)
0
4A
yz
1.
This subroutine X' 48' is required on auto-dial lines before any other
Transmit/ Receive subroutine is attempted.
2.
If a hardware ID is received from the device, it is saved in the LTSRID
field upon completion of this subroutine and may be displayed using
subroutine Display LTS (X' 4C') with yz = 46.
3.
This subroutine (X'48') may not be chained to Receive Mode (X'4A')
or Transmit Buffer (X' 4F) on an SDLC line because these two
subroutines do not support SDLC.
Used to:
- Monitor the line for incoming data, if the line is point-to-point, and
- Poll the device if the line is multipoint.
Note: To transmit and receive data on SDLC lines, use subroutine SDLC
Test Frame with Data (X'63'). Once data is received, an ACK is
transmitted for each block of data received until EOT is received.
If y = 1, errors are ignored unless they are so severe that the scanner
has disabled the line.
If y=O, the subroutine quits if an error is received. An error code is
displayed in MSA field k (Figure 21-5).
If z = 1, the terminal is continuously polled or monitored until subroutine
End Test (X'50') or End Function (X'5F') is selected.
If z = 0, the subroutine quits after it has received data followed by EOT.
To look at the last buffer of data received:
Display LTS
0
4C
yz
1.
Use the Display LTS Address (X'4D') subroutine with yz = 00, to get
the address of the beginning of the received data buffer. The
address will be displayed in MSA field k.
2.
Enter this address in the CCU Display Long function (Chapter 19) to
look at the received data buffer. The buffer is 256 bytes long.
To display in MSA fields e and k two halfwords of the line test control
block (LTS) beginning at the displacement yz (hexadecimal).
Note: The halfwords displayed begin on a halfword boundary. If an odd
offset is entered, the low-order bit is ignored.
Display LTS Pointer
0
Figure 21-4 (Part 2 of 5).
21-10
40
00
To display the address of the LTS pOinter in MSA field k so that you may
display the entire LTS by means of the CCU Display Long function
(Chapter 19).
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Subroutine Name
w
xx
yz
Description
Transmit Buffer
(BSC and
Start/Stop)
0
4F
yz
To transmit the data that was loaded into the transmit buffer by means of
the Load Transmit Buffer (X'51 ') subroutine.
If y = 1, errors are ignored unless they are so severe that the scanner
has disabled the line.
If y = 0, the subroutine ends when an error occurs. An error code is
displayed in MSA field k (Figure 21-5).
If z = 1, the data is transmitted continuously.
If z = 0, the data is transmitted once and the subroutine is ended.
Notes:
End Test
0
50
00
1.
You must first select subroutine X'67' to load addressing characters.
2.
To transmit and receive data on SDLC lines, use the SDLC Test
Frame With Data (X'63') subroutine.
3.
If this is run as a continuous operation on a ESC line, the sequence will
be STX-data-ETX. A comparable sequence will be sent for start-stop
lines.
To end the Line Test function and disable the line.
Reinitialize the line (subroutine X'20') before it can be used again by the
system.
Load Transmit
Buffer
0
51
yz
To load the specified characters (yz), one by one, into the transmit buffer,
to be used by the Transmit Buffer (X'4F') or SDLC Test Frame With Data
(X'63') subroutine. The size of the buffer is that specified at system
generation.
Initialize Transmit
Buffer Offset
0
58
yz
To set an offset value (yz, normally equal to X'OO') in the transmit buffer
at which you wish to begin storing data.
Note: If a value other than X'OO' is used, data will be stored at that offset
into the data area. Transmission of the data will always begin at the first
buffer position (offset = zero).
Disable
0
5D
00
To issue an X.21 DTE Clear Request or a Disable command to the line
without ending the line test.
End Function
0
5F
00
To end a subroutine without ending the line test. The subroutine is
ended when MSA fields:
e = X71 :00005F
k = X72:00FFFF
Select Setmode
Data Byte
0
60
Oz
To select the Setmode data byte (z) that you want to change. There are
16 setmode bytes, so the value must be between X'O' and X'F', inclusive.
Change Setmode
Data
0
61
yz
To change the Setmode data byte, specified in subroutine X'60', to the
value yz.
Warning: Invalid values may cause NCP to abend.
Notes:
Figure 21-4 (Part 3 of 5).
1.
You must first choose the Setmode data byte (subroutine X' 60') before
you change it (subroutine X'61').
2.
You must execute subroutines X'60' and X'61' once for each Setmode
data byte that you want to change.
3.
The Enable (X'40') subroutine always changes the Setmode data byte
to its generated values.
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-11
Subroutine Name
w
xx
yz
Description
Test without Data
(SOLC)
0
62
yO
To transmit an SOLC Test Frame continuously with no data and check the
received frame.
If y = 1, errors are ignored unless they are so severe that the scanner
has disabled the line.
If y = 0, the subroutine ends if there is an error. Subroutine X'SO' or X'SF'
must be used to terminate the function if there is no error.
Note: You must first select subroutine X'6?, to load addressing
characters.
Test Frame with
Data (SOLC)
0
63
yO
To transmit an SOLC Test Frame continuously with the data stored in the
buffer with the Load Transmit Buffer subroutine (X'S1').
If Y= 1, errors are ignored unless they are so severe that the scanner
has disabled the line.
If y = 0, the subroutine ends iUhere is an error. Subroutine X'SO' or X'SF'
must be used to terminate the function if there is no error.
Note: You must first select subroutine X'6?, to load addressing
characters.
Hardware 10
Exchange (BSC and
Start-Stop)
0
64
yz
To indicate whether a transmit hardware ID is required and/or a receive
hardware 10 is expected and if the line is a call-in or call-out line.
Note: This subroutine (X'64') is necessary only for BSC and start-stop
switched lines that need hardware 10 - EXCHANGE.
If y=O, call-out line.
If y = 1, call-in line.
If z = 1, a receive hardware 10 is expected.
If z = 2, a transmit hardware 10 is required.
If z = 3, a receive hardware 10 is expected and a transmit hardware 10 is
required.
Load Hardware 10
(BSC and
Start-Stop)
0
6S
yz
To load the hardware 10 (yz), 1 byte at a time, to be used if a transmit 10
is required by subroutine X'64'.
Notes:
Load Polling
Characters
0
66
yz
1.
This subroutine (X' 65') must be specified if a transmit ID is required.
2.
The data area contains enough space for a 3-byte hardware ID.
To load the hexadecimal polling characters (yz), one by one, as they will
be sent to the terminal for use by the Receive Mode (X'4A') subroutine.
Notes:
Figure 21-4 (Part 4 of 5).
21-12
1.
This subroutine X'66' is required for subroutine X'4A' if the line is
multipoint.
2.
For subroutine X' 4A' on BSC lines, the ENQ following the polling
characters must also be supplied.
3.
The data area allows room for seven polling characters or six plus the
ENQ character.
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Subroutine Name
w
xx
yz
Description
Load Addressing
Characters
0
67
yz
To load the hexadecimal addressing characters (yz), one by one, as they
will be sent to the terminal by subroutines X'4F', X'62', and X'63'.
Notes:
Figure 21-4 (Part 5 of 5).
if the line is
1.
This subroutine X' 67' is required for subroutine X' 4 F
multipoint.
2.
For subroutine X' 4F on BSC lines, the ENQ character that follows the
addressing must also be supplied.
3.
The data area allows room for seven addressing characters or six plus
the ENQ character. Only the first character will be used by subroutines
X'62' and X'63'.
Subroutines Used When Performing an NCP Line Test
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-13
Figure 21-5 describes each code displayed in the MSA field k when executing an
NCP line test. The last two digits of field e indicate the function or subroutine
code.
Note: If another function is being used while the line test function is running,
fields e and k do not contain reliable information.
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X72:000000
X72:000001
X72:000002
X72:000003
X72:000004
X72:000005
X72:000006
X72:000007
Continuous function started.
The line is not defined in the control program.
The Line Test is already initialized.
EP line.
The line has user-written line control.
The line is active (deactivate it before testing).
A wrap test is in progress.
A PEP switch is in progress.
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X72:000011
X72:000012
X72:000013
X72:000014
Unable to initialize the line test.
Invalid function.
Another function is running.
The line is not enabled. To enable it, use subroutine X'40'.
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71 :OOOOxx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X71:0000xx
X72:000021
X72:000022
X72:000023
X72:000024
X72:000025
X72:000026
X72:000027
X72:000028
X72:000029
X72:00002A
X72:00002B
X72:00002C
X72:00002D
X72:00002E
X72:00002F
X72:000030
X72:000031
X72:000032
X72:000033
X72:000034
X72:000035
X72:000036
X72:000041
X72:000042
X72:000043
X72:000044
X72:000045
X72:000046
X72:000047
X72:00FFFF
The scanner is down.
The function is invalid for switched lines.
The Enable or Setmode failed.
The function is invalid for leased lines.
The function is invalid for SDLC lines.
An error occurred on receive operation.
An error occurred on transmit operation.
The function is invalid for BSC and SS lines.
Disable or X.21 DTE Clear Request failed.
Change command failed.
No hardware ID supplied.
No polling character supplied.
No addressing character supplied.
No dial digit supplied.
No auto-dial unit connected to the line.
No Setmode byte selected.
Severe error on receive. The line is disabled.
Severe error on transmit. The line is disabled.
The value specified in y (DATA = = > wxxyz) is invalid.
The value specified in z (DATA = = > wxxyz) is invalid.
The value specified in w (DATA = = > wxxyz) is invalid.
The transmit buffer is empty.
No function in progress.
Buffer overflow.
Dial digit overflow.
Invalid dial digit entered. It must be a digit between X'O' and X'D'.
Polling character overflow.
Addressing character overflow.
Hardware 10 overflow.
Function or subroutine successfully performed.
Figure 21-5.
21-14
Line Test Codes
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NCP - Dynamic Store
Use this function to store online bytes and halfwords in 3720 storage, without
stopping the CCU.
MSA fields e and k display information on the progression of the NCP dynamic
store function. See Figure 21-6.
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:03FFFD
X71:03FFFE
X71:03FFFF
X71 :000000
X72:03FFFD
X72:03FFFE
X72:03FFFF
X72:000000
Store completed but next address exceeds storage limit.
Invalid sequence entered.
Invalid address entered.
Normal termination (FUNCTION = = > 6).
Figure 21-6.
MSA Field e and k Values for Dynamic Store
)
"
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-15
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
(
I
FUNCTI ON==> 1
0
FUNCTION==>
G
FUNCTI ON==>
To select data exchange
function.
)
SEND
2
CCU LVL3==>
CCU LVL3==>
3 CCU LVL3==>
Y
x = 3-byte mode
x = 4-halfword mode
x = 5-fullword mode (in tullword mode only the rightmost
22 bits will be stored).
MSA displays fields:
e = Value entered as data
k = X72:000000
Y
xxxxxx = storage address
MSA displays fields:
e = storage address
k = contents at storage
address
y
No more
data to
enter
Same mode, more
non-consecutive
data
Different
mode
o
In byte mode:
xyy = 00
zz = byte to store
In halfword mode:
yyzz = halfword to store
In fullword mode:
xyy = 22 bits to store
MSA displays fields
e = storage address
incremented by 1 (byte
mode), 2 (halfword mode),
or 4 (fullword mode)
k = contents at new
storage address
Same mode, more
consecutive data
e
FUNCTION==> 6
CCU LVL3==>
y
To end the dynamic store. There
is no need to enter values in
DATA==>
Figure 21-7.
21-16
NCP - Dynamic Store
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NCP - Display of Storage
Use this function to display a 3720 storage halfword in MSA field k.
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
FUNCTI ON==>
More values
displayed
s
CCU LVL3==>
Y
xxxxxx = storage address to
display
MSA displays fields:
e = storage address
k = contents of the halfword
at the specified address
6
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To stop the function. There
is no need to enter values in
No more values displayed
FUNCTI ON==>
DATA==>
Figure 21-8.
NCP - Display of Storage
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:xxxxxx
X72:00yyyy
X71:000000
X72:000000
xxxxxx = storage address
yyyy = storage halfword
Invalid address entered.
Figure 21-9.
MSA Field e and k Values for Display of Storage
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-17
NCP - Register Display
Use this function to display 3720 register contents in MSA field k.
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
((SEND)
FUNCTI ON==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To set on the Allow
Additional Register Range
bit (AARR).
See Figure 21-11.
r = general register address
example: for register X'42'
enter 4020. MSA displays fields:
e = register address
k = contents of registers
FUNCTION==>
R
CCU LVL3==>
Y
FUNCTION==>
6
CCU LVL3==>
y
To end the function.
FUNCTI ON==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To set off the AARR bit.
See Figure 21-11.
More values
displayed
Figure 21-10.
21-18
NCP - Display of Register
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
MSA Field e
Description
X71:001080
X71:009080
X71 :009000
X71:001000
AARR
AARR
AARR
AARR
Figure 21-11.
bit
bit
bit
bit
is
is
is
is
set on.
still on.
set off.
still off.
AARR Bit Setting Codes
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-19
NCP - Channel Discontact
Use this function to cause auto-network shutdown (ANS) of a particular host
processor(s). ANS is a non-optional function of the NCP. The Channel
Discontact function allows the operator to isolate the NCP from the host
processor by effectively disconnecting the appropriate channel adapter(s). The
Channel Discontact function is useful when the NCP is unable to detect a host
processor failure. When ANS is invoked with the Channel Discontact function,
all NCP sessions with the specific channel-attached host(s) are inactive.
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
PF2
To select data exchange
function.
o
I
DATA==>
OOxxOO
FUNCTI ON==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
V
1
To execute Channel Discontact
on the specified channel
adapter(s).
xx = channel adapter
identification within the
range X'01' to X'3F'.
Only the following bits
are valid:
....... 1 CA1
...... 1. CA2
(ISEND )
Figure 21-12.
21-20
NCP - Channel Discontact
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
(,
\~
N CP - Address Trace
Use this function to start an address trace from the operator console. This
function is available only if TRACE = YES is specified in the BUILD macro.
The trace can store up to four variables into a trace table. If you try to trace
more than four variables, MSA fields e and k will display garbled (and therefore
meaningless) information.
You must specify in an address compare function (Chapter 19), one or two
addresses and option LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT (I).
When the level 1 interrupt occurs, the address compare checks if the storage
access that you specified in the address compare function was detected in one of
the specified program levels that you specified in the address trace function. If it
was, it stores up to four variables into the trace table.
Each variable can be either two consecutive halfwords of storage or the contents
of a general register.
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-21
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
FUNCTI ON==> 1
FUNCTION==> 1
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To set on the Allow
Additional Register Range bit
(AARR). See Figure 20.11.
CCU LVL3==>
y
To start the Address Trace
function. MSA displays fields:
e = X71 :000001
k = X72:000000
~
~
DATA==>
P
FUNCTION==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
y
To enter the program level
to be traced. p is any
combination of:
1 ... level 2 (enter 8)
· 1 .. level 3 (enter 4)
· . 1 . level 4 (enter 2)
· .. 1 level 5 (enter 1)
p must be within the range
X'1' to X'F'.
MSA displays fields:
e = X71 :000002
k = levels (p)
To trace
register
data
To trace storage data
FUNCTION==> S
(next page)
e
Figure 21-13 (Part 1 of 3).
21-22
CCU LVL3==>
(next page)
NCP - Address Trace
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
y
xxxxxx = storage address
MSA displays fields:
e = X71:000003 (1 variable)
X71 :000004 (2 variables)
X71 :000005 (3 variables)
X71 :000006 (4 variables)
k = storage address
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
FUNCTI ON==>
More
variables
to trace
R
CCU L VL3==>
Y
r = general register address
example: for register X'42'
enter 4020. MSA displays fields:
e = X71:000003 to 000006
depending on the number of
variables entered.
k = register address
Four variables already entered
FUNCTI ON==>
6
CCU L VL3==>
Y
This step is not required
if you entered four variables.
NCP is notified that there is no
more data to enter. There is
no need to enter values in
DATA==>
FUNCTION==>
3
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To start the trace. There is
no need to enter values in
DATA==>
The address trace is now active.
Set a CCU Address Compare with one or two addresses
and the LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT option. To select the
address compare:
Each time there is an
address compare hit, the
Address Trace function
will save in the trace
table the variables that
you entered.
To position the cursor at
the selection area.
{(SEND)
To select the Address
Compare function.
(next page)
Figure 21-13 (Part 2 of 3).
NCP - Address Trace
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-23
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
Enter the address compare parameters as described
in Chapter 5.
When the address compare is set the count of
interrupts processed is displayed in field
e of the MSA.
To end the address trace:
To select the data exchange
function.
FUNCT ION==>
6
CCU L VL3==>
Y
To end the trace. There is
no need to enter values in
DATA==>
FUNCT I ON==>
1
CCU LVL3==>
Y
To set off AARR bit.
See Figure 21-11.
To position the cursor at
the selection area.
((SEN))
Figure 21-13 (Part 3 of 3).
21-24
NCP - Address Trace
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
To cancel the Address
Compare function.
Address Trace Table Under NCP Version 2
To display the address trace table, do the following:
1.
(PF2)
2.
0 8 ((
To display CCU function menu.
SEND
)
To select display long function.
3. Enter S7D8 (address of pointer to HWE), then press
4. At S7D8, on the screen, there is a 4-byte pointer to HWE.
Add an offset of X'04' to the HWE pointer to get the 4-byte
address of the address trace block (ATB).
5. En ter S, then the address, then press
6. The address trace block is then displayed. Add an offset ofX'14' to the
address trace block pointer to get the address of the last entry used.
The address trace block is displayed in Figures 21-14 and 21-15.
Address Trace Table Under NCP Version 3 or Higher
To display the address trace table, do the following:
1.
(PF2)
2.
0 8 (I
To display CCU function menu.
SEND
)
To select display long function.
3. Enter S6E8 then press
4. Add X'58' to the address found at S6E8
5. Enter S, then the new address, then press
6. At that new address, there is a 4-byte pointer to HWE.
Add an offset of X'04' to the HWE pointer to get the 4-byte
address of the address trace block (ATB).
7. Enter S, then the ATB address, then press
6. The address trace block is then displayed. Add an offset of X'14' to the
address trace block pointer to get the address of the last entry used.
The address trace block is displayed in Figures 21-14 and 21-15.
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-25
ATBPRMS
0(0)
Address of trace variable 1
4(4)
Address of trace variable 2
8(8)
Address of trace variable 3
12(C)
Address of trace variable 4
16(10)
ATBFRST
Address of first entry in trace table (CXT ATPF)
ATBPRCT*
No. of variables
in each trace entry
20(14)
ATBPREV
Address of last entry used in trace table (CXT APL)
............................................................................
ATBCTL*
Address trace
control byte
20(14)
ATBLAST
Address of last entry in trace table
ATBLVLS*
Program level
to be traced
(
28(IC)
30(1 E)
ATBCNTR
Number of interrupts processed
ATBIN
Prototype input instruction
32(20)
34(22)
ATBBR
Prototype branch instruction
ATBENTSZ
Trace entry size
* Indicates that a byte expansion follows
Figure 21-14.
21-26
Address Trace Block
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Oftset/Fleld Name
Hex Value
Bit Pattern
20(14)
ATBCTL
Contents
Address trace control byte
xxxx ....
Program levels to be traced
Before trace activation:
X'O'
After trace activation:
X'8' Level 2
X'4' Level 3
X'2' Level 4
X'1' Level S
Address trace type variables
(bit 4: Variable = 4 ...
bit 7: Variable = 1)
1 = Register or displacement
o = Storage
26(1A)
ATBLVLS
Program levels to be traced
X'80'
X'40'
X'20'
X'10'
Figure 21-15.
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
LevelS
Byte Expansion of Address Trace Block
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-27
N CP - Channel Adapter Trace
Use this function to trace channel adapter level-3 interrupts.
This function is available only if CATRACE = YES is specified in the BUILD
macro.
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in NCP mode, first switch control to NCP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to NCP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
~0
To select data exchange
function.
((SEND)
FUNCTION==> 1
xx = channel adapter
identification (within the
range X'01' to X'3F'). Only
the following bits are valid:
CCU LVL3==>
V
. 1 CA1
. . . . . . 1 . CA2
MSA field e indicates which of
the channel adapter(s) has the
trace function active.
Field e positions indicate
the channel adapters.
FUNCTION==> 1
Figure 21-16.
21-28
CCU LVL3==>
NCP - Channel Adapter Trace
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
V
To deactivate the trace.
(
To analyze the information stored in the channel adapter trace table, use one of
the following:
•
The Display Long function (Chapter 19), to display the CCU storage.
•
Take an NCP dump. Refer to System Support Programs: Diagnosis
Reference, LY30-5564. The address and the format of the trace table is given
in Network Control Program Emulation Program: Reference Summary and
Data Areas, LY30-5570.
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-29
NCP Scanner Interface Trace (SIT)
The scanner interface trace procedure under NCP is documented in Network
Control Program System Support Programs: Diagnosis Guide, LY30-5591.
21-30
3720i3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
EP - Line Test
The Line Test function is an optional function of the emulation program (EP),
and is included during EP generation only if TEST = YES is specified in the
BUILD definition statement.
Use this function to test a communication line via the operator console. The
function consists of an initialization subroutine, a series of test subroutines, and
an end test subroutine. The CCB display function may be used to analyze the
operation of a line.
Line test subroutines are fully described in Figure 21-18. They do the following
general tasks:
•
MUltiple line testing: Information about each line under test is stored in the
CCB fields to allow concurrent testing of the communication lines.
•
Line error checking: Data checks, feedback checks, dial errors, and SCF
errors are dynamically displayed in MSA fields e and k, with an option to
stop any line if an error occurs.
•
Data translation: Transmit and receive data is translated from line code to
PDF code when communication lines with redundancy checking are tested.
Lines without redundancy checking must be tested in no-translate mode, and
the buffer data must be entered in PDF code.
Notes:
1.
When a line is in use by the line test function, all system commands are rejected.
2.
When a line is in use by the system, it is not available to the line test function.
3.
Always use X/SF to end all the line test subroutines, to ensure availability of the
line to the host.
4.
Leased lines initially enabled by the access method must be re-enabled with
subroutine X'SO' (Figure 21-18).
Chapter 21. How to Execute N CP and EP Functions
21-31
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To test an EP line in PEP environment, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning of
this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
Not MSLA
xx = channel adapter number
xxOO
FUNCTION==> 2
CCU LVL3==>
Y
For MSLA error code, see
Figure 21-32.
xx = subroutine code
yy = data
FUNCTION==> 5
CCU LVL3==>
Y
xx and yy are described in
Figure 21-18.
Another
line test
or more data
No other line test and no more data to enter
To end the test.
Figure 21-17.
21-32
FUNCTION==> 5
CCU LVL3==>
Y
yy = subchannel address
FUNCTION==> 5
CCU LVL3==>
Y
yy
EP - Line Test
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
=
subchannel address
To execute any of the subroutines described in Figure 21-18, enter:
DATA = = > xxyy FUNCTION = = > 5 CCU LVL3= = > Y
xx and yy values are given in the second and third column of the following figure.
Subroutine Name
Load Transmit Buffer
Buffer 1
Buffer 2
Buffer 3
Dial digit buffer
Load Receive
Compare Character
compare character 1
compare character 2
compare character 3
xx
00
01
02
03
yy
Description
data character
data character
data character
dial digit
To load a new receive compare character 1, 2, or 3. The old and
the new receive compare characters are displayed in MSA field k.
04
05
06
compare
character
compare
character
compare
character
Swap Character
Buffer 1 swap char.
Buffer 2 swap char.
Buffer 3 swap char.
08
09
OA
swap character
swap character
swap character
Change Character
Buffer 1
OC
Buffer 2
00
Buffer 3
OE
Dial buffer
OF
position
character
position
character
position
character
position
character
Display Buffer
buffer 1
buffer 2
buffer 3
dial buffer
Display Receive
Compare Character
compo char. 1
compo char. 2
compo char. 3
Display Swap
Character
buffer 1
buffer 2
buffer 3
To load the data character into buffer 1, 2, or 3, or the dial digit into
the dial digit buffer. Perform this subroutine as many times as you
have data characters to enter (maximum is 20 per buffer). After the
last one, enter X'99' in the yy operand. The next buffer location
(vv) is displayed in MSA field k:
X71:000000
X72:0000vv
X'99' as compare character causes continuous transmission
without any attempt to receive.
The old (vv) and new (ww) characters are displayed in MSA field k:
X71:000000
X72:00vvww
To load a new swap character for buffer 1, 2, or 3. The old (vv) and
the new (ww) swap characters are displayed in MSA field k:
X71:000000
X72:00vvww
If incoming data compares on the buffer swap character 1, 2 or 3,
the associated buffer is transmitted unconditionally.
This subroutine is performed in two steps:
10
11
12
13
buffer
buffer
buffer
buffer
14
15
16
N/A
N/A
N/A
18
19
1A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Figure 21-18 (Part 1 of 2).
position
pOSition
position
pOSition
1.
Specify the position of the character (yy) that you want to
change in buffer 1, 2, or 3.
2.
Enter the new character if the MSA field e displays X71 :OOFFOO
and field k displays X72:000002.
The old (vv) and new (ww) characters are displayed in MSA field k:
X71 :000000
X72:00vvww
To display the buffer position indicated in yy (must be an even
number). If the deSignated position is less than X'10', the 4 bytes
of data beginning at the specified position are displayed in MSA
fields e and k. If the position is equal to or greater than X'10', the
last 4 bytes of the buffer are displayed.
To display the receive compare character 1, 2, or 3 in the two
middle pOSitions of MSA field k:
Field k = X71 :000000
Field e = X72:00 .. 00
To display buffer 1, 2, or 3 swap character in the two middle
positions of MSA field k:
Field k = X71 :000000
Field e = X72:00 .. 00
Subroutines Used When Performing a Line Test
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-33
Subroutine Name
xx
Transmit Buffer
buffer 1
20
buffer 2
21
buffer 3
22
buffers 1 to 3
23
yy
Description
To transmit buffer 1,2, or 3, until X'99' is recognized. The line is
then set to receive mode.
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
Use subroutine X'23' to chain buffers 1,2, and 3 as one buffer.
After transmission, the line is switched to receive mode.
Receive/Reply Using
Buffers 1, 2, 3
To place the line in receive mode, and perform receive compare
character checking. If a compare is found, the line is turned
around to transmit buffers 1,2, and 3.
buffer 1
40
buffer 2
41
buffer 3
42
buffers 1, 2, and 3
43
Enable Line
80
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
subchannel
address
Use subroutine X' 43' to chain buffers 1, 2, and 3 as one buffer.
subchannel
address
To enable the line (DTR is raised on LlC interface).
Modify CCB Field
This subroutine is performed in two steps:
1.
Specify the subchannel address.
2.
Enter the new data. The old (vv) and new (ww) data is
displayed in MSA field k:
X71 :000000
X72:00vvww
CCBOPT
82
CCBOPT2
83
CCBSTMOD
84
CCBFLGB1 (BSC) or
CCBSSC (SIS)
85
CCBFLGB2 (BSC)
86
s/chan addr flag byte
Stop on Line Error
87
FF or 00
If yy = FF (on condition), the subroutine stops the tests on the line
having errors. If yy = 00 (off condition), the subroutine displays the
error but does not stop the test.
Translate for Buffer
1,2,or3
8C
FF or 00
If yy= FF (no-translate mode), all data compare characters must be
entered in PDF format. Data translation is not performed.
If yy= 00 (translate mode), all transmit and receive characters are
translated for TAl, TAli, TTY1, and TTY2 devices. Other terminal
types use no-translate mode.
Display Last
Message in MSA
Fields e and k
80
none
To display the most current message. When no display information
has been saved since the last request of subroutine X'8D', MSA
fields e and k contain a" zeros.
End Test
8F
subchannel
address
To end all testing and to disable the line.
Figure 21-18 (Part 2 of 2).
21-34
s/chan addr
new data
s/chan add r
new data
s/chan addr
new data
s/chan addr
new data
-
The new data for CCBFLGB1 is the flag byte, and for CCBSSC it is
the control byte.
Subroutines Used When Performing a Line Test
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Level 2 and Level 3 Display Codes
Level 2 codes provide information about the line being tested (Figure 21-19), and
level 3 codes about the selected subroutine (Figures 21-20 and 21-21).
Level 2 display codes are not displayed automatically in MSA fields e and k. To
display them while performing subroutine X'20', X'23', X'40', X'43', X'80', X'86',
or X'8F', use subroutine X'8D' only when the first digit displayed in field e is 2
(X71:2 ..... ).
In Figure 21-19, lowercase letters in fields e and k have the following meaning:
xx = channel adapter number
yy = subchannel address
zz = first six bits of the SES
vv = SCF
ww = PCF
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:01xxyy
X72:00FCOO
X71:02xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71:03xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71:04xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71:05xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71:06xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71:07xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71 :08xxyy
X72:zzvvww
X71 :09xxyy
X72:00vvww
X71:0Axxyy
X72:00vvww
X71:0Bxxyy
X72:zzvvww
The test is accepted for the line whose subchannel address is
displayed in field e (yy). The line has been enabled if current
subroutine is other than X'8F'. If subroutine is X'8F', line will have
been disabled and the test ended.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
CHANGE command.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
MONITOR INCOMING command.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
DIAL command.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
RAISEDTR command.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
ENABLE command for auto-answer or leased line.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while processing
ENABLE command for auto-call line.
Line error on the line whose address is in field e (yy) while proceSSing
RESETD command.
Data check on emulation mode line whose address is in field e (yy)
while processing transmit.
Data check on emulation mode line whose address is in field e (yy)
while processing receive.
Line error detected while transmitting.
X71:0Cxxyy
X72:zzvvww
Line error detected while receiving.
Figure 21-19.
Level 2 Display Codes
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-35
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X71:xOFFOO
X72:000001
X72:000002
X72:000003
X72:000004
X72:000005
X72:000006
X72:000007
X72:00000B
X72:000009
'Monitor function for line errors' set.
Enter new data character.
Buffer-end (X'99') set.
Translate-mode accepted.
The line is enabled.
Ending status presented.
'Stop-on-line error' set.
'No-translate mode' set.
Test ended for the line.
x
= 0: No level-2 display codes
x
= 2: Use subroutine X'BD' to display level:2 codes.
Figure 21-20.
These codes are documented in Figure 21-19.
Level 3 Display Codes
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:xOFFFF
X71:xOFFFF
X71:xOFFFF
X72:000000
X72:000001
X72:000002
X71:xOFFFF
X72:000003
X71 :xOFFFF
X71:xOFFFF
X71:xOFFFF
X72:000004
X72:000005
X72:000006
Invalid subroutine.
Invalid buffer index.
Invalid subchannel address (subchannel address is not associated
with a line that was specified during EP generation).
Line is active with a host command or error recovery. Line must be
inactive for line test.
Invalid subroutine for start-stop lines.
Request cannot be performed because line is not operational.
Subroutine X'BF' (END TEST) was issued for a line that is not in test
mode.
x
=
x
= 2: Use subroutine X'BD' to display level-2 codes.
0: No level-2 display codes
Figure 21-21.
21-36
These codes are documented in Figure 21-19.
Level 3 Error Codes
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
EP/PEP - Display of Character Control Block (CCB)
Use this function to display a character control block (CCB) for any installed line.
The selected CCB areas are displayed only once in MSA fields e and k
(Figure 21-23). These fields also display information on the function progression
(see Figure 21-32).
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
In PEP environment to display cca areas, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
Not MSLA
xx = channel adapter number
xxOO
FUNCTI ON==>
FUNCTI ON==>
2
6
CCU LVL3==>
CCU LVL3==>
y
y
For MSLA error code, see
Figure 21-32.
xx = CCB area to be
displayed (see Figure 21-23)
Display first cca area X'38'
to verify that CCBSUBCH is
for the subchannel that
you want to display.
yy = subchanneladdress
To display
another or
the same area
If no more GGB areas to display,
no other action is required
Figure 21-22.
EP/PEP - Display of Character Control Block (CCB)
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-37
Figure 21-23 (Part 1) lists-all the operands that you have to enter to display CCB
areas in MSA fields e and k. The asterisk (*) shows the bytes that are explained
in Figure 21-23 (part 2).
For the complete description of CCB areas, refer to Network Control Program
Emulation Program: Reference Summary and Data Areas.
=>
28
2C
30
38
40
44
48
4C
DATA-
CCBDATA
CCBDATA1
DATA BUFFER
DATA BUFFER
CCBSVLNK
CCBSUBCH
CCBCMD*
CCBNQCNT
CCBSVLNK
CCBCFLG
CCBLRI
CCBSVSTC
CCBSTAT*
CCBCSTAT*
CCBCLOCK
CCBOPT*
CCBACADR
CCBSTMOD*
CCBLCD
CCBSENSE*
CCBCSENS*
CCBTMADR
CCBOPT2*
///////1/1////////////// /1//////// /1////////////1/1//1 /1////
START/STOP EXTENSION
60
64
68
70
CCBLRC
I
I
CCBSSC
CCBSSCX
I
CCBHPCN
CCBLGT
CCBSBUFF
CCBEBUFF
BSC EXTENSION NORMAL MODE
60
64
68
6C
CCBFLGB1
I
CCBFLGB2
CCBBCNT
I
CCBBCNT
I
CCBCAB
I
CCBBUFSZ
CCBTBUF
CCBBUFF
CCBDLCOM
Figure 21-23.
I
CCB Areas and Byte Expansion (part 1)
Note: Display data area X'38' first and verify that the CCBSUBCH byte displayed is for the subchannel
that you wish to display.
21-38
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
I
~
Figure 21-24 (Part 2) gives the byte expansion of the most used CCB areas.
CCBSTAT
CCBCSTAT
X'OO'
X'01'
X'02'
X'04'
X'OS'
X'10'
X'20'
X'40'
X'SO'
Reset status byte
Set unit exception (UE)
Set unit check (UC)
Set device end (DE)
Set Channel end (CE)
Set CU busy
Set CU end
Set status modifier
Set attention
CCBSENSE
CCBCSENS
X'OO'
X'01'
X'02'
X'04'
X'OS'
X'10'
X'20'
X'40'
X'SO'
Reset sense byte
Timeout (TO)
Set lost data
Set overrun
Set data check
Set equipment check
Set bus out parity check
Set intervention required
Set command reject
CCBCMD
00001 ...
0001 0 ...
00100 ...
01001 ...
0111 1...
10000...
1001 1...
1111 1100
..... 1..
Write (S3701 X'01')
Read (S3701 X'02')
Sense (S3701 X'04')
Poll (S3701 X'09')
Disable (S3701 X'2F')
Enable (S3701 X'27')
Set mode (S3701 X'23')
Line is used by Line Test function
Command end flag
CCBOPT
1.......
.... 1...
..... 1..
Auto-call option installed
Switched line installed
Duplex line
CCBOPT2
.1 ......
... 1 ....
Trace active bit
.. 1.....
... 1 ....
.... 1...
...... xx
DTR (line enabled)
Binary synch clock
External clocking
Oscillator select bits (00-01-10-11)
CCBSTMOD
2702/2703
Figure 21-23. CCB Areas and Byte Expansion (Part 2)
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-39
EPIPEP - Line Trace and Scanner Interface Trace (SIT)
Use this function to start or stop a trace on one or all defined lines as well as on
the scanner interface. The Line Trace and SIT functions are documented in
Emulation Program Installation: ResourceDefinition, and Diagnosis, SC30-3338.
The level-2, level-3, and scanner interface traces are EP optional functions. They
are included at EP generation time unless LINETRC = NO is specified in the
BUILD macro.
After deactivating the trace, you may get a storage dump of the 3720 using dump
utility or dynamic dump utility program.
The line trace table in the storage dump is as follows:
•
The line trace table pointer is in the upper part of the storage, after the EP
load module.
•
Look at the right-hand side of the dump for the START TRACE. The trace
table pointer area starts four fullwords below.
•
Line trace table pointer area:
First word: Latest entry address in the trace table (this entry was written
before terminating the line trace).
Second word: Address of the trace table beginning.
Third word: Address of the trace table upper limit.
The SIT buffer may be located as follows:
•
The EP-TLNVT fields (beginning at X'840') contain SW pointer to the SIT
control blocks in the order they were started:
•
The SIT CCB contains pointers to the two SIT buffers at X'28' and X'2C'.
•
The SIT data and buffer leader are described in Network Control Program
Emulation Program: Reference Summary and Data Areas, LY30-5570.
Notes:
21-40
1.
A trace can degrade EP performance.
2.
To start a line or a scanner interface trace with the dynadump utility trace, the
Trace Active bit must be of!
3.
The format of the trace table entries is given in Network Control Program
Emulation Program: Reference Summary and Data Areas.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
In PEP environment with a line in EP mode, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
Not MSLA
xx = channel adapter number
xxOO
FUNCTI ON==>
2
CCU LVL3==>
y
FUNCTI ON==>
4
CCU LVL3==>
y
FUNCTION==> 4
)
Figure 21-24.
CCU LVL3==>
y
For MSLA error code, see
Figure 21-32.
To start a trace. Values
w, x, y, and zz are given
on the next page.
To stop a trace. Values
w, x, y, and zz are given
on the next page.
EP/PEP - Line Trace and Scanner Interface Trace (SIT)
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-41
The following gives the values that you need to start a trace.
CCU LVL3 ==> Y
(to start a trace)
4 CCU LVL3 ==> Y
(to start a trace)
DATA ==> wxyOzz FUNCTION ==> 4
DATA ==> wxy1zz
W=
FUNCTION ==>
I
I
"
o"even
zz subchannel address:
interface
address
If Y
W = 1 odd
interface
address
(note)
1, 2, or 3, zz
=
subchannel address
L3 on all defined subchannels
x has the following bit values:
000. No SIT
o 1 0 . SIT without data
o 1 1 . SIT with data
001 . Invalid
1 1 0 . SIT without data on
autocall interface
1 1 1 . SIT with data on
autocall interface
1 0 1 . Invalid
100. Invalid
. .. OL2/L3 without data
. .. 1L2/L3 with data
Note:
=
If y = 7 and zz = subchannel address
L3 on that subchannel
If y = 7 and zz = FF:
y has the following bit values:
00 0 0 no line trace
o 0 0 1 Level 2 trace
o0 1 0 Level 3 trace
o 0 1 1 Level 2 and 3 traces
o 1 1 1 Level 3 on all or
defined subchannels
1 0 0 0 Reset Trace Active bit
on DYNADMP
If tracing online, w = 0 will result in a trace of both transmit and receive.
(
If tracing during a Wrap Test, w = 0 will result in tracing only the transmit
address, and w = 1 will result in tracing only the receive address. Both even
and odd addresses may be traced simultaneously while performing a wrap.
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:0000xx
X72:00yyzz
X71:00FFFF
X71:004001
X72:00FFFF
X72:004001
The trace request was successful.
xx = number of active SITs
yy = number of traced lines on level 2
zz = number of traced lines on level 3
An invalid trace was rejected.
Unable to service the SIT request.
Figure 21-25.
21-42
Display Codes for Line Trace and Scanner Interface Trace
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
\
EPIPEP - Present Status on Channel
Use this function to release dynamically a locked subchannel without reinitializing
the 3720 or the hosts. The subchannel may have not been released because of an
error condition. The ending status channel end (CE), device end (DE), and unit
check (UC) is presented to the host for the selected subchannel.
Notes:
KEY
1.
Sense command X'04' from the host after ending status CE, DE, or UC will
receive Equipment check.
2.
Make sure that the sub channel that you are releasing is not in a valid operation.
When bit 5 of CCBCMD is on, the sub channel is not in a valid operation. To
display CCBCMD use EP function Display of CCB.
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in EP mode, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning of
this chapter.
PF2
0
~
0
(
I
I DATA==> 3xyy FUNCTION==>
~
)
( I
SEND
)
2 CCU LVL3==> V
To select the data exchange
function.
I
x = channel adapter number
yy = subchanneladdress
SEND
~i
/
Figure 21-26.
EP/PEP - Present Status on Channel
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:000000
X72:000300
Ending status CE, DE, UC presented to the host.
X71:00FFFF
X72:000301
Rejected.
Figure 21-27.
MSA Fields e and k Values for Present Status on Channel
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-43
EP - Display of Storage
Use this function to display two halfwords of storage in MSA fields e and k
(Figure 21-29).
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in EP mode, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning of
this chapter.
To select data exchange
function.
(1SEN) )
FUNCTION==> 1
CCU LVL3==>
If no more halfwords to display:
no other action is required
Figure 21-28.
EP - Display of Storage
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:00FFFF
X72:00FFFF
Invalid address or function
X71:00xxxx
X72:00yyyy
xxx x
yyyy
Figure 21-29.
21-44
= fi rst storage halfword
= second storage halfword
MSA Field e and k Values for Display of Storage
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
y
xxxxxx = storage address
EPIPEP - Channel Adapter Reset (MSLA)
Use this function to simulate a system reset from any attached channel if the
access method terminates abnormally (a bend) and you have to release the
subchannels and lines.
The Channel Adapter Reset function resets only the subchannels and lines
associated with the channel adapter that you specified, and has no effect on the
normal operation of other channels.
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in EP mode, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning
of this chapter.
PF2
To select data exchange
function.
o
~
DATA==>
1xyy
FUNCTI ON==>
2
CCU L VL3==>
1
(I
Y
I
x = channel adapter number
yy = 00 no status presentation
yy = FF CE/OE/UC presented
on all associated subchannels
SEtIl
!
When the channel adapter is reset, the MSA displays
the following:
field e: X71:000000
field k: X72:000101 or X72:000102
For other codes, see Figure 21-32.
Figure 21-30.
EP/PEP - Channel Adapter Reset (MSLA)
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-45
EP - Subchannel Switching (MSLA)
Use this function to switch subchanneljline associations when the host access
method does not issue disable commands. When a line is used with an access
method that does not issue disable commands, the line cannot be accessed by
another subchannel via host-issued commands.
Criteria regulating subchanneljline switching are as follows:
•
The subchannels to which the line can be associated must be identified at
generation time.
•
The switch is performed only if the line does not have an active command
other than ENABLE or PREPARE.
The subchannel switching function does not change the physical state of the line.
An enabled line, for example, will remain enabled.
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
In PEP environment with a line in EP mode, first switch control to EP
mode. Refer to "Switching Control to EP Mode" at the beginning of
this chapter.
{
,
To select the data exchange
function.
SENJ
x = channel adapter number
FUNCTI ON==>
2
CCU LVL3==>
y
yy = subchanneladdress
When the switch is performed, the MSA displays
the following:
field e: X71:000000
field k: X72:000202 or X72:000203
For other codes, see Figure 21-32.
Figure 21-31.
21-46
EP - Subchannel Switching (MSLA)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
MSA Field e
MSA Field k
Description
X71:00FFFF
X71:00FFFF
X71:00FFFF
X71:00FFFF
X71:00FFFF
X71:00FFFF
X72:00FFFF
X72:00CACA
X72:000201
X72:000202
X72:000203
X72:000204
Invalid subroutine.
Invalid channel adapter.
Subchannel entered outside the HIILO range.
Non-MSLA USCCB or NCP line test function active for the line.
Line is currently active.
MSLA USCCB currently active.
X71:000000
X71:000000
X71 :000000
X71 :000000
X71 :000000
X71:000000
X71:000000
X72:000001
X72:000002
X72:000101
X72:000102
X72:000201
X72:000202
X72:000203
Channel adapter 1 selected.
Channel adapter 2 selected.
Channel adapter 1 reset.
Channel adapter 2 reset.
Subchannel is already using the line.
Successful switch.
Switch is performed - ENABLE or PREPARE aborted.
Figure 21-32.
MSLA Function Error Codes
Chapter 21. How to Execute NCP and EP Functions
21-47
21-48
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Pytended Services
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
A control program procedure is a sequence of instructions that call and execute
one or several NCP or EP functions to perform a specific task. For example, to
install a ZAP in NCP, the NCP Dynamic Store function is called. NCP and EP
functions are described starting in Chapter 21.
To create and run the control program procedures, you use a series of tools,
referred to as 3720 procedure tools.
Control program procedures are:
1.
Pre-cataloged control program procedures. They are already cataloged in the
3720 disk and are available at any time to perform an appropriate task. The
names of such procedures always start with CPo You cannot erase or modify
them, nor can you create a procedure whose name starts with CPo You can
only display, copy, and execute them. Precataloged procedures are described
later in this chapter under "Precataloged Control Program Procedures.
II
2.
Youi own control program procedures that you create and catalog using the
3720 procedure tools.
This chapter:
•
Describes the 3720 procedure tools that you use to run the control program
procedures.
•
Explains each step of the precataloged procedures that you can execute and
copy.
•
Shows you how to create some control program procedures.
Printing Cataloged Control Program Procedures
Cataloged control program procedures may be printed on a host printer. The
transfer and print procedures are documented in System Support Programs,
Diagnosis Reference, L Y30-5564.
A sample of a print-out is given at the end of this chapter.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-1
3720 Procedure Tools
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the control program
procedure tools
The following 3720 procedure tools are displayed in the secondary menu area:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
CNTL PRGH PROC
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
1 DIRECTORY
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
4 ERASE
5 HODIFY
S EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
(
The 3720 procedure tools are:
22,.2
•
Directory - To list all cataloged and precataloged procedures.
•
Display - To display a specific procedure.
•
Create/Copy - To create or copy a procedure.
•
Erase - To erase a procedure that you created and cataloged.
•
Modify - To modify a procedure that you created and cataloged.
•
Execute - To execute any cataloged procedure.
•
Catalog - To catalog a procedure that you created, copied or modified.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
A procedure is created in 3720 storage, then cataloged into a procedure file on the
disk.
Warning: Save any new, or modified, procedure files onto the
backup diskette every time (see Chapter 15).
To display, modify, or execute a procedure, the procedure is moved from the
procedure file into 3720 storage unless a procedure with the same name is already
in storage. In this case, the following two PF keys are displayed, so you can
select the appropriate procedure:
PF4:TO USE PROC FROM FILE
PF6:TO USE PROC FROM STORE
Both versions of the same procedure may be at different levels.
To exit from a 3720 procedure tool:
•
Select another 3720 procedure tool displayed in the secondary menu, or
•
Select the Terminate function (Chapter 19). It will cancel any 3720 procedure
tools and erase the procedure that may be in 3720 storage
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-3
Directory of Cataloged Procedures
Use Directory to display the directory, that is, the list of all the cataloged
procedures. The directory is updated automatically when you catalog a
procedure.
To position the cursor
Selection:
o (I
To display the control program
procedure tools
SEN)
)
To select Directory
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
CNTRL PRGM PROC
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
TITLE
DATE (MM/DD/YY)
1 DIRECTORY
NAME
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
01
SDLe LINK TEST (NCP)
10/29182
4 ERASE
CP01
S MODIFY
3270 BSC POLL (NCP-EP)
02/14/83
CP02
02
03
6 EXECUTE
2740 SIS POLL (NCP-EP)
10/29/82
CP03
7 CATALOG
START ADDR TRACE (NCP)
01/07/83
CP04
04
STOP ADDR TRACE (NCP)
01/07/83
05
CP05
06
CPOS
X.21 SWITCHED LINE TEST
03/19/85
07
0
PF8: FORWARD
first two digits are the procedure number. This number cannot be used
select the procedure. Its only purpose is to locate a procedure within the
directory.
tiJ
l'rAME and TITLE are those that you entered when creating the procedure.
DATE is that given by the 3720 when you cataloged the procedure.
The directory is automatically updated when you catalog a procedure.
22-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
PF7: To list the preceding available procedures.
PF8: To list the next available procedures.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-5
Display a Cataloged Procedure
Use Display to display a specific procedure.
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the control program
procedure tools
o (I
SEND
)
To select Display
You are first requested to enter the name of the procedure that you want to
display. The following screen is then displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
37~10-1
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
1 DIRECTORY
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
001 SEn
4 ERASE
002 GOTO
5 MODIFY
003 DISP
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
004 DISP
005 OSET
006 GOTO
007 DISP
008 OSET
009 SEn
010 SEn
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CPOl SDLC TEST FRAMES (NCP)
0=
T=
L=
L=
D=
T=
L=
0=
0=
0=
G
22-6
PF3: ALARM
G
OOOOOC F= 07 1= Y
020 A= 000000 C= B= 000000
12 M= TEST FRAHESTO SDLC LINK
15 M= CHANGE FFF TO NCP LINE ADDRESS
002FFF F= 02 1= Y
018 A= 000000 C= B= 000000
15 M= CHANGE FF TO SOLC STATION ADDRESS
OOSlFF F= 02 1= Y
00SlF3 F= 02 1= Y
00SC03 F= 02 1= Y
PFS: QUIT
o
SERIAL NUMBER:
CNTRL PRGM PROC
PF8: FORWARD
Displays the NAME and the TITLE of the procedure, and the DATE.
The first 3 characters of each line are the step number. All instructions and
operands shown on that screen are described under the Create procedure
tool.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PF Keys
PF4: To display the procedure that is already cataloged.
The PF6 key may have two meanings:
•
To display the procedure that is in the 3720 storage.
•
To clear the displayed procedure and allow you to display another one.
PF7: To display the previous 10 steps of the selected control program procedure.
PF8: To display the next 10 steps of the selected control program procedure.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-7
Create/Copy a Procedure
Use Create/Copy to create a new procedure or to copy an existing one under
another name.
•
The maximum number of procedures that you can create depends on the size
of the procedures, but cannot exceed 62, including the precataloged control
program procedures.
•
The maximum number of statements in a procedure is 255.
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the control program
procedure tools
o (I
SEND
)
To select Create/Copy
1. You are first requested to enter the name and the title of the procedure.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
CNTRL PGM PROC
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) _aD>
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
1 DIRECTORY
2 DISPLAY
ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
~
3 CREATE/COPY
ENTER TITLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
4 ERASE
5 MODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
~
22-8
The name is mandatory and must not exceed 4 characters. The first 2
characters must be different from CPo CP is reserved for precataloged
procedures.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
e
2.
The title must not exceed 24 characters. The title is not mandatory. It
may be used to give any type of information that would help you to
identify the contents of the procedure.
Once you have entered the name and title, press SEND. The Copy screen is
displayed.
If you do not want to copy, press SEND a second time. Go to step 3.
If you want to copy an existing procedure under the name that you have just
entered:
3.
•
Enter the name of the procedure that you want to copy.
•
Press SEND.
•
Press PF6 (you may modify the procedure before pressing PF6).
•
Select Catalog to catalog the procedure.
If you did not choose to copy a procedure, the following screen is displayed.
Select one of the instructions and press SEND. Enter the first letter of the
instruction (for example, -0 for OSET). Each instruction and its operands are
described in the following pages.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
3720-1
SERIAL NUHBER:
CNTRL PReM PROC
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) c==>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
CU02 LINE TEST
1 DIRECTORY
SELECT: O=OSET D=DISP H=HALT W=WAIT ==>
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
S=SETI G=GOTO L=LOOP E=END
4 ERASE
5 MODIFY
001 1111
S EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
~
4.
You are requested to enter the appropriate operands.
5.
When you have entered all operands, press SEND.
PF3: ALARM
If there is no error, select another instruction or press PF4 to repeat the same
instruction.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-9
If there is an error, correct it, then press SEND.
6.
When the procedure is complete, enter E. The END instruction must be the
last one.
Once created, a procedure may be:
•
Cataloged:
80((SEND)
If you create, erase, modify, execute, or display another procedure before you
catalog the procedure just created, the latter is lost.
•
Executed:
8
•
0
( { SEND )
0
(
Displayed:
8
I SEND
)
/
I
\
22-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Set Immediate Instruction (SETI)
ISETI
D= xxxxxx F= xx 1= x
Use the SETI instruction to call a control program function and provide data.
All available control program functions are described in Chapter 21. The values
that you enter in the SETI operands (D, F, and I) must not conflict with the
control program requirements.
D= xxxxxx
To provide data to the control program function.
xxxxxx is a string of up to 6 hexadecimal digits, which will be transferred to
the CCU via the CCU X'7l' input register (operator address/data entry
register)
If you enter 6 digits, the leftmost digit must not exceed 3.
If you enter no value, the last entered one is taken.
F= xx
To call the control program function to be performed.
xx is the decimal value from 1 to 16 (or S for 11, R for 12) to be transferred
to the CCU via the CCU X'72' input register (operator display/function select
register).
If you enter no value, the last entered one is taken.
1= Y or 1= N
Y: an Operator Level 3 Interrupt is requested to signal to the control
program that the function specified in F = is to be performed.
N: an Operator Level 3 Interrupt is not requested and the function specified
in F= will not be performed. If you specify 1= N, press BREAK
(ATTN) to recover and re-enter the SETI instruction with operand 1= Y.
If you enter no value, the last entered one is taken.
Operator Set Instruction (OSET)
IOSET D= xxxxxx F= xx 1= x
Use the OSET instruction every time you want to be prompted to call a control
program function and/or enter data while executing a procedure. This allows you
to enter, for example, a subchannel number.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-11
When the OSET instruction is read, you are invited to enter D, F, and/or I
operands. If you enter no operands and press SEND, the current OSET operands
are transmitted unchanged to the CCU.
The OSET operands are the same as those of the SETI instruction.
Goto, Halt, and Wait Instructions
Instructions Goto, Halt, and Wait have the same format and operands.
GOTO
HALT
WAIT
T= xxx
~I
A=
{XXXXXX
L
no valui
c= { ~&} B={
XXX xxx }
no
value
,---I_ _ _ _ _ _---'
step
number
condition under which
instruction Goto, Halt, or
Wait is executed
T= xxx
xxx is the target step number. If you do not specify a step number, the next
one is assumed.
A= {xxxxxx}
{no value}
xxxxxx is the hexadecimal value expected in the CCU X'71' output register.
Enter no value if you expect no specific value in the CCU X'71' output
register.
The contents of the CCU X'71' output register is displayed in MSA field e
(see Chapters 21 and 25).
{&}
&
C={!}
!
A
{A}
{B}
B
means conditions A and B.
means condition A or B.
means that the value entered in the A = operand is to be
compared to the X /71' output register contents masked by the
value entered in the B = operand.
means that the value entered in the B = operand is to be
compared to the X'72' output register contents masked by the
value entered in the A = operand.
If you enter an instruction with no condition (that is, no value in operands A,
B, and C), the instruction is executed unconditionally.
B= {xxxxxx}
{no value}
xxxxxx is the hexadecimal value expected in the CCU X'72' output register.
22-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Enter no value if you expect no specific value in the CCU X'72' output
register.
The contents of the CCU X'72' output register is displayed in MSA field k.
Goto Instruction
The Goto instruction allows you to go to step xxx and execute it, if the condition
is fulfilled; otherwise the next step is executed.
Goto with no value has no effect. The procedure continues in sequence.
Halt Instruction
When a Halt instruction is encountered, the following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PRGM PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
STEP BY STEP
CU02 LINE TEST
1 DIRECTORY
ENTER STEP NUMBER OR
==>
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
PRESS PF4 PF5 PFS OR SEND (EXECUTE CURRENT STEP: 001)
4 ERASE
5 MODIFY
S EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
PF4:EXCUTE SETI PF5:STOP EXECUTION PFS:CHANGE EXEC MODE
001 HALT T= 002 A= 000005 C= B= OOOOOF
The Halt instruction allows you to go to the step that you specified in operand
T = and to stop before executing that step, if the condition is fulfilled.
The current step is displayed on the function message line. To resume processing,
do one of the following actions:
•
Execute the current step, displayed on line 23 (SEND key).
•
Go to another step (enter the step number).
•
Request an additional SET! instruction (PF4 key). You are then requested to
enter the SETI operands.
•
Stop the function execution (PF5 key).
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-13
•
Change the mode of execution (PF6 key). If the execution mode is
step-by-step, it switches to continuous mode, and conversely. Then press
SEND or any other displayed PF key.
Wait Instruction
The Wait instruction allows you to wait until the condition is fulfilled, and then
to go to the step that you specified in operand T = .
To get control of the operator console, press the BREAK (ATTN) key. The
following screen is then displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PRGM PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
1 DIRECTORY
STEP BY STEP
CU02 LINE TEST
ENTER STEP NUMBER OR
==>
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
PRESS PF4 PF5 PF6 OR SEND (EXECUTE CURRENT STEP: 003)
4 ERASE
S MODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
PF4:EXCUTE SETI PFS:STOP EXECUTION PF6:CHANGE EXEC MODE
003 WAIT T= 004 A= 00003F C= B= 0OO04F
To resume processing, do one of the following actions:
22-14
•
Return to wait state (SEND key).
•
Go to another step (enter the step number).
•
Request an additional SETI instruction (PF4 key). You are then requested to
enter the SETI operands.
•
Stop the function execution (PF5 key).
•
Change the mode of execution (PF6 key). If the execution mode is
step-by-step, it switches to continuous mode, and conversely. Then press
SEND or any other displayed PF key.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Loop Instruction
ILOOP
T= xxx N= xxx
When it reaches this instruction, the procedure loops from this step to that
specified in operand T = xxx, for the number of times that you indicated in
operand N = xxx minus 1 (because the Loop instruction is located at the end of
the loop block).
The value specified in operand T = must be smaller than the step number of the
Loop instruction.
If a Goto or a Halt instruction is within the range of steps covered by the Loop
instruction and branches to a step outside this range, the Loop instruction is
ended and the Goto or Halt instruction is executed.
Nested Loop instructions may give unpredictable results.
Disp Instruction
IDISP
L = xxx M = message
The Disp Instruction allows you to display on the line specified in operand L = xx
(12 to 21), the message specified in the M = operand.
These messages inform you of the progression of the procedure or ask you to
perform specific actions.
A message remains on the screen until a new one is displayed on the same line or
until you clear it.
To clear a message, you must enter another Disp instruction on the same line
(same operand L =) with no character for the M operand.
DISP L= 15 M=
Notes:
1.
You cannot enter (in operand M=) messages longer than 40 characters
2.
You cannot specify more than 50 messages (DISP instructions) in a procedure.
This number does not include DISP instructions with blank characters.
End Instruction
The End instruction indicates the end of the procedure. It must be the last
instruction of the procedure. This statement cannot be modified or erased.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-15
Copy a Cataloged Procedure
Use Copy to copy existing procedures in order to catalog them either modified or
not. You may copy any procedure: procedures that you created and cataloged, or
precataloged ones. The only way to modify a precataloged procedure is to copy it
under another name and modify the copied version.
Selection:
8
~
To position the cursor
(I
SEND
)
0(ISEND)
To display the control program
procedure tools
To select Create/Copy
The first screen of Create/Copy is displayed. You are requested to:
22-16
•
Enter the new name and title of the procedure (that is, the name under which
you will catalog the copied procedure).
•
Ent~r
•
Press PF6 (you may modify the procedure before pressing PF6).
•
Select Catalog.
•
Enter the new name of the procedure.
the name of the procedure that you want to copy.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Erase a Cataloged Procedure
Use Erase to erase a cataloged procedure. The directory and the procedure file
are automatically updated.
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the control program
procedure tools
8 (I
SEN)
)
To select Erase
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTO~R 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PReH PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
-->
SYSTEH INPUT AREA (SIA)
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOCOFF
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
1 DIRECTORY
2 DISPLAY
ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE ERASED
3 CREATE/COPY
PF3: ALARH
-->
<4 ERASE
3 HODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOC
You cannot erase procedures starting with CPo As a general rule, erase only the
procedures that you created and cataloged.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-17
Modify a Cataloged Procedure
Use Modify to delete, insert, or modify one or several instructions in a procedure
already cataloged, except procedures starting with CPo If you want to modify a
precataloged procedure (CP), you must first copy it under another name (see
"Create/Copy a Procedure").
Note: Before selecting Modify, you must know the step number of the
instruction(s) that you want to modify.
To position the cursor
Selection:
To display the control program
procedure tools
o (I
SEND
)
To select Modify
Once you have selected Modify from the secondary menu, you are requested to
enter the name of the procedure that you want to modify. Then the following
screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PRGM PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
CU02 LINE TEST
1 DIRECTORY
ENTER STEP NUMBER ==>
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
SELECT ACTION: D=DELETE I=INSERT M=MODIFY aa> ~
4 ERASE
:5 MODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
0
PF6: END MODIFY
o
~
22-18
Enter the step number of the instruction that you want to delete or modify,
or after which you want to insert a new instruction.
Select the action: delete, insert, or modify.
3720/3721 Communication ControUers Extended Services
The step you have just selected is displayed. If you selected the action:
•
DELETE: The selected step is immediately deleted. (It is not possible to
delete the last step of a procedure, which is always END. If this is attempted,
the message INVALID INPUT appears on the screen.)
•
INSERT: You have to enter one or more instructions. To insert a step before
the first step, enter the step number O. The maximum number of statements
allowed in a procedure is 255.
•
MODIFY: You have to modify the displayed instruction or to replace it by a
new instruction. (It is not possible to modify the last step of a procedure,
which is always END. If this is attempted, the message INVALID INPUT
appears on the screen.)
If you insert or delete one or several instructions, the T = operands of the Goto,
Halt, Wait, and Loop instructions are automatically updated.
If you enter a step number and press SEND without selecting an action, the step
is nevertheless displayed.
Once the procedure is modified:
•
Press PF6, then
•
Catalog the procedure.
PF Keys
PF4: To modify the procedure that is already cataloged.
The PF6 key may have two meanings:
•
TO USE PROC FROM STORE - To modify the procedure that is in the
3720 storage.
•
END MODIFY - To indicate end of modifications. Do not forget to catalog
the procedure.
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-19
Execute a Cataloged Procedure
Use Execute to execute a procedure that is cataloged or that you have just created
or modified. The control program must be running and MOSS must be online.
Selection:
EJ
o (I
o (I
To position the cursor
~ )
~
)
To display the control program
procedure tools
To select Execute
You are first requested to enter the procedure name. Then the following screen is
displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PRGM PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
1 DIRECTORY
CU02 LINE TEST
ENTER EXECUTION MODE
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
S=STEP BY STEP C=CONTINUOUS ==> C
4 ERASE
:5 MODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
PF3: ALARM
The procedure may be executed in two modes:
•
Step-by-step mode: The procedure stops before executing each step, which is
displayed on the function message line.
•
Continuous mode: The procedure is executed automatically.
In both modes, when an OSET, a Halt, or a Wait instruction is encountered, the
procedure stops and you are requested to take an action. These instructions are
described under the Create procedure tool.
22-20
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
While a procedure is being executed, the messages specified in the Disp instruction
at creation time are displayed on the screen.
PF Keys
PF4: To execute the procedure that is already cataloged.
PF6: To execute the procedure that is in the 3720 storage.
Chapter 22. Control· Program Procedures
22-21
Catalog Procedures
Use Catalog to catalog in the procedure file the procedure that you have created
or modified in 3720 storage. The directory is updated automatically with the
procedure name and title, and the date.
If you select the Terminate function before cataloging a procedure that you have
just created or modified, the procedure is lost or the modifications are ignored.
To position the cursor
Selection:
o (I
To display the control program
procedure tools
SEND
)
To select Catalog
The following screen is displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: CNTRL PRGM PROC
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
1 DIRECTORY
ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CATALOGED a=>
2 DISPLAY
3 CREATE/COPY
4 ERASE
5 MODIFY
6 EXECUTE
7 CATALOG
PF3: ALARM
When the procedure is cataloged, the following message is displayed (x is the
name of the procedure):
PROCEDURE x CATALOGED
22-22
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Precataloged Control Program Procedures
Precataloged procedures are procedures already cataloged on the controller
diskette when you receive your 3720. The names of precataloged procedures
always start with CPo You cannot modify or erase them.
Each procedure is documented in this chapter as follows:
•
Selection. This tells you exactly what to do to select and execute each
procedure.
•
Detailed description of each step. This may help you if you want to create a
similar procedure or to copy the procedure under a different name and
modify it.
If an unintentional loop occurs while performing a control program procedure, do
as follows:
l.
Re-IML MOSS (see 3720/3721 Operator's Guide).
2.
Correct the control program procedure using the 3720 procedure tools
described in this chapter, and
3.
Execute the procedure another time.
The precataloged procedures are:
CPO 1 - SD LC test frames (NCP only)
CP02 - 3270 BSC general poll (NCP /EP)
CP03 - 2740 start/stop poll (NCP /EP)
CP04 - start address trace (NCP only)
CP05 - stop address trace (Ncp only)
CP06 - X.2l switched line test (NCP only)
Control program procedures use several NCP or EP subroutines. Most of these
subroutines are described in Figures 21-4 and 21-18. The subroutine identifier is
the:
-
First two characters of the D operand of each SETI and OSET
instruction if the D operand is four characters long.
Second and third characters of the D operand of each SET! and OSET
instruction if the D operand is five characters long.
These identifiers are listed in columns xx of Figures 21-4 and 21-18 (for NCP) and
21-18 (for EP).
Example: SETI D=
SETI D=
051F3 F= 2 1= Y
51F3 F= 2 1= Y
I
!
Load Transmit Buffer subroutine (X'51')
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-23
When an error occurs while executing a precataloged control program procedure,
the procedure stops and the error code is displayed in field k of the MSA. These
codes are documented under the appropriate functions, starting at Figure 21-5.
CPOl - SDLC Test Frames (NCP)
Use this function to transmit SDLC test frames (command F3) from the 3720 to
any SDLC link in your network.
Selection:
EJ 0 { (
o ((
SEND
o
SEN)
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
)
To select Execute
)
0 0 0 ((
SEND
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise e
S for step-by-step mode
22-24
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Detailed Description
Steps and Instructions
Comments
001 SETI
Set NCP mode.
D= OOOOOC F= 071= Y
002 GOTO T= 026 A = 000000 C = & B = 000000
If EP, go to step 26.
003 DISP
L= 18 M = **** SDLC TEST-FRAMES TO SDLC LINK ****
Display on line 18 text in operand M.
004 DISP
L= 14 M = CHANGE 'FF' TO NCP LINE ADDRESS (HEX)
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
0050SET
D= 0020FF F= 02 1=
Initialize the line.
006 GOTO T= 026 A = OOOOFF C = B B = 000003
The line is an EP line, go to step 26.
007 GOTO T= 014 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000005
The line is active, go to step 14.
008 GOTO T= 012 A= OOFFOO C= B B= 000000
Errors, go to step 12.
009 SETI
D= 004000 F=
010 DISP
L= 14 M=
1=
Enable the line.
Dummy message to increase delay.
011 GOTO T= 018 A= OOFFOO C= B B= OOFFOO
012 DISP
No error detected, go to step 18.
L= 14 M = ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
013 GOTO T= 027 A=
C=
An error is detected during
initialization. The error code is in MSA
fields e and k. See Figure 21-5.
B=
Go to step 27.
014 DISP
L= 14 M = LINE IS ACTIVE. (DEACTIVATE)
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
015 HALT
T= 004A=
Go to step 4 after the line is
deactivated.
016 DISP
L= 14 M = ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
017 GOTO T= 027 A=
C=
C=
B=
Same comment as STEP 012.
B=
Go to step 27.
018 DISP
L= 14 M = CHANGE 'AA' TO SDLC STATION ADDRESS
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
0190SET
D= 0067AA F=
Load addressing character.
020 SETI
D= 006210 F=
1=
1=
Set SDLC test mode.
021 GOTO T= 023 A = OOFFFF C = B B = 000000
No error, go to step 23.
022 GOTO T= 016 A=
Error, go to step 16.
C=
B=
023 DISP
L= 14 M = TO END THE TEST, PRESS SEND
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
0240SET
D= 005000 F=
Set end test.
025 GOTO T= 028 A=
1=
C=
B=
Go to step 28 (end).
026 DISP
L= 14 M = INITIATED LINE IS SUPPORTED BY EP
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
027 HALT
T= 028 A=
Halt.
028 END
Figure 22-1.
C=
B=
End of procedure.
CPOI Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-25
CP02 - 3270 BSC General Poll (NCP/EP)
Use this procedure to transmit a poll sequence from the 3720 to any 3270 display
system in EBCDIC with BSC protocol. For a 3270 display system in ASCII,
replace data in the D operands marked by an asterisk by appropriate data. To do
so, copy and modify the procedure.
The CP02 procedure runs in EP environment as well as in NCP or NCP jPEP
environment.
Selection:
EJ 0 ( I
o (I
o
SEN)
SEN)
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
}
To select Execute
)
0 0 CD ( I
SEND
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise eJ
S for step-by-step mode
22-26
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Detailed Description
Steps and Instructions
Comments
001 DISP
L= 19 M = **** GENERAL POLL TO 3270 (BSC) ****
Display on line 19 text in operand M.
002 SETI
D= OOOOOC F= 07 1= Y
Set NCP mode.
003 GOTO T= 030 A = 000000 C = & B = 000000
If EP, go to STEP 31.
004 DISP
L= 12 M = CHANGE 'FF' TO NCP LINE ADDRESS (HEX)
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
0050SET
D= 0020FF F= 02 1= Y
Initialize the line.
006 GOTO T= 030 A = OOOOFF C = B B = 000003
PEP line, go to step 30.
007 GOTO T= 011 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000005
Line is active, go to step 11.
008 GOTO T= 013 A= OOFFOO C= B B= OOFFOO
Line is available, go to step 13.
009 DISP
L= 12 M = ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
010 GOTO T= 024A=
011 DISP
C=
An error is detected during
initialization. The error code is in
MSA fields e and k. See Figure 21-5.
B=
Go to step 24.
L= 12 M = LINE IS ACTIVE IN NCP. (DEACTIVATE)
012 GOTO T= 024A=
C=
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
B=
Go to step 24.
013 DISP
L= 12 M = CHANGE 'AA' TO CU-POLL ADDRESS (TWICE)
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
0140SET
D= 0066AA F=
1=
Load polling character.
0150SET
D= 0066AA F=
1=
Load polling character.
016 SETI
D= 00667F F=
1=
Load all-device poll address.
017 SETI
D= 00667F F=
1=
Load all-device poll address.
018 SETI
D= 00662D F=
1=
Load ENQ character.
019 SETI
D= 004000 F=
1=
Enable the line.
020 SETI
D= 004A11 F=
1=
Continuous polling.
021 GOTO T= 023 A = OOOOFF C = B B = 000000
Go to step 23.
022 GOTO T= 009A=
Go to step 9.
C=
B=
023 DISP
L= 12 M = -----UNE TEST IS RUNNING-----
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
024 DISP
L= 13 M = TO END THE TEST, PRESS SEND
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
0250SET
D= 005000 F=
End the line test.
026 GOTO T= 054A=
Figure 22-2 (Part 1 of 2).
1=
C=
B=
Go to step 54.
CP02 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-27
Steps and Instructions
Comments
027 DISP
L= 12 M = ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
An error is detected. The error code
is in MSA fields e and k. See Figure
21-5 (NCP) or Figures 21-20 and 21-21
(EP).
0280SET
D=
Display last message.
008DAA F=
029 GOTO T= 051 A=
1=
C=
B=
Go to step 51.
030 SETI
D= OOOOOE F= 07 1=
Set EP mode.
031 DISP
L=
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
032 SETI
D= 000037 F= 05 1=
033 SETI
D= OOOOFF F=
1=
Load PAD.
034 SETI
D= 000032 F=
1=
Load SYN.
035 SETI
D= 000032 F=
1=
Load SYN.
0360SET
D= OOOOAA F= 051= Y
Load poll address.
0370SET
D= OOOOAA F= 051 = Y
Load poll address.
038 SETI
D= 00007F F=
1=
Load all-device poll.
039 SETI
D= 00007F F=
1=
Load all-device poll.
040 SETI
D= 00002D F=
1=
Load ENQ character.
041 SETI
D= 000099 F=
1=
Load end-of-buffer.
042 SETI
D= 000110 F=
1=
Load ACK buffer 1.
043 SETI
D= 000161 F=
1=
Load ACK.
044 SETI
D= 000199 F=
1=
Load end buffer 1.
045 SETI
D= 000437 F=
1=
Load compare character EOT.
046 SETI
D= 000903 F=
1=
Load swap character ETX.
047 DISP
L= 13 M = CHANGE' AA' TO SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
0480SET
D= 0080AA F=
1=
Enable line.
0490SET
D= 0020AA F=
1= Y
Transmit buffer.
13 M = CHANGE' AA' TO CU-POLL ADDRESS (TWICE)
050 GOTO T= 027 A = 200000 C = A B = 200000
Load EOT character.
EP errors, go to step 27.
051 DISP
L= 12 M = TO END THE TEST
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
0520SET
D= 008FAA F=
End test.
1=
053 GOTO T= 027 A = OOFFFF C = A B = OOFFFF
Error, go to step 27.
054 END
End of procedure.
Figure 22-2 (Part 2 of 2).
22-28
CP02 Procedure
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
CP03 - 2740 Start/Stop Poll (NCP/EP)
Use this procedure to transmit a poll sequence from the 3720 to any 2740 or other
start/stop terminal in a network working with the same protocol.
CP03 runs in EP environment as well as in NCP or NCP/PEP environment.
Selection:
8 0 (I
SEN)
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
)
0(1SEN))
To select Execute
0000 ( I SEN)
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise enter
0(ISENJ)
S for step-by-step mode
Detail Description
Steps and Instructions
Comments
001 DISP
L= 19 M = **** SIS POLL TO 2740 WITH SCTL ****
Display on line 19 text in operand M.
002 SETI
D= OOOOOC F= 07 1= Y
Set control to NCP mode.
003 GOTO T= 027 A = 000000 C = & B = 000000
If EP, go to step 27.
004 DISP
L= 12 M = CHANGE 'FF' TO NCP LINE ADDRESS (HEX)
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
0050SET
D= 0020FF F= 02 1= Y
Initialize the line.
006 GOTO T= 025 A = OOOOFF C = B B = 000003
PEP line, go to step 25.
007 GOTO T= 011 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000005
Go to step 11.
008 GOTO T= 013 A= OOFFOO C= B B= OOFFOO
Line is available, go to step 13.
009 DISP
An error is detected during
initialization. The error code is in
MSA fields e and k. See Figure 21-5.
L= 12 M = ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
010 GOTO T= 022 A=
011 DISP
C=
B=
L= 12 M= LINE IS ACTIVE IN NCP. DEACTIVATE
Figure 22-3 (Part 1 of 2).
Go to step 24.
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
CP03 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-29
Steps and Instructions
Comments
C=
012 GOTO T= 022A=
B=
013 DISP
L= 12 M = CHANGE 'AA' TO 2740 STATION ADDRESS
0140SET
D= 0066AA F=
015 SETI
D= 006640 F=
1=
016 SETI
D= 004000 F=
1=
1=
D= 004A11 F=
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
Load the station address.
Enable the line.
017 GOTO T= 016 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000023
018 SETI
Go to step 22.
1=
Error, go to step 16.
Receive mode.
019 GOTO T= 021 A= 00004A C= & B= 000000
Go to step 21.
020 GOTO T= 009 A=
Error, go to step 9.
C=
B=
021 DISP
L= 12 M = -----UNE TEST IS RUNNING-----
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
022 DISP
L= 13 M = TO END THE TEST, PRESS SEND
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
0230SET
D= 005000 F=
1=
024 GOTO T= 038A=
C=
End test.
B=
Go to step 38.
025 SETI
D= OOOOOE F= 07 1=
026 SETI
D= 008CFF F=
027 SETI
D= 00001 F F = 05 I =
028 DISP
L= 13 M = CHANGE 'AA' TO 2740 ADDRESS (PDF-CODE)
0290SET
D= OOOOAA F=
030 SETI
D= 000001 F=
1=
031 SETI
D= 000099 F=
1=
Load the station address.
032 SETI
D= 00047C F=
1=
Load EOA character.
033 DISP
L= 13 M= CHANGE 'AA' TO SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS
0340SET
D= 0080AA F=
1=
0350SET
D= 0020AA F=
1=
036 DISP
L= 12 M = TO END THE TEST,
Display on line 12 text in operand M.
0370SET
D= 008FAA F=
End the line test.
1=
1=
1=
038 END
Load buffer-end.
(
\
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
End the procedure.
Figure 22-3 (Part 2 of 2).
22-30
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
CP03 Procedure
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
CP04 - Start Address Trace (N CP)
Use this procedure to debug TP problems by storing up to four register values or
storage values in a trace table each time the address that you specified is accessed
in a specific program level. To stop the address trace, use procedure CP05 or the
CCU data exchange function.
To display the address trace table, use the procedure given under "NCP-Address
Trace" in Chapter 21.
You can use procedure CP04 only in NCP or NCP/PEP environment if
TRACE=YES is specified in the BUILD macro.
Selection:
8 0 (I
SEN)
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
}
0(ISENl}
To select Execute
0008 ( I
SEND
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise enter
S for step-by-step mode
0((SENl]
Detailed Description
Comments
Steps and Instructions
001 SETI
D=
oooooe F=
071= Y
002 GOTO T= 026 A = 000000 C = & B = 000000
Set NCP mode.
If not NCP, go to step 26.
003 DISP
L= 18 M = ***START ADDRESS TRACE ***
Display on line 18 text in operand M.
004 SETI
D= 008002 F= 01 1= Y
Set on Allow Additional Register
Range Bit (AARR).
005 SETI
D= 000001 F= 01 1= Y
Set Address Trace function in NCP.
006 DISP
L= 13 M = ENTER DESIRED PGM LEVELS ( 1 - F )
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
0070SET
D= F=
Set program levels. Enter in D = the
program level (s) to be traced (X'1' to
X'F'). It can be any combination of:
1... level 2
.. 1.. level 3
... 1. level 4
.... 1 level 5
1=
Figure 22-4 (Part 1 of 2).
CP04 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-31
Steps and Instructions
Comments
008 GOTO T= 019 A= OFFFFF C= B B= 03FFFF
Error, go to step 19.
009 DISP
L= 13 M = ENTER STORAGE-ADDR. IN 'D'
010 DISP
L= 14 M = OR REG.- AD DR. RORO IN 'D'
011 OSET
D= F= 1=
+
+
S IN 'F'
R IN 'F'
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
Enter in D = either the storage or the
register address. (Enter the register
address as rOrO: for register X'42'
enter 4020.) Enter in F = either S for
storage or R for register.
012 GOTO T= 014A=
C=
B=
Go to step 14.
013 GOTO T= 016A=
C=
B=
Go to step 16.
014 LOOP T= 013 N= 004
015 GOTO T= 021 A=
C=
4 loops required to enter data.
B=
All data entered, go to step 21 to
continue.
016 DISP
L= 13 M = IF MORE VALUES TO ENTER, PRESS [SEND]
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
017 DISP
L= 14 M = IF NO MORE VALUES, ENTER STEP = > 21
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
018 HALT
T= 009 A=
019 DISP
L= 13 M = INVALID PGM-LEVEL VALUE ENTERED
020 GOTO T= 006 A=
C=
C=
B=
B=
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
Go to step 06.
021 DISP
L= 13 M=
Clear message on line 13.
022 DISP
L= 14 M = * ALL POSSIBLE VARIABLES ARE ENTERED*
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
023 SETI
D= F= 061=
024 SETI
D= F= 031=
025 GOTO T= 028 A=
Start the trace.
C=
B=
Go to step 28.
026 DISP
L= 13 M = * CP04 ISN'T SUPPORTED BY EP *
027 HALT
T= 031 A=
028 DISP
L= 13 M = ADDR. TRACE IS NOW ACTIVE, SET' AC' WITH
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
029 DISP
L= 14 M = LEVEL 1 INTERR. OPTION (CCU FUNCT. AC)
Display on line 14 text in operand M.
030 HALT
T= 031 A=
C=
C=
B=
B=
031 END
End of the procedure.
Figure 22-4 (Part 2 of 2).
22-32
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
CP04 Procedure
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
CP05 - Stop Address Trace (NCP)
Use this procedure to stop an address trace. You can use procedure CP05 only in
NCP or NCP/PEP environment.
You can execute CP05 only if you already executed procedure CP04 - Start
Address Table.
Selection:
EJ 0 ( I
o (I
o0 0
SEN)
SEN)
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
)
To select Execute
)
0 (I
SEN)
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise enter
S for step-by-step mode
Detailed Description
Steps and Instructions
Comments
001 SETI
Set NCP mode.
D= OOOOOC F= 07 1= Y
002 GOTO T = 009 A = 000000 C = & B = 000000
If EP, go to step 9.
003 DISP
L=
18 M = **** STOP ADDRESS TRACE ****
004 SETI
D= F= 061= Y
Stop the Address Trace function.
005 SETI
D= 000002 F= 01 1= Y
Set off the Allow Additional Register
Range bit (AARR).
006 DISP
L= 13 M = THE ADDRESS TRACE IS NOW STOPPED ...
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
007 DISP
L= 14 M = CANCEL AC (CCU FNCTN RAC)
To cancel the address compare, select
CCU function, Cancel AC (8).
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
Note: This action is required only if
you selected an Address Compare.
008 HALT
T= 011 A=
009 DISP
L=
010 HALT
T= 011 A=
C=
13 M = *CP05 ISN'T SUPPORTED BY EP*
C=
011 END
Figure 22-5.
B=
B=
Go to step 11 (end).
Display on line 13 text in operand M.
Go to step 11 (end).
End of the procedure.
CP05 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-33
CP06 - X.21 Switched Line Test (NCP)
Use this procedure to transmit test frames.
Selection:
EJ 0 ( (
o (I
o
SEND
SEND
To display 3720 procedure
tools in the secondary menu
)
To select Execute
)
0 0 0 (I
SEND
)
Name of the procedure
Continuous mode; otherwise
S for step-by-step mode
22-34
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
~
Detailed Description
Steps and Instructions
Comments
001 SETI
Set NCP mode.
D= OOOOOC F= 07 1= Y
002 GOTO T = 005 A =
oooooe e =
& B = OOOOOC
If NCP, go to step 5.
003 DISP
L= 18 M= CP06 CANNOT BE PERFORMED BY EP
Display message on line 18.
004 HALT
T= 084 A=
EP mode, go to step 84 and halt.
005 DISP
L=
C=
B=
Display name of the procedure on
line 18.
18 M = **** X.21 SWITCHED LINE TEST ****
006 GOTO T= 010 A=
C=
B=
Go to step 10.
007 DISP
L= 16 M =
Clear message on line 16.
008 GOTO T= 15 M =
Clear message on line 15.
009 DISP
L= 14 M=
010 DISP
L= 13 M = LINE ADDRESS SELECTION
011 DISP
L= 14 M = REPLACE FF BY HEX NCP LINE ADDRESS
0120SET
D= 0020FF F= 021=
013 DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
Display message on line 13.
Display message on line 14.
Initialize the line test.
Clear message on line 14.
014 GOTO T= 028 A = OOFFOO C = B B = OOFFOO
No error detected, go to step 28.
015 GOTO T= 019 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000003
EP line, go to step 19.
016 GOTO T= 021 A= OOOOFF C= B B= 000005
The line is active, go to step 21.
017 DISP
L= 14 M = LINE INIT. ERROR, SEE X71/X72 IN MSA
An error is detected during the
initialization of the line. The error
code is displayed in MSA field k.
See Figure 21-5.
018 GOTO T= 022 A=
C=
B=
Go to step 22.
Figure 22-6 (Part 1 of 4).
CP06 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-35
Comments
Steps and Instructions
L= 14 M = SELECTED LINE IS SUPPORTED BY EP
019 DISP
020 GOTO T= 022 A=
C=
B=
This message is displayed only in a
PEP environment when the line is
supported by EP.
Go to step 22.
021 DISP
L= 14 M = LINE IS ACTIVE: DEACTIVATE IT FROM HOST
Display message on line 14.
022DISP
L= 15 M = ENTER STEP NUMBER 79 TO TERMINATE, OR
Display message on line 15.
023DISP
L= 16 M = PRESS SEND TO SELECT ANOTHER LINE
Display message on line 16.
024 HALT
T= 007 A=
Go to step 7 and halt.
025DISP
L= 16 M=
Clear message on line 16.
026DISP
L= 15 M=
Clear message on line 15.
027DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
028DISP
L= 13 M = DIAL NUMBER LOADING (2 TO 15 DIGITS):
Display message on line 13.
029DISP
L= 14 M = REPLACE E BY DIAL DIGIT
Display message on line 14.
0300SET
0= 00470E F=
Load one dial digit.
031 DISP
L= 14 M=
C=
B=
1=
Clear message on line 14.
032 GOTO T= 035 A = OOFFOO C = B B = OOFFOO
Go to step 35.
033DISP
L= 14 M = DIAL DIGIT ERROR, SEE X71/X72 IN MSA
Display message on line 14.
034 HALT
T= 035 A=
Go to step 35 and halt.
035DISP
L= 14 M = IF ANOTHER DIGIT, PRESS SEND
Display message on line 14.
036DISP
L= 15 M = OTHERWISE, ENTER STEP NUMBER 41
Display message on line 15.
037 HALT
T= 038 A=
Go to step 38 and halt.
038DISP
L= 15 M=
Clear message on line 15.
039DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
C=
C=
040 GOTO T= 029 A=
C=
B=
B=
B=
Go to step 29.
041 DISP
L= 15 M=
Clear message on line 15.
042DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
043 SETI
0= 00470F F=
044DISP
L= 13 M = SDLC STATION ADDRESS SELECTION
Figure 22-6 (Part 2 of 4).
22-36
1=
CP06 Procedure
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Indicate that the last digit has been
entered.
Display message on line 13.
Steps and Instructions
Comments
045 DISP
L= 14 M = REPLACE AA BY SDLC ADDRESS
Display message on line 14.
0460SET
D= 0067AA F=
Load addressing characters.
047 DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
048 DISP
L= 13 M = DIAL OPERATE (SETMODE AND DIAL ISSUED)
Display message on line 13.
049 SETI
D= 004800 F=
Issue a Set mode and Dial to the line
and complete the connection using
the digits entered on step 34.
050 DISP
L= 17 M=
1=
1=
Clear message on line 17. This
instruction is used to delay the dial
operate test.
051 GOTO T= 060 A = OOFFOO C = B B = OOFFOO
No error detected, go to step 60.
052 DISP
L= 14 M = DIAL OPERATE ERROR, SEE X71/X72 IN MSA
The error code is displayed in field k
of the MSA. See Figure 21-5.
053 HALT
T= 054 A=
Go to step 54 and halt.
054 SETI
D= 004DOO F=
055 DISP
L= 14 M = USE CCU FNCT DL 4 TO DISPLAY LTS, SEE X72
Select the Display Long function to
display the LTS block. The address
of the LTS pOinter is displayed in
MSA field k.
056 HALT
T= 073 A=
Go to step 73 and halt.
057 DISP
L= 16 M=
Clear message on line 16.
058 DISP
L= 15 M=
Clear message on line 15.
059 DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
060 DISP
L= 13 M = SDLC TEST FRAME TRANSMISSION
Clear message on line 13.
061 SETI
D= 006200 F=
Transmit on SDLC test frame to the
station selected in step 46.
C=
B=
1=
C=
Display LTS pointer address in MSA
field k.
B=
1=
062 GOTO T= 067 A = OOFFFF C = B B = 000000
No error, go to step 67.
063 DISP
L= 14 M = TEST FRAME ERROR, SEE X71/X72 IN MSA
The error code is displayed in field k
of the MSA. See Figure 21-5.
064 HALT
T= 065 A=
Go to step 65 and halt.
065 DISP
L= 14 M=
C=
B=
Clear message on line 14.
066 GOTO T= 068 A=
C=
B=
Go to step 66.
067 SETI
D= 005FOO F=
068 DISP
L= 13 M = X.21 DTE CLEAR REQUEST
Display message on line 13.
069 SETI
D= 005DOO F=
Issue an X.21 DTE clear Request to
the line without ending the line test.
Figure 22-6 (Part 3 of 4).
1=
1=
End the SDLC test frame
transmission but not the line test.
CP06 Procedure
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-37
Steps and Instructions
Comments
070 GOTO T = 074 A = OOFFOO C = B B = OOFFOO
No error, go to step 74.
071 DISP
L= 14 M = X.21 DTE CLEAR ERROR, SEE X71/72 IN MSA
The error code is displayed in field k
of the MSA. See Figure 21-5.
072 HALT
T= 073 A=
Go to step 73 and halt.
073 DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
074 DISP
L= 13 M= PRESS SEND TO TERMINATE OR ENTER STEP:
Display message on line 13.
075 DISP
L= 14 M = - 57 TO LOOP ON SAME STATION (IF DIALED)
Display message on line 14.
076 DISP
L= 15 M= - 25 TO TEST A STATION ON SAME LINE
Display message on line 15.
077 DISP
L= 16 M= - 9 TO TEST A STATION ON ANOTHER LINE
Display message on line 16.
078 HALT
T= 079 A=
Go to step 79 and halt.
079 DISP
L= 16 M=
Clear message on line 16.
080 DISP
L= 15 M=
Clear message on line 15.
081 DISP
L= 14 M=
Clear message on line 14.
082 DISP
L= 13 M=
Clear message on line 13.
083 SETI
D= 005000 F=
084 DISP
L= 18 M=
C=
C=
B=
B=
1=
End the Line Test function.
Clear procedure name displayed on
line 18.
085 END
End of the CP06 procedure.
Figure 22-6 (Part 4 of 4).
CP06 Procedure
(
\~
22-38
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Examples of Control Program Procedure Creation
The following pages show you how to create five control program procedures:
•
FEOl - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCPjPEP)
•
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
•
CE02 - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (EP, PEP)
•
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
•
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SjS (EP, PEP)
These procedures use several NCP and EP subroutines. Most of these subroutines
are described in Figures 21-4 and 21-18. The subroutine identifier is the first two
characters of the D operand of each SETI and OSET instruction. These
identifiers are listed in columns xx of Figures 21-4 (for NCP) and 21-18 (for EP).
Example:
SETI D= 0032 F= 5 1= Y
!
Load Transmit Buffer 1 subroutine (X'OO')
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-39
Conventions
In the create procedures given in this chapter, the following conventions, in
addition to those described in the Preface, are used:
NCP
Decision. In this example, you have
to decide between NCP and NCP/PEP.
Boxes in each procedure show information that is displayed on the screen. All
you have to do is to enter the characters that are printed in bold type. In this
example, you are required to enter 8002, 1, and Y.
F= 1
1= Y
When entering a SETI or OSET instruction, you do not have to specify the F =
and I = values if you already specified the same values in a previous SETI or
OSET instruction. However, in the following procedures, F = and I = values are
always shown, even when repetitive, for clarity.
What to Do Once a Procedure is Created
You should first catalog it:
80((SENO)
Once cataloged, you should test the procedure. To do so, execute it:
80(ISENO)
If there are errors, correct them, then catalog the procedure again. To modify it:
80(ISENO)
22-40
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
FEOl - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP)
Create this procedure at ZAP installation in NCP.
Requirements:
•
NCP with or without PEP
•
BSC line protocol
•
EBCDIC line code
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-41
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To position the cursor.
(I
(I
sat)
)
To select the control
program procedure tools.
sat)
)
To select CREATE.
- ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
- ENTER TITLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
Figure 22-7 (Part. 1 of 3).
22-42
FEOI - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
The name is FE01.
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
XXXXXX is the storage
address right-justified.
1= Y
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 3
XX is the byte to be
stored.
1= Y
More
consecutive
bytes
No more consecutive bytes
More nonconsecutive
bytes
More data
but in
halfwords
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 1
1= Y
(
(
SEND
)
Halfword mode
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
1= Y
(
I
SEND
XXXXXX is the storage
address right justified.
next page
Figure 22-7 (Part 2 of 3).
FEOl - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-43
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 3
1= V
xxxx is the halfword
to be stored.
More
consecutive
halfwords
No more consecutive halfwords
More nonconsecutive
halfwords
No more halfwords to store
More data
but in bytes
No more data (all data stored)
OISP instruction
L= 12
M=
ZAP XXX IS NOW INSTALLED.
PRESS SEND TO END
To display on line 12
text in operand M =
OSET instruction
F= 6
1= V
((SEND)
Figure 22-7 (Part 3 of 3).
22-44
FEOI - Install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
To end the dynamic
store function.
Enter no value in 0 =
To end the procedure.
(Do not forget to
catalog the procedure.)
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
Create this procedure to transmit text messages from the 3720 to any 3270 with
BSC protocol.
Requirements:
•
NCP line
•
BSC line protocol
•
EBCDIC line code
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-45
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To position the cursor.
To select the control
program procedure tools.
To select CREATE.
- ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
- ENTER TITLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
The name is CE01.
No display
of title line
(I
SEN)
To display the title.
'TEXT TO 3270' is an
example of title line.
NCP
only
(
I
SEN)
F= 7
(
(
SEND
)
1= Y
SETI instruction
(
I
SEND
)
15 M= CHANGE FF TO NCP HEX LINE ADDRESS
next page
Figure 22-8 (Part} of 5).
22-46
CEO} - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
In PEP environment,
to switch to NCP mode.
DISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
(
(
OSET instruction
SBIJ
F= 2
1=
To enter the NCP line
address.
Y
OISP instruction
L= 15 M= CHANGE AA TO 3270 POLL ADDRESS TWICE
(
I
SEN)
)
OSET instruction
1= Y
F= 2
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
(
I
SBIJ
)
To enter 3270 CU poll
address.
To repeat previous
OSET instruction .
~
To transmit previous
OSET unchanged.
.
(
I
SEND
F= 2
)
SETI instruction
1= Y
(
I
SBIJ
To enter all-device = poll
address (X'7F').
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
next page
Figure 22-8 (Part 2 of 5).
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-47
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To transmit previous
SETI unchanged.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
1= Y
((SEN) )
To enter enquiry
character ENQ (X'2D').
DISP instruction
CHANGE AA TO CU-SELECTION
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
ADDRTWICE
{
(
SEN)
F= 2
OSET instruction
)
1= Y
To enter 3270
CU-select address.
To repeat previous
OSET instruction.
To transmit previous
OSET unchanged.
{ ( SEN)
DISP instruction
M= CHANGE AA TO DEVICE SELECTION
ADDRTWICE
next page
Figure 22-8 (Part 3 of 5).
22-48
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
To display on line 15
text in opera'nd M =
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
(
I
SEN)
)
F= 2
OSET instruction
1= Y
(
I
set«)
)
To enter 3270
dev-select address.
To repeat previous
OSET instruction.
To transmit previous
OSET unchanged.
(
I
SEN)
F= 2
}
SETI instruction
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
To enter enquiry
character ENQ (X'2D').
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
,
5127
F= 2
1= Y
{
I
SEND
}
To set transmit buffer
offset X'OO'.
F= 2
1= Y
{
I
SEND
}
To enter
ESe (X'27').
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
51 xx
F= 2
1= Y
{
I
SEND
More
oharaoteres
to enter
To enter text
(first enter 3270 wee
character)
xx = data byte of text
No more oharacteres to enter
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
next page
Figure 22-8 (Part 4 of 5).
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-49
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
F= 2
1= Y
(
I
To enable the line.
SEND
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
To poll the 3270 and
monitor for response.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
(
(
M=
SEND
1= Y
(
I
To transmit the
message text.
SEND
)
OISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
TO END THE TEST PRESS SEND
~
(
I
SEND
OSET instruction
1= Y
F= 2
(
Figure 22-8 (Part 5 of 5).
22-50
I
SEND
(
I
SEND
)
CEOl - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
)
To wait for operator's
response.
End of procedure
(do not forget to
catalog the procedure).
CE02 - Text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (EP, PEP)
Create this procedure to transmit a text message from the 3720 to any 3270 in
your network.
Requirements:
•
EP or PEP line
•
BSC line protocol
•
EBCDIC line code
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-51
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To position the cursor.
To select the control
program procedure tools.
((SEND)
To select CREATE.
- ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
- ENTER TILTLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
The name is CE02.
No display
of title line
{
I
F=
(
I
SENO
}
TEXT TO
SEND
3270
I
SEND
F= 5
I
sao
)
)
F= 7
(
(
SETI instruction
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
TO switch to EP mode.
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
To enter EOT character
(X'37') into buffer 1.
)
next page
Figure 22-9 (Part 1 of 6).
22-52
To display the title.
'TEXT TO 3270' is an
example of title line.
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
I
~
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
SEN)
)
To enter PAD character
(X'FF') into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
SEN)
)
To enter SYNC character
(X'32') into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
To transmit previous
SETI unchanged.
DISP instruction
L= 15 L= CHANGE AA TO CU-SELECT-ADDRESS
To display in line 15
text in operand M =
OSET instruction
To enter CU-select test
address into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
OSET instruction.
To transmit previous
OSET unchanged.
Figure 22-9 (Part 2 of 6).
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-53
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
OISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
L= 15 M= CHANGE FF TO DEV-SELECT-ADDRESS
(
I
SEND
)
OSET instruction
1= Y
F= 5
(
I
SEND
)
To enter dev-select
address into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
OSET instruction.
To transmit previous
OSET unchanged.
{
I
SEND
F= 5
}
SETI instruction
1= y
(
I
SEND
)
To enter ENQ
character (X'20').
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
(
SEND
)
To enter end-buffer 1
character.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
next page
Figure 22-9 (Part 3 of 6).
22-54
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
~
~
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
sell
)
To enter STX character
(X'02') into buffer 2.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
sell
)
To enter ESC character
(X'27') into buffer 2.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
sell
)
To enter Erase/Write command
(X'F1') into buffer 2.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
sell
)
To enter WCC (X'C2')
into buffer 2.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
sell
)
To enter text into buffer 2.
xx = data byte of text
(up to 15 characters).
More data
bytes
(
I
SEND
SETI instruction
next page
Figure 22-9 (Part 4 of 6).
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-55
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
To enter ETX character
(X'03') into buffer 2.
SEND
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
To enter end-buffer 2
character.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
1= Y
(
(
SEND
)
To enter ACK 1 (X'61')
or swap character 1.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
(
(
SEND
1= Y
(
I
SEND
)
)
DISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
L= 15 L= CHANGE AA TO SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS
( (
SEND
F= 5
)
1= Y
OSET instruction
(
(
SEND
next page
Figure 22-9 (Part 5 of 6).
22-56
To enter ACK 0 (X'70)
or swap character 2.
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
)
To start the line test
on subchannel AA.
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
I
(
~.
I
OISP instruction
)
0=
I
To display on line 14s
text in operand M =
)
SEND
(
~
cb
Figure 22-9 (Part 6 of 6).
SEN)
L= 14 M= TO END THE TEST, PRESS SEND
cb
I
I
(
0
8FAA
(
I
SEND
F= 5
I
SEND
)
1= Y
OSET instruction
I (I
SEN)
)
To wait for operator's
display.
End of procedure.
(Do not forget to
catalog the procedure).
}
CE02 - Text to 3270-BSC in EBCDIC (EP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-57
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
Create this procedure to transmit a text message from the 3720 to any 2740
start/stop terminal in your network.
Requirements:
22-58
•
NCP
•
Start/stop line protocol
•
EBCDIC line code
•
2740 with station control
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To position the cursor.
To select the control
program procedure tools.
To select CREATE.
- ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
- ENTER TITLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
The name is CE03
No display
of title line
To display the title.
'TEXT TO 2740' is an
example of title line.
L= 12 L= TEXT TO 2740
SETI instruction
F= 7
1= Y
To switch to NCP mode.
OISP instruction
L= 15 L= CHANGE FF TO NCP HEX LINE ADDRESS
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
next page
Figure 22-10 (Part 1 of 4).
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-59
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
(
!
0=
I
SEND
F= 2
20FF
(
I
SEN)
F= 2
)
1= V
OSET instruction
(
I
SEN)
)
)
1= V
To enter NCP line address.
SET instruction
(
(
SEN)
)
To set transmit buffer
offset (X'OO').
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
511F
1= V
(
(
SEND
)
To load circle c (X'1F')
into transmit buffer.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
I
F= 2
(
I
SEN)
1= V
( (
}
L= 15 L= CHANGE AA TO 2740 ADDRESS
SEND
)
To load circle c (X'37')
into transmit buffer.
OISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
OSET instruction
next page
Figure 22-10 (Part 2 of 4).
22-60
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
~
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
F= 2
(
I
1=
Y
(
(
To enter 2740
station address.
SEN)
SETI instruction
SEN)
F= 2
1=
Y
(
I
To load EOA character
(X'01') into buffer.
SEN)
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
1=
Y
(
I
SEN)
)
To load data into buffer
xx = data byte
More data
bytes
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
1= Y
F= 2
(
{
SEND
To enable the line.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 2
(
I
SEND
1= Y
(
)
I
SEND
)
To start transmitting
data.
OISP instruction
next page
Figure 22-10 (Part 3 of 4).
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-61
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
I
!
L= 15 M= TO END THE TEST PRESS SEND
t
{ (
I
Figure 22-10 (Part 4 of 4).
22-62
(
0= 5000
dJ
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
)
SEND
cb~
I
I
SEN:)
F= 2
(
I
SEN:)
}
1= Y
OSET instruction
I
(
)
CE03 - Text to 2740 - SIS (NCP)
3720j372i Communication Controllers Extended Services
I
SEND
)
To wait for operator's
response to stop the
function.
End of procedure.
(Do not forget to
catalog the procedure).
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP, PEP)
Create this procedure to transmit a text message from the 3720 to any 2740
start/stop terminal in your network.
Requirements:
•
EP or PEP line
•
Start/stop line protocol
•
EBCDIC line code
•
2740 with station control
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-63
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
To position the cursor.
((SEN) )
To select the control
program procedure tools.
((SEN) )
To select CREATE.
- ENTER NAME OF PROCEDURE TO BE CREATED ==>
The name is CE04
- ENTER TITLE (UP TO 24 CHAR) ==>
No display
of title line
(
I
SEND
(
L= 12 L= TEXT TO 2740
(
I
SEN)
F= 7
I
SEND
)
)
1= Y
To display the title.
'TEXT TO 2740' is an
example of title line.
SETI instruction
(
I
SEN:)
)
To switch to EP mode.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
1= Y
To load circle c (X'1F')
into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
next page
Figure 22-11 (Part 1 of 4).
22-64
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
(
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
F= 5
To load circle s (X'37')
into buffer 1.
1= Y
DISP instruction
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
L= 15 L= CHANGE AA TO 2740 ADDRESS
(
I
~
D= OOAA
cb
I
SEN)
F= 5
(
I
SEN)
F= 5
~
(
I
SEN)
F= 5
(
I
SEND
F= 5
~
)
1= Y
OSET instruction
I
(
SEND
)
)
1= Y
SETI instruction
(
(
SEND
)
1= Y
)
To load EOA character
(X'01') into buffer 1.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
I
(
SEN)
)
1= Y
To enter 2740
station address
To load end-ot-buffer
1 character.
To repeat previous
SETI intruction.
( (
SEND
To load into
buffer 2.
next page
Figure 22-11 (Part 2 of 4).
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-65
KEY
PROCEDURE
COMMENTS
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
To load text into buffer 2.
Maximum number of bytes
that can be loaded is 18.
xx = data byte
I= V
More data
bytes
(max. 18)
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
I= V
(
I
SEND
)
To load circle c (X'1F')
into buffer 2.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
I= V
(
I
SEND
)
To load end-of-buffer
2 character.
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
I= V
(
I
To enter the swap
character 1 (X'1F').
SEND
To repeat previous
SETI instruction.
F= 5
(
I
SEND
I= V
( (
)
next page
Figure 22-11 (Part 3 of 4).
22-66
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP/PEP)
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SEND
)
To enter the swap
character 2.
DISP instruction
~
KEY
COMMENTS
PROCEDURE
To display on line 15
text in operand M =
L= 15 L= CHANGE AA TO SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS
(
0= 20AA
(
F= 5
(
OSET instruction
SEN)
I
SEND
1= Y
I
(
SEND
)
OISP instruction
)
To display on line 14
text in operand M =
L= 14 L= TO END THE TEST PRESS SEND
(
I
0= 8FAA
cb
Figure 22-11 (Part 4 of 4).
(
(
SEN)
F= 5
I
SEND
To enable the line.
OSET instruction
1= Y
I
(
)
SEND
)
To wait for operator's
response to end the function.
End of procedure.
(Do not forget to
catalog the procedure).
CE04 - Text to 2740 - SIS (EP/PEP)
Chapter 22. Control Program Procedures
22-67
Cataloged Control Program Procedure Print-Out
CONTROL PROGRAM PROCEDURES - DIRECTORY
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME: CPOI
CPOI
CP02
CP03
CP04
CPOS
CP06
TITLE:
TITLE:
TITLE:
TITLE:
TITLE:
TITLE:
SDLC TEST FRAMES (NCP)
3270 BSC GENERAL POLL
2740 START/STOP POLL
START ADDRESS TRACE (NCP)
STOP ADDRESS TRACE (NCP)
X.21 SWITCHED LINE TEST (NCP)
TITLE: SDLC TEST FRAMES(NCP)
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
SETI
GOTO
DISP
DISP
OSET
GOTO
GOTO
GOTO
SETI
DISP
GOTO
DISP
GOTO
DISP
HALT
DISP
GOTO
D=
T=
L=
L=
D=
T=
T=
T=
D=
L=
T=
L=
T=
L=
T=
L=
T=
OOOOOC
026
18
14
0020FF
026
014
012
004000
14
018
14
027
14
004
14
027
22-68
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
F=
A=
M=
M=
F=
A=
A=
A=
F=
M=
A=
M=
A=
M=
A=
M=
A=
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
07
I= Y
000000
C= & B= 000000
**** SDLC TEST-FRAMES TO SDLC LINK ****
CHANGE IFF' TO NCP LINE ADDRESS (HEX)
02
I=
OOOOFF
C= B B= 000003
OOOOFF
C= B B= 000005
OOFFOO
C= B B= 000000
I=
OOFFOO
C= B B= OOFFOO
ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
C= B=
LINE IS ACTIVE (DEACTIVATE)
C= B=
ERROR (SEE LINE TEST FUNCTION)
C= B=
Chapter 23. Correspondence Between Line Addresses and Scanners
Basic Frame (Model 1 and 2)
Decimal
Line
Address
Hex
Line
Address
Dec. Line
Interface
Address
Hex. Line
Interface
Address
LlC
Pos.
CS
No.
00
01
02
03
00
01
02
03
000/001
002/003
004/005
006/007
000/001
002/003
004/005
006/007
1
1
04
05
06
07
04
05
06
07
008/009
010/011
012/013
014/015
008/009
OOA/OOB
OOC/OOD
OOE/OOF
2
1
08
09
10
11
08
09
OA
OB
016/017
018/019
020/021
022/023
010/011
012/013
014/015
016/017
3
1
12
13
14
15
OC
00
OE
OF
024/025
. 018/019
01A/01B
01C/01D
01 E/01 F
4
1
026/027
028/029
031/031
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
032/033
034/035
036/037
038/039
020/021
022/023
024/025
026/027
5
1
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
17
040/041
042/043
044/045
046/047
028/029
02A/02B
02C/02D
02E/02F
6
1
24
25
26
27
18
19
1A
1B
048/049
050/051
052/053
054/055
7
1
Chapter
23.
. 030/031
032/033
034/035
036/037
Correspondence Between Line Addresses and Scanners
23-1
Basic Frame (Models 11 and 12)
Decimal
Line
Address
Hex
Line
Address
Dec. Line
Interface
Address
Hex. Line
Interface
Address
LlC/TIC
Pos.
CS/TRA
No.
00
01
02
03
00
01
02
03
000/001
002/003
004/005
006/007
000/001
002/003
004/005
006/007
3
1
04
05
06
07
04
05
06
07
008/009
010/011
012/013
014/015
008/009
OOA/OOB
OOC/OOD
OOE/OOF
4
1
08
09
10
11
08
09
OA
OB
016/017
018/019
020/021
022/023
010/011
012/013
014/015
016/017
5
1
12
13
14
15
OC
00
OE
OF
024/025
026/027
028/029
031/031
018/019
01A/01B
01C/01D
01E/01F
6
1
16
10
11
1
2
2
2
17
23-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Expansion Frame 1
Decimal
Line
Address
Hex
Line
Address
Dec. Line
Interface
Address
Hex. Line
Interface
Address
LlC
Pos.
CS
No.
32
33
34
35
20
21
22
23
64/065
066/067
068/069
070/071
040/041
042/043
044/045
046/047
1
3
36
37
38
39
24
25
26
27
072/073
074/075
076/077
078/079
048/049
04A/04B
04C/04D
04E/04F
2
3
40
41
42
43
28
29
2A
2B
080/081
082/083
084/085
086/087
050/051
052/053
054/055
056/057
3
3
44
45
46
47
2C
2D
2E
2F
088/089
090/091
092/093
094/095
058/059
05A/05B
05C/05D
05E/05F
4
3
48
49
50
51
30
31
32
33
096/097
098/099
100/101
102/103
060/061
062/063
064/065
066/067
5
3
52
53
54
55
34
35
36
37
104/105
106/107
108/109
110/111
068/069
06A/06B
06C/06D
06E/06F
6
3
56
57
58
59
38
39
3A
3B
112/113
114/115
116/117
118/119
070/071
072/073
074/075
076/077
7
3
60
61
62
63
3C
3D
3E
3F
120/121
122/123
124/125
126/127
078/079
07A/07B
07C/07D
07E/07F
8
3
Chapter 23. Correspondence Between Line Addresses and Scanners
23-3
Expansion Frame 2
23-4
Decimal
Line
Address
Hex
Line
Address
Dec. Line
Interface
Address
Hex. Line
Interface
Address
LlC
Pos.
CS
No.
32
33
34
35
20
21
22
23
64/065
066/067
068/069
070/071
040/041
042/043
044/045
046/047
1
3
36
37
38
39
24
25
26
27
072/073
074/075
076/077
078/079
048/049
04A/04B
04C/04D
04E/04F
2
3
40
41
42
43
28
29
2A
2B
080/081
082/083
084/085
086/087
050/051
052/053
054/055
056/057
3
3
44
45
46
47
2C
2D
2E
2F
088/089
090/091
092/093
094/095
058/059
05A/05B
05C/05D
05E/05F
4
3
48
49
50
51
30
31
32
33
096/097
098/099
100/101
102/103
060/061
062/063
064/065
066/067
5
4
52
53
54
55
34
35
36
37
104/105
106/107
108/109
110/111
068/069
06A/06B
06C/06D
06E/06F
6
4
56
57
58
59
38
39
3A
3B
112/113
114/115
116/117
118/119
070/071
072/073
074/075
076/077
7
4
60
61
62
63
3C
3D
3E
3F
120/121
122/123
124/125
126/127
078/079
07A/07B
07C/07D
07E/07F
8
4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 24. Messages
Five types of messages are displayed on different areas of the operator console
screen (Figure 24-1). An alphabetic list of all messages, starting on page 24-2,
helps you to locate quickly the page where they are described.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN:
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ...>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
OPERATOR CONTROL MESSAGE
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN PF3: ALARM
FUNCTION MESSAGE
ALARM
OPERATOR CONSOLE INFORMATION MESSAGE
Figure 24-1.
Message Areas
The five types of messages are:
1.
Machine status area (MSA) messages. MSA fields are described in Chapter
25.
2.
Operator Control Messages. These are displayed in the SIA line, to indicate
invalid commands or to give information about immediate functions (except
Terminate). They are described in this chapter in alphabetical order.
3.
Function Messages. These are displayed on line 23, to inform you of the
progression of the function or to indicate errors.
4.
Alarms. These are described in 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.,
5.
Operator console information messages. These are displayed below the
horizontal line of the screens. They give the status of the operator console.
They are described at the end of this chapter.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-1
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages
Messages applying to maintenance functions are not documented in this manual but in maintenance manuals.
They are referred to as SP (service personnel). Similarly, messages marked PD (problem determination)
apply to functions described in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
AO MOSS IML EXCEPTION xxx yyy zzz .......................................... PD
A2 MOSS RECOVERABLE ERROR: MOSS ....................................... PD
A3 MOSS DISKETTE DOWN .................................................. PD
A4 MOSS DISKETTE ERROR: DISKETTE IS DEFECTIVE
PD
A6 MOSS OFFLINE: MAINTENANCE MODE ..................................... PD
A7 HARDWARE ERROR: 3720 RE-IPL IN PROGRESS .............................. PD
A8 SOFTWARE ERROR: 3720 RE-IPL IN PROGRESS ............................... PD
A9 HARDWARE ERROR: CHANNEL ADAPTER x DOWN .......................... PD
A10 GENERAL IPL CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. PD
A15 LINE ADAPTER xxx DOWN ............................................... PD
A16 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML IN PROGRESS ................... PD
A17 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML IN PROGRESS ................... PD
A18 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML SUCCESSFUL ................... PD
A19 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML SUCCESSFUL ................... PD
A20 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) ....................................... PD
A21 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) ....................................... PD
A22 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML FAILED ........................ PD
A23 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML FAILED ........................ PD
A24 SCANNER xx ERROR (LINES xxx-yyy) - RE-IML FAILED ........................ PD
A25 REMOTE CONSOLE ERROR: LINE/MODEMS/CONSOLE/MOSS .................. PD
A26 MOSS REMOTE CONSOLE ERROR: CONSOLE ................................ PD
A28 TRM xx DOWN (TIC 1-2) .................................................. PD
A29 TIC x DOWN ON TRM xx ................................................. PD
A30 MOSS DISK DOWN: IPL/DUMP NOT POSSIBLE FROM/ON DISK ................. PD
A31 3720 RE-IPL SUCCESSFUL - DUMP AVAILABLE ON DISK ...................... PD
A33 3720 RE-IPL SUCCESSFUL - DUMP NOT AVAILABLE ON DISK .................. PD
A34 3720 RE-IPL'FAILED - DUMP AVAILABLE ON DISK ........................... PD
A35 3720 RE-IPL FAILED - DUMP NOT AVAILABLE ON DISK ...................... PD
"ACTIVATE LINK" IS ALREADY ALLOWED FOR THIS TIC ........................ 24-61
"ACTIVATE LINK" IS NOW ALLOWED ......................................... 24-61
ADDRESS COMPARE ALREADY SET: CANCEL IT OR WAIT FOR HIT ............... SP
ADDRESS COMPARE ANOMALY: CANCEL ADDRESS COMPARE AND RETRY ........ SP
ADDRESS COMPARE CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST ....................... 'SP
A DELAYED DISPLAY OR ALTER HAS BEEN SPECIFIED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. SP
ALL OR PART OF 'VERIFY DATA' IS OUTSIDE MODULE ........................ .. SP
ALTER COMPLETE ......................................................... SP
ALTERNATE TRACK ASSIGNMENT MAP FULL. CHANGE DISK .................... SP
A SCANNER IS ALREADY SELECTED: RELEASE IT TO SELECT ANOTHER ........... SP
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY BECAUSE OF ADDRESS COMPARE HIT .................... SP
BER FILE IS UPDATED ............................. '.'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. SP
BT BUFFER INCORRECTLY DEFINED ......................................... 24-13
BUFFERS NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP TEST STOPPED ......... :.................... 24-62
BUFFERS TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED .......... 24-62
xx BYTES ALTERED ........................................................ SP
CABLE DOES NOT EXIST .................................................... 24-34
24-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
CABLE NOT IN DIRECT ATTACHMENT ........................................
CABLE NOT INSTALLED ....................................................
CA IPL DETECTED ON CA x .................................................
CANCELED: TARGET VALUE> END STEP NUMBER ............................
CCU ALREADY IN I-STEP MODE .............................................
CCU ALREADY IN PROCESS MODE ............... ~............................
CCU CHECK RESET .........................................................
CCU FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED .............................................
CCU FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED NOW: MOUNT DISKETTE FIRST ..................
CCU FUNCTION STILL PENDING .............................................
CCU FUNCTIONS REFUSED .................................................
CCU INITIALIZATION STARTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CCU/MOSS ERROR: AUTO SELECT NOT DISABLED ..............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: AUTO SELECT NOT ENABLED ..............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT ACCESSIBLE ...............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT UPDATED .................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA CANNOT BE SELECTED .................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA REGISTER X'E' NOT ACCESSIBLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA REGISTERS NOT ACCESSIBLE ............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA STATE NOT ACCESSIBLE ................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CCU INITIALIZATION CANCELED ...........................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CDF CREATION CANCELED ................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CDF VERIFICATION CANCELED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CCU/MOSS ERROR: DISKETTE SWAP FAILED ...................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: DISK FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED: PRESS SEND .......
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED ........................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ..............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: INITIAL CA CANNOT BE RESELECTED .......................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: INPUT X'71', X'72' REG NOT ACCESSIBLE .....................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED ..........................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: MOSS DUMP SWAP CANCELED....... ...... ...... ...... .....
CCU/MOSS ERROR: RESET CCU FUNCTION CANCELED ..........................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: SCANNER DUMP SWAP CANCELED ...... '" .. '" . '" . ... .. ..
CCU/MOSS ERROR: STEP NOT EXECUTED .....................................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: WORK REGISTERS CANNOT BE ALTERED ....................
CCU/MOSS ERROR: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ..............................
CCU/MOSS ERROR xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCU NORMAL MODE IMMEDIATE FUNCTION FAILED ..........................
CCU NOT IN THE RUN STATE (SEE MSA) - FUNCTION CANCELED .................
CCU NOW IN I-STEP MODE ..................................................
CCU NOW IN NORMAL MODE ........•......................................
CCU NOW IN PROCESS MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CCU WILL BYPASS CCU CHECK ..............................................
CCU WILL BYPASS IOC CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CCU WILL STOP ON CCU CHECK .............................................
CCU WILL STOP ON IOC CHECK ......... '. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CDF NOT CREATED: IPL PORT FUNCTION CANCELED ...........................
CDF NOT CREATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED .............................
CHANNEL ADAPTER NOT INSTALLED ........................................
CHECKPOINT TRACE SET xxx FOR LINE ADDRESS xxxx yyyyyyyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHGDMP MOSS DUMP FILE IS NOT EMPTY ....................................
CHHDMP SCANNER DUMP FILE IS NOT EMPTY ................................
CHJDMP DUMP FILE ALREADY CONTAINS A xxxx DUMP ........................
CODE ALREADY RESTORED .................................................
CODE ALREADY UPGRADED ................................................
COMMAND INCOMPATIBLE WITH SCANNER MODE: LOOK AT MSA ...............
24-48
24-48
SP
24-19
24-69
24-69
24-69
24-40
SP
24-69
24-69
SP
24-17
24-17
24-13
24-13
24-17
24-17
24-18
24-18
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-25
24-40
24-69
24-18
24-24
24-52
SP
24-50
SP
24-19
24-30
24-63
SP
24-69
24-51
24-70
24-70
24-70
24-70
24-70
24-70
24-70
24-34
24-63
24-18
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-40
24-40
SP
Chapter 24. Messages
24-3
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
COMMAND REJECT RECEIVED DUE TO BUFFER OVERRUN ......................
COMMAND REJECT RECEIVED DUE TO INVALID COMMAND ....................
COMM NOT READY 1 ........................... ',' . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
COMM NOT READY 2 .......................................................
CONTENTION, PLEASE RE-ENTER ............................................
CONTROL PROGRAM LOADED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
CONTROLLER DATA UNAVAILABLE, FUNCTION CANCELED .....................
CONTROLLER DISKETTE ERROR: SAVE NOT PERFORMED .......................
CONTROLLER DISKETTE ERROR: SAVE PARTIALLY PERFORMED .................
COUNTERS HAVE BEEN RESET ..............................................
CP SAVE IN PROGRESS ON DISK .............................................
CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION HAS BEEN UPDATED .............................
DATA MUST BE PAIRS OF HEX CHARS SEPARATED BY 1 BLANK ..................
DATA RATE MUST NOT BE SPECIFIED WITH DIRECT-ATTACH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
DELAYED ALTER PERFORMED BECAUSE OF ADDRESS COMPARE HIT. . . . . . . . . . . ..
DESTINATION DISK(ETTE) ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED ..........
DISK DIRECTORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED: MOSS DOWN ..........................
DISK-DISKETTE ADAPTER DOWN ............................................
DISK ERROR: CLOSE NOT PERFORMED .......................................
DISK ERROR: DIRECTORY MAY BE DAMAGED .................................
DISK ERROR: DIRECTORY NOT ACCESSIBLE ...................................
DISK ERROR: DUMP FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE ..............................
DISK ERROR: DUMP MAY BE INCOMPLETE ....................................
DISK ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED. PRESS SEND .............................
DISK ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE ....................................
DISK ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ...................................
DISK ERROR: MOSS DOWN ............................ -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE CANNOT BE FILED/MODIFIED .......................
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE FILE MAY BE DAMAGED ............................
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE NOT AVAILABLE ...................................
DISK NOT INITIALIZED .....................................................
DISK NOT READY ..........................................................
DISK OR DISKETTE UNUSABLE ..............................................
DISK ERROR - SPEED CANNOT BE UPDATED ..................................
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD CCU IPL MODULE .............................
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD FUNCTION MODULE ..........................
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD SCANNER DUMP MODULE .....................
DISK STARTING ...........................................................
DISK UNUSABLE: EC NOT INITIALIZED .......................................
DISKETTE ERROR: BER FILE INCOMPLETELY RESTORED, PURGE ABORTED .......
DISKETTE ERROR: CCU INITIALIZATION CANCELED ...........................
DISKETTE ERROR: CDF CREATION CANCELED .................................
DISKETTE ERROR: CDF DISPLAY CANCELED ..................................
DISKETTE ERROR: CDF VERIFICATION CANCELED .............................
DISKETTE ERROR: DUMP MAY BE INCOMPLETE ...............................
DISKETTE ERROR: FILE NOT FOUND .........................................
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED: PRESS SEND .........................
DISKETTE ERROR: IML CANCELED ...........................................
DISKETTE ERROR: IPL PORT FUNCTION CANCELED ............................
DISK(ETTE) ERROR: MCF FUNCTION CANCELED ...............................
DISKETTE ERROR: MOSS DOWN .............................................
DISKETTE ERROR: MOSS DUMP SWAP CANCELED ..............................
DISKETTE ERROR: MOUNT A NEW ONE, THEN PRESS SEND ......................
DISKETTE ERROR: PURGE NOT PERFORMED ..................................
DISKETTE ERROR: REQUEST IGNORED ..................... :.................
24-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
24-52
24-52
24-76
24-76
24-75
25-10
24-14
SP
SP
24-44
25-10
24-44
24-53
24-34
SP
24-40
24-25
24-71
SP
24-20
24-20
SP
SP
24-25
24-14
SP
24-25
24-20
24-20
24-21
SP
24-72
24-71
24-49
24-71
24-71
24-71
24-72
24-26
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-26
24-32
24-34
24-40
24-26
SP
24-26
SP
24-31
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
DISKETTE ERROR: RESET CCU FUNCTION CANCELED ..........................
DISKETTE ERROR: SAVE CANCELED ..........................................
DISKETTE ERROR: SCANNER DUMP NOT AVAILABLE ...........................
DISKETTE ERROR: SCANNER DUMP SWAP CANCELED ..........................
DISKETTE ERROR: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ...............................
DISKETTE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE PERFORMED WHEN MOSS IS ONLINE: PRESS
SEND ..................................................................
DISKETTE NOT READY .....................................................
DISPLAY ADDRESS MODIFIED TO xxxx ........................................
DUMP CANCELED AS REQUESTED ...........................................
DUMP COMPLETE .........................................................
DUMP FILE BEING TRANSFERRED: TRY LATER ................................
DUMP FILED IN CHGTRSS: TO PRINT DUMP, TRANSFER IT TO HOST ..............
DUMP FILED IN CHHDMP: TO PRINT DUMP, TRANSFER IT TO HOST ..............
DUMP FILED: TO TRANSFER TO HOST, SWAP IT TO CNTRL DISKETTE .............
DUMP IN PROGRESS .......................................................
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON CA x ................................................
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON DISK ...............................................
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON Lxxx ...............................................
.... : DUMP MAY BE INCOMPLETE .............................................
EC INSTALLATION FROM xxxxx DISKETTE IN PROGRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ENABLE COMMAND FAILED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED .................
ENABLE NOT ALLOWED: STOP THE CCU ......................................
ENABLED PORTS CA xx L xxxxxxxx ............................................
ENTER ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63 .....................
ENTER A DISPLAYED LINE PROTOCOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ENTER A DISPLAYED LINE SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ENTER A LINE ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 to 27 AND 32 TO 63 ...............
ENTER A LINE ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63 ...............
ENTER PATCH IDENTIFICATION .............................................
ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY ..........................................
ERROR IN FRONT END SCANNER PROCESSOR .................................
ERROR IN SCANNER DURING COMMAND PROCESSING .........................
ERROR IN SCANNER: ICC/LIC FAILED OR IS NOT PRESENT ......................
ERROR ON TRACK O. CHANGE DISK ..........................................
EXEC CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST ....................................
EXEC CANCELED: OUTPUT X'71' REGISTER NOT ACCESSIBLE ....................
'EXPECTED DATA' CANNOT BE ENTERED AFTER 'Y' ............................
'EXPECTED INTERRUPT NOT RECEIVED: FUNCTION CANCELED ..................
FILE CHGxxxxx NOT FOUND ON xxxxxx: FUNCTION CANCELED, PRESS SEND ........
FILE CHGxxxxx SMALLER ON DISKETTE: FUNCTION CANCELED, PRESS SEND ......
FILE EMPTY: MOSS DUMP SWAP CANCELED ...................................
FILE EMPTY: SCANNER DUMP SWAP CANCELED ...............................
FIRST STOP THE CCU .......................................................
FORMAT AS BAD TRACK: CHANGE DISK ......................................
FORMAT CHECK ..........................................................
FORMAT COMMAND FAILED. CHANGE DISK ..................................
FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED WHEN MOSS IS ONLINE ....................
FUNCTION COMPLETED ....................................................
FUNCTION IN PROGRESS ...................................................
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: CHECK CCU STATE ................................
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: CHECK CDF STATE ................................
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED IN DISKETTE MODE ................................
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: LIC NOT INSTALLED ...............................
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: LIC NOT INSTALLED AND NO ICC PRESENT ...........
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: NO ICC PRESENT ..................................
24-50
24-25
SP
SP
24-63
24-26
24-71
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
25-11
25-11
25-11
SP
24-27
24-53
24-18
25-11
24-45
24-35
24-35
24-49
24-36
24-40
24-36
24-36
24-14
24-37
SP
24-21
24-21
24-63
SP
24-27
24-27
SP
SP
24-30
SP
24-76
SP
24-40
24-14
24-14
24-37
24-37
24-40
24-49
24-49
24-49
Chapter 24. Messages
24-5
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE DURING IPL .....................................
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE IN DISKETTE MODE ...............................
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE: TRY LATER .....................................
FUNCTION TERMINATION NOT ALLOWED: COMPLETE-FUNCTION ............. . ..
HARDWARE ERROR ON RECEIVE ............................................
HARDWARE ERROR ON TRANSMIT ..........................................
IML FOR SCANNER xx COMPLETED: SCANNER CAN BE CONNECTED ..............
IML FOR SCANNER xx COMPLETED: SCANNER IS CONNECTED ...................
IML FOR SCANNER xx IN PROGRESS ..........................................
INCOMPATIBLE OPTIONS: FULL DUPLEX AND NO DX FACILITY ..................
INCOMPATIBLE OPTIONS: NON-SWITCHED LINE AND ANSWER TONE .............
INCOMPATIBLE OPTIONS: NON-SWITCHED LINE AND RING INDICATOR ...........
INCOMPATIBLE OPTIONS: SWITCHED LINE AND DIRECT-ATTACH ................
INCORRECT MCF FILE: CONTACT SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
INCORRECT PASSWORD ....................................................
INCORRECT PASSWORD - PLEASE RE-ENTER ..................................
INCORRECT PASSWORD - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED ..........................
INPUT CHECKSUM DOES NOT MATCH COMPUTED ONE .........................
INPUT MUST BE PAIRS OF HEX CHARACTERS SEPARATED BY BLANKS ............
INPUT MUST BE 8 BINARY DIGITS ........................................... ,
INSERT .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
INVALID ACTION ..........................................................
INVALID ADDRESS FIELD RECEIVED .........................................
INVALID ADDRESS - RANGE IS 0 TO FFF (HEX) .................................
INVALID ALTER REQUEST ON READ-ONLY STORAGE.... ... .. . . ... . ..... .......
INVALID BER RECORD n ....................................................
INVALID CHANNEL ADAPTER NUMBER ......................................
INVALID CONTROL FIELD RECEIVED .........................................
INVALID DATA RECEIVED ..................................................
INVALID DATA RECEIVED - TOO MUCH DATA RECEIVED .......................
INVALID DATE ............................................................
INVALID FILE NAME .......................................................
INVALID FLAG VALUE .....................................................
INVALID INPUT ...........................................................
INVALID INPUT ...........................................................
INVALID INPUT: RE-ENTER FIELDS IN ERROR .................................
INVALID INTERRUPT RECEIVED FROM TRA: FUNCTION CANCELED ..............
INVALID LCD: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ..................................
INVALID LINE ADDRESS ....................................................
INVALID MODULE NAME ...................................................
INVALID NUMBER OF HALFWORDS: RANGE IS 1-48 .............................
INVALID PANEL FUNCTION: RE-ENTER .......................................
INVALID SEL# .............................................................
INVALID TTA DATA ........................................................
IOC ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY ......................................
IOC RESET ................................................................
IOC/SCANNER ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ...........................
IOC/TRA ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ................................
IOC/TRA ERROR: xxx .......................................................
IPL CANCELED ............................................................
IPL CHECK xxx ............................................................
IPL CHECK FIB CLDP ABEND xxxx ............................................
IPL COMPLETE ............................................................
IPL COMPLETE + ERRORS ..................................................
IPL PORT TABLE UPDATED AND FILED .......................................
24-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
24-72
24-72
24-15
24-40
24-53
24-54
SP
24-32
24-32
24-34
24-34
24-35
24-35
24-40
24-44
24-42
24-42
24-40
24-63
24-64
24-76
24-19
24-54
SP
SP
SP
24-19
24-54
24-55
24-55
SP
SP
SP
24-15
24-72
SP
SP
24-64
24-15
SP
SP
24-43
24-31
SP
24-15
24-72
24-16
24-61
SP
25-12
25-12
25-12
25-12
25-12
24-35
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
IPL STOP .................................................................
b IS RESET ................................................................
KEY LOCKED < WAIT> .....................................................
LASTMCHK: xxxx ...........................................................
LEVEL INCOMPATIBLE WITH SPECIFIED LINE ADDRESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
LIC NOT INSTALLED .......................................................
LINE ADDRESS DOES NOT BELONG TO AN INSTALLED SCANNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
LINE ADDRESS HAS ALREADY BEEN USED FOR ANOTHER LINK .................
LINE ADDRESS xxx IS zz IN SELECTED SCANNER xx .............................
LINE CHECK 1 .............................................................
LINE CHECK 2 .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
LINE NOT DISABLED/DEACTIVATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ...............
LINE NOT SYSTEM GENERATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ..................
LINE NOT YET INITIALIZED .................................................
LINE SPEED MAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE .....................................
LINE SPEED MAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE: LEAD STATE NOT ACCESSIBLE ..........
LINE TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED .............
LINE TEST ACTIVE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ..............................
LINE TRACE ACTIVE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ............................
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED ............................
LINK IPL DETECTED ON Lxxx ...............................................
LINK NOT DEFINED IN IPL PORT TABLE ......................................
LINK TEST PROGRAM ABEND ...............................................
LINK TEST PROGRAM LOADED ...............................................
LINK TEST PROGRAM NOT LOADED - FUNCTION CANCELED ....................
LOAD IN PROGRESS ON CA x ................................................
LOAD IN PROGRESS FROM DISK .............................................
LOAD IN PROGRESS ON Lxxx ................................................
LOCAL CONSOLE CALLING .................................................
LOOK AT MSA FOR ADDRESS COMPARE STATUS ...............................
LSSD NOT ON DISKETTE: CDF CREATION CANCELED ...........................
LSSD NOT ON DISKETTE: CDF VERIFICATION CANCELED .......................
LVL3 INTERRUPT SENT TO CCU .............................................
MCF FILE IS EMPTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
MICROCODE DETECTED ERROR DURING COMMAND PROCESSING ...............
MIXED COMMANDS ARE NOT ALLOWED ......................................
.... : MODE NOW UNKNOWN .................................................
MORE THAN 128 BYTES RECEIVED ...........................................
MOSS DOWN BECAUSE YOU SELECTED TERMINATE ............................
MOSS DUMP COPIED INTO CCU STORAGE .....................................
MOSS DUMP COPIED ON DISKETTE ..........................................
MOSS IS NOT ALONE .......................................................
MOSS NOT ONLINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ..............................
MOSS/PANEL ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ............................
MOSS/TIC ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED .....................................
MOUNTED DISKETTE EC LEVEL IS DIFFERENT FROM ORIGINAL ONE .............
MOUNTED DISKETTE IS NOT A PRIMARY .....................................
MOUNTED DISKETTE IS NOT A SECONDARY ..................................
MOUNTED DISKETTE TYPE IS DIFFERENT FROM ORIGINAL ONE .................
MOUNT xxxxxxxxx DISKETTE, PRESS SEND WHEN READY ........................
NEW SPEED USING RPQ WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT IML ......................
NEW SPEED xxxxxx WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT IML ...........................
NM NOT ALLOWED WHEN A CCU FUNCTION IS ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
NO ACKNOWLEDGE FROM TRA: MODE NOW UNKNOWN ........................
NO ANSWER FROM CCU CONTROL PROGRAM: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ......
NO ANSWER FROM CONTROL PROGRAM: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED ...........
25-14
24-45
24-77
PD
24-64
24-64
24-16
24-35
SP
24-76
24-76
24-64
24-64
24-37
24-38
24-38
24-64
24-65
24-65
24-55
25-13
24-56
24-56
25-13
24-56
25-13
25-13
25-13
24-42
SP
SP
SP
24-72
24-40
24-38
24-40
SP
24-56
24-27
SP
SP
SP
24-65
24-44
SP
SP
24-27
24-27
SP
SP
24-49
24-49
24-72
SP
24-65
24-16
Chapter 24. Messages
24-7
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
NO ANSWER FROM CONTROL PROGRAM: MODE NOW UNKNOWN ................
NO ANSWER FROM LINK TEST PROGRAM - FUNCTION CANCELED ...............
NO ANSWER TO ERROR STATUS REQUEST DURING ERROR RECOVERY ...........
NO 'APPLIED' PATCHES IN FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
NO CHANNEL ADAPTER SELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO CONTROL PROGRAM BUFFER: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO DEFECTIVE TRACK: ALTERNATE TRACK ASSIGNMENT MAP EMPTY ...........
NO FILE TO SWAP - SWAP IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO FUNCTION VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO NEW MCF IN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO 'NON-APPLIED' PATCHES IN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO OLD MCF IN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PROCEDURE TO CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SCANNER ANSWER: CHECK CCU STATE AND IF NEEDED RE-IML CS ...........
NO SCANNER SELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SELECTION MADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SUPPORT FOR AUTOCALL LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ................
NO SUPPORT FOR OEM LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SWAP CHANGES: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED BY CTL PGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SWAP CHANGES: MOSS IS NOT ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SWAP FILED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO TRA'S INSTALLED: FUNCTION CANCELED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-CCU FUNCTION STILL PENDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NON-OPERATIONAL EP DUALCOM LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED. . . . . . . . . . ..
.... : NOT CONNECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN ZAP AREA FOR ALL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN ZAP AREA TO COpy ALL SELECTED ZAPS ................
NOTHING TO TERMINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTRI/MOSS ERR: FUNCTION CANCELED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTRI/MOSS ERR: PRESS SEND TO CONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTRI OFFLINE: FUNCTION IGNORED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLY ONE SCAN OR MODIFY ON SAME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PANEL FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE PERFORMED: SET PANEL
PASSWORD HAS BEEN UPDATED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
PASSWORD MUST BE AT LEAST FIVE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS LONG
WITHOUT BLANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATCH ALREADY EXISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATCH AREA IS NOW FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATCH ERASED BECAUSE IT CONTAINS NO MORE RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATCH FILED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATCH FILED, CHECKSUM IS XXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PATTERN MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 4 PAIRS OF HEX CHARACTERS ..............
PRESS BREAK (ATTN) TO CANCEL ADDRESS COMPARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS BREAK (ATTN) TO STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY DISKETTE IS NOT THE ONE ALREADY CHECKED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE IN STORAGE CANNOT BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE NAME ALREADY USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE NAME CANNOT START WITH CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE NOT FOUND IN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE x CATALOGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE x CREATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE x ERASED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE x EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE x MODIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SP
24-57
24-38
24-40
24-19
24-16
SP
SP
24-24
24-40
24-40
24-40
24-21
24-39
SP
SP
24-65
24-65
24-46
24-46
24-46
SP
24-73
24-66
SP
SP
SP
24-73
24-61
SP
SP
24-40
24-44
24-44
24-45
24-40
24-40
24-41
24-41
24-41
24-66
SP
24-30
24-27
24-28
24-21
24-22
24-22
24-22
24-22
24-22
24-22
24-22
24-23
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
PURGE COMPLETED .......................................................
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED APPLY ..........................................
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED RESTORE .......................................
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED UPGRADE .......................................
REFRESH MODE: PRESS BREAK (ATTN) TO STOP ...............................
REFUSED: CCU SIZE MUST BE 512, 768, OR 1024 .................................
REFUSED: DIRECTORY IS FULL ..............................................
REFUSED: FILE SPACE EXCEEDED ...........................................
REFUSED: INCOMPATIBLE LIC TYPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
REFUSED: a IS ALREADY SWAPPED WITH b ....................................
REFUSED: bbb IS UNKNOWN TO CONTROLLER .................................
REFUSED: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PATCHES REACHED .........................
REFUSED: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ZAPS REACHED ............................
REFUSED: MAX NUMBER OF MESSAGES REACHED .............................
REFUSED: MAX NUMBER OF STEPS REACHED .................................
REFUSED: MEANINGLESS VALUES ...........................................
REFUSED: NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN PATCH AREA ...............................
REFUSED: PATCHES ARE ALREADY ON DISK(ETTE) ............................
REFUSED: THE FILE IS FULL, RESET A SWAP ..................................
REFUSED: ZAP AREA IS FULL ...............................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED ...........................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: a IS A SPARE .........................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS EP LINE ........................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS NON-IBM .......................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: b IS NOT A SPARE .....................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS NOT INACTIVE ..................................
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: RESOURCE NOT AVAILABLE ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: UNDEFINED ERROR ..................................
RELEASED SCANNER IS IN RESET OR INOPERATIVE MODE ......................
REMOTE CONSOLE CALLING ................................................
REMOTE CUSTOMER PASSWORD AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD MUST BE
DIFFERENT ..............................................................
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN DEACTIVATED ..................
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN PERMANENTLY ACTIVATED ......
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN TEMPORARILY ACTIVATED .......
REQUEST IGNORED ........................................................
REQUEST IGNORED: CCU NOT INITIALIZED ...................................
REQUEST REJECTED: DISK UPDATING NOT ALLOWED ..........................
REQUEST REJECTED: DUMP FILE DOES NOT EXIST .............................
REQUEST REJECTED: NO ACTIVE LOAD MODULE ON DISK ......................
REQUESTED LINE ADDRESS IS INVALID FOR A TOKEN RING ....................
RESET CCU CHECK IGNORED ...............................................
RESET CCU FAILED ........................................................
RESET CCU COMPLETED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RESET CCU NOT ALLOWED .................................................
RESTORE DISK FROM XXXXX DISKETTE IN PROGRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RESTORE NOT AUTHORIZED FROM THIS DISKETTE: PRESS SEND .................
RESUME IGNORED ........................................................
RESULTS UNPREDICTABLE - PF4 AGAIN TO CONFIRM ELSE SEND ................
RPO DETECTED ON Lxxx ...................................................
SAVE COMPLETED .........................................................
SCANNER xx AUTOMATIC DUMP IN PROGRESS ................................
SCANNER xx SELECTED: LOOK AT MSA FOR SCANNER MODE ....................
SCANNER AC HIT BUT REQUESTED ACTION NOT PERFORMED ...................
SCANNER CANNOT BE IMLED: MOSS IS NOT ONLINE ...........................
SCANNER CONNECTED TO CCU CONTROL PROGRAM ...........................
SP
24-41
24-41
24-41
SP
SP
24-23
24-23
24-46
24-46
24-46
24-41
SP
24-23
24-23
24-47
24-41
24-41
24-47
SP
24-47
24-47
24-47
24-47
24-47
24-47
24-48
24-48
SP
24-43
Chapter 24. Messages
24-9
24-45
24-45
24-45
24-45
24-16
24-67
24-29
24-29
24-29
24-62
24-73
24-73
24-73
24-73
24-28
24-28
24-68
SP
25-14
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-33
SP
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
SCANNER CONNECTION REJECTED BY CCU CONTROL PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER CYCLE STEAL TO/FROM CCU FAILED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER DUMP COPIED INTO CCU STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER DUMP COPIED ON DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER DUMP STARTED. ... . ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ............
SCANNER ERROR ON RECEIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER ERROR ON TRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER HARD STOP DURING COMMAND PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER IN DISCONNECTED/GO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER IN DISCONNECTED/STOP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER IN RESET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER NOT INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER NOT OPERATIONAL - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED ...............
SCANNER x OVERLOADED (LINES x - y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER PROCESSING RESUMED BUT SCANNER MODE IS UNKNOWN ............
SCANNER PROCESSING RESUMED THEN STOPPED ON AC HIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER RELEASED BUT CURRENT MODE KEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER SELECTED BUT NO STATUS RECEIVED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
SCANNER SELECTED BUT STATUS UNKNOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCANNER(S) NOT IMLED: xxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCROLL IGNORED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECONDARY DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECONDARY DISKETTE IS NOT THE ONE ALREADY CHECKED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEL# RANGE LIMITED TO n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT A SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT A TRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTED PATCH COPIED ON DISK(ETTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTED PATCHES, IF ANY, ARE COPIED ON DISK(ETTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTED PROCEDURE IS FROM STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTED TIC NOT AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET MODE COMMAND FAILED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED ...............
SOURCE DISK(ETTE) ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED ...............
SPECIFY A DELAYED ALTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFY A DELAYED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START CCU FAILED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START CCU IGNORED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START CCU COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START CCU NOT ALLOWED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 1 OF MOSS DUMP SWAP STARTED: DISKETTE TO CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 1 OF SCANNER DUMP SWAP STARTED: DISKETTE TO CCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 2 OF MOSS DUMP SWAP STARTED: CCU TO DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 2 OF SCANNER DUMP SWAP STARTED: CCU TO DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 255 MUST BE THE END STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP CCU COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP CCU FAILED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP CCU IGNORED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP CCU IGNORED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP CCU NOT ALLOWED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP THE CCU THEN PRESS PF4 TO DISPLAY CA REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STORE EXCEEDED (MAX 80 SECT.): USE 2 RUNS TO COPY FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWAP COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWAP IS NOT ALLOWED, MOSS IS NOT OFFLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWAP IS STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
24-33
24-39
SP
SP
SP
24-57
24-58
24-39
SP
SP
SP
24-16
24-58
24-36
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
25-14
SP
24-28
24-28
24-32
SP
SP
SP
24-41
24-41
24-23
24-62
24-77
24-58
24-41
SP
SP
24-73
24-74
24-74
24-74
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-24
24-74
24-74
24-75
24-68
24-75
24-19
SP
SP
SP
SP
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
a SWAPPED TO b ...........................................................
SYSTEM COMMAND ........................................................
TERMINAL DISCONNECTED .................................................
TERMINAL DISCONNECTED FOR REMOTE CONSOLE ............................
THE HISTORY TABLE IS EMPTY ..............................................
THE NAME OF THE PROCEDURE TO BE CATALOGED IS: xxxx .....................
THIS BER IS NO LONGER IN THE BER FILE ....................................
TIC DUMP ALREADY EXISTS: AUTODUMP CANCELED ..........................
.... : TIC MODE NOT REPORTED ...............................................
TIMEOUT OCCURRED - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED ............................
TIMEOUT ON RECEIVE .....................................................
TIMEOUT ON TRANSMIT ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
TO ALTER DATA, SPECIFY AN IMMEDIATE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
TO CLEAR DUMP FILE ENTER C, OTHERWISE PRESS SEND .......................
TO DELAY ALTER, ENTER NEW DATA, CHANGE I TO D, PRESS SEND ..............
TOO MANY SELECTED ZAPS (WOULD EXCEED ZAP AREA CAPACITY) .............
TOO MUCH DATA RECEIVED ................................................
TRA ALREADY CONNECTED: FUNCTION IGNORED .............................
TRA ALREADY DISCONNECTED: FUNCTION IGNORED ..........................
TRA CANNOT BE CONNECTED: MOSS IS NOT ONLINE ...........................
TRA CONNECTED ..........................................................
TRA CONNECTION REJECTED BY CONTROL PROGRAM .........................
TRA DISCONNECTED .......................................................
TRA DISCONNECTED BUT NO CP ACKNOWLEDGE ..............................
TRA DISCONNECTED BUT SOME TIC'S COULD NOT RESET .......................
TRA DISCONNECTED WITH UNEXPECTED STATUS .............................
TRA NOT DISCONNECTED: FUNCTION IGNORED ...............................
.... : TRA INTERRUPTS NOT ENABLED .........................................
TRA SELECTED IS NOT INSTALLED: REQUEST REJECTED ........................
.... : TRA SELECTED WITH UNKNOWN MODE ...................................
TRA XX SELECTED: LOOK IN MSA FOR MODE .................................
TRANSMISSION ERROR ON RECEIVE .........................................
TRANSMISSION ERROR ON TRANSMIT ........................................
TRANSMISSION ERROR, PLEASE RE-ENTER. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
UNABLE TO LOAD MODULE: FUNCTION CANCELLED ...........................
UNABLE TO SET LINE TO WRAP MODE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED .............
UNABLE TO SET TIC STORAGE BOUNDARY ....................................
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED .........................
UNDEFINED PF KEY .......................................................
UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT RECEIVED: KEYBOARD INPUT IGNORED ..............
UNEXPECTED SCANNER INTERRUPT: PRESS SEND TO RETRY ....................
xx UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR LOCAL LOGGING ...........................
xx UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR REMOTE LOGGING .........................
UPDATE HIGHLIGHTED FIELDS, PRESS SEND ..................................
UPSHIFT .................................................................
VERIFICATION NOT ALLOWED: MOSS MUST BE IN ALONE STATUS .......... . . . . ..
'VERIFY DATA' AND 'REPLACE DATA' HAVE DIFFERENT LENGTHS .... " ... . .. ...
'VERIFY DATA' DOES NOT MATCH MODULE DATA .............................
WARNING: AT LEAST ONE TARGET VALUE> END STEP NUMBER ................
WARNING: INCOMPATIBLE LINE PROTOCOLS, PRESS SEND TO BYPASS ............
WARNING: THIS FUNCTION DESTROYS THE CCU CONTROL PROGRAM ...........
WRAP CONTROL LEAD AT LIC LEVEL NOT ALLOWED ...........................
WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST .........................
WRAP TEST COMPLETED ...................................................
WRAP TEST STOPPED ON OPERATOR REQUEST ................................
WRITE ERROR ON SECTOR 1 OR 2. CHANGE DISK ..............................
Chapter 24. Messages
24-48
24-77
24-42
24-43
24-41
24-24
SP
SP
SP
24-75
24-59
24-59
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-59
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
24-62
SP
SP
24-60
24-60
24-75
24-16
24-66
SP
24-43
24-17
SP
SP
24-43
24-43
SP
24-77
SP
SP
SP
24-24
24-48
SP
24-66
24-66
24-66
24-67
SP
24-11
Alphabetic List of All 3720 Messages (continued)
WRONG DISKETTE MOUNTED, MOUNT ORIGINAL DISKETTE ....................
WRONG PLACE ............................................................
YOU MUST PERFORM MOSS IML FROM THE CONTROL PANEL ...................
24-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SP
24-76
24-28
Function Messages
Common Messages
The following messages are common to several 3720 functions.
BT BUFFER INCORRECTLY DEFINED
Cause: The branch trace register address and/or length are destroyed.
Action: Restore branch trace register address and/or length. (See Chapter 19).
If the message appears another time, contact the appropriate service
representative.
CABLE NOT INSTALLED
Cause: The line that you specified is considered as not installed because there is
no cable between the LIC and the modem.
Action: Enter the address of an installed line.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT ACCESSmLE
Cause: The length and address of the branch trace buffer are not available
because of a hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT UPDATED
Cause: The branch trace parameters cannot be saved in the buffer header
because of a hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: The function that you selected cannot be performed because of a
hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action:
1.
Terminate the function, using function Terminate, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-13
CONTROLLER DATA UNAVAILABLE: FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A physical error occurred when accessing the diskette. The function is
canceled.
Action: Select the function another time. If the problem persists, contact the
appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE
Cause: The function that you selected is not available because of a hardware
error on the diskette.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action:
1.
Terminate the function, using terminate function, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
ERROR IN SCANNER DURING COMMAND PROCESSING
Cause: A scanner hardware error is detected. The function cannot be
performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action:
1.
Terminate the function, using terminate function, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
FUNCTION COMPLETED
Cause: The function that you selected has been performed.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Select another function from the same secondary menu, or
•
Terminate the function using terminate function.
FUNCTION IN PROGRESS
Cause: The function that you selected is being performed.
Action: None.
24-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE: TRY LATER
Cause: The function that you selected is not available because the procedure file
is being transferred to the host.
Action: Wait and try later.
INVALID INPUT
Cause: You did one of the following:
•
You pressed SEND before entering the requested input on a screen,
•
You entered one or more invalid characters,
•
You entered an invalid value, for example, an address outside the specified
range, or
•
You made a formatting error.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Correct the erroneous input, or
•
Press one of the PF keys displayed on the screen, if any.
INVALID LINE ADDRESS
Cause: The line address that you entered is not within the range.
Action: Check the line address and re-enter.
IOC ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY
Cause: The scanner is not able to process the MOSS command. An IOC error
was detected during the error recovery.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action:
1.
ReIML the appropriate scanner (Chapter 3).
2.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-15
IOC/SCANNER ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: A hardware error is detected either in the scanner or in the IOC bus.
The MOSS command cannot be performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action:
1. Terminate the function, using terminate function, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
LINE ADDRESS DOES NOT BELONG TO AN INSTALLED SCANNER
Cause: The scanner referred to by the line address that you entered is not
installed.
Action: Check the line address (Chapter 23) and re-enter.
NO ANSWER FROM CONTROL PROGRAM: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: There was no answer from the control program, when selecting function
MOSS Online or MOSS Offline.
Action: Check if the control program is running.
NO CONTROL PROGRAM BUFFER: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: No control program buffer is available at this time to execute your
request.
Action: Try later.
REQUEST IGNORED
Cause: Your request cannot be accepted in the present environment.
Action: Check the section in this manual that describes the function you are
using.
SCANNER NOT INSTALLED
Cause: The line address that you specified corresponds to a scanner that is not
installed.
Action: Check the line address (Chapter 23) and re-enter.
UNABLE TO LOAD MODULE: FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A software module is missing or damaged are destroyed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative
24-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
UNDEFINED PF KEY
Cause: You pressed a PF key that is not displayed on the screen.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Press one of the PF keys displayed on the screen, if any, or
•
Enter requested input.
Channel Adapter State and Register Display Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: AUTO SELECT NOT DISABLED
Cause: The auto-selection mechanism cannot be disabled because of a hardware
error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: AUTO SELECT NOT ENABLED
Cause: The auto-selection mechanism cannot be enabled as requested because of
a hardware error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA CANNOT BE SELECTED
Cause: The requested channel adapter cannot be selected because of a hardware
error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA REGISTER X'E' NOT ACCESSIBLE
Cause: The channel adapter register that you selected cannot be read because of
a hardware error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-17
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA REGISTERS NOT ACCEssmLE
Cause: The channel adapter registers cannot be read because of a hardware
error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: CA STATE NOT ACCEssmLE
Cause: The channel adapter state registers cannot be read because of a
hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: INITIAL CA CANNOT BE RESELECTED
Cause: The initial channel adapter cannot be reselected because of a hardware
error on the CCU-to-MOSS boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
CHANNEL ADAPTER NOT INSTALLED
Cause: You entered a valid channel adapter number, but it is not among the
installed channel adapter numbers.
Action: Enter the number of channel adapter that has been installed.
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
ENABLE NOT ALLOWED: STOP THE CCU
Cause: You cannot enable the channel adapter auto-selection mechanism if the
CCU is not stopped.
Action: Do the following if the CCU is not stopped:
000 ( I
1.
2.
24-18
(PF4 )
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SEND
To stop the CCU.
To continue.
INVALID ACTION
Cause: You were requested to press either PF4 (to enable the auto-selection
mechanism and to display the Display Channel Adapter State screen) or PF6 (to
leave the auto-selection mechanism in disabled status and to display the Display
Channel Adapter State screen) but you pressed some other key.
Action: Press either PF4 or PF6.
INVALID CHANNEL ADAPTER NUMBER
Cause: You entered an invalid channel adapter number.
Action: Enter a valid channel number.
NO CHANNEL ADAPTER SELECTED
Cause: A channel adapter was not automatically selected, nor did you enter a
channel adapter number.
Action: Enter a channel adapter number.
STOP THE CCU THEN PRESS PF4 TO DISPLAY CA REGISTERS
Cause: To display the channel adapter registers, the CCU must be stopped.
Action:
1.
000
( I SEND
To stop the CCU.
To continue.
2·8
Control Program Procedure Messages
CANCELED: TARGET VALUE> END STEP NUMBER
Cause: While executing the procedure, a Goto, Halt, or Wait target value
greater than the step number of the End instruction was encountered.
Action: Correct the target value and execute the procedure another time
(Chapter 22).
CCU/MOSS ERROR: STEP NOT EXECUTED
Cause: A SETI or OSET instruction was not executed because of a hardware
error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-19
DISK ERROR: DIRECTORY MAY BE DAMAGED
Cause: The directory may be damaged because of a disk hardware error that
occurred when writing the directory. Control program procedures may be lost.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: DIRECTORY NOT ACCESSmLE
Cause: The directory is not available because of a hardware error on the disk.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE CANNOT BE FILED/MODIFIED
Cause: The procedure cannot be cataloged or modified because of a disk
hardware error that occurred when writing the procedure.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE FILE MAY BE DAMAGED
Cause: The procedure file may be damaged because of a disk hardware error
that occurred when erasing a procedure.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
24-20
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DISK ERROR: PROCEDURE NOT AVAILABLE
Cause: The procedure that you selected is not available because of a hardware
error on the disk.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
EXEC CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST
Cause: You canceled the procedure by pressing PF5 while the procedure was
being executed.
Action: None.
EXEC CANCELED: OUTPUT X'71' REGISTER NOT ACCESSmLE .
Cause: The execution of the selected procedure is canceled because of a
hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary when reading the output X/71'
register.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE: TRY LATER (See "Common Messages")
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
NO PROCEDURE TO CATALOG
Cause: You selected Catalog but there is no procedure to catalog.
Action: None.
PROCEDURE IN STORAGE CANNOT BE EXECUTED
Cause: The selected procedure cannot be executed because it is not completely
created or modified.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Once you have entered all the steps, enter End, which must be the last
instruction, or
•
Once you have entered all the modifications, press PF6:END MODIFY.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-21
PROCEDURE NAME ALREADY USED
Cause: The name of the procedure that you want to create is already used.
Action: Enter a procedure name that is not in the directory.
PROCEDURE NAME CANNOT START WITH CP
Cause: You cannot create, modify, erase, or catalog a procedure whose name
starts with CPo
Action: If you want to modify such a procedure, you must copy it under
another name and modify the copied procedure (Chapter 22).
PROCEDURE NOT FOUND IN FILE
Cause: You selected a procedure that does not exist in the procedure file.
Action: Enter the name of an existing procedure.
PROCEDURE x CATALOGED
Cause: Procedure x is successfully cataloged. The procedure directory is
automatically updated.
Action: None.
PROCEDURE x CREATED
Cause: Procedure"'{ is created.
Action: You should catalog the procedure. However, before cataloging it, you
may execute and/or modify it, if necessary.
The procedure just created will be lost unless you catalog it before you create,
erase, modify, execute, or display another procedure.
PROCEDURE x ERASED
Cause: Procedure x is erased. The procedure directory is automatically updated.
Action: None.
PROCEDURE x EXECUTED
Cause: Procedure x is executed.
Action: None.
24-22
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PROCEDURE x MODIFIED
Cause: Procedure x is modified.
Action: You should catalog the procedure. However, before cataloging it, you
may execute and/or modify it, if necessary.
REFUSED: DIRECTORY IS FULL
Cause: You cannot catalog a procedure because the maximum number of
cataloged procedures (47) is already reached in the directory.
Action: If you want to catalog a procedure, you must erase a procedure that is
already cataloged (Chapter 22).
REFUSED: FILE SPACE EXCEEDED
Cause: You cannot catalog a procedure because there is not enough space in the
procedure file.
Action: If you want to catalog a procedure, you must erase a procedure that is
already cataloged to free some space in the procedure file (Chapter 22).
REFUSED: MAX NUMBER OF MESSAGES REACHED
Cause: You cannot enter another message (Disp) in the procedure because the
maximum number of messages (50) is already reached.
Action: None.
REFUSED: MAX NUMBER OF STEPS REACHED
Cause: You cannot insert another step in the procedure because the maximum
number of steps (255) is already reached.
Action: None.
REQUEST IGNORED (See "Common Messages")
SELECTED PROCEDURE IS FROM STORAGE
Cause: The procedure that you have selected is already in storage because you
have just created, displayed, or modified it. The procedure in storage and that
in the procedure file may be at different levels.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Press PF4, to use the procedure that is in the file, or
•
Press PF6, to use the procedure that is in storage.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-23
STEP 255 MUST BE THE END STATEMENT
Cause: The next step is the last one (255).
Action: You must enter the End instruction.
THE NAME OF THE PROCEDURE TO BE CATALOGED IS: xxxx
Cause: The name of the procedure to be cataloged does not match the name of
the procedure that is in 3720 storage Gust created or modified).
Action: Enter the name indicated in the message.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
WARNING: AT LEAST ONE TARGET VALUE> END STEP NUMBER
Cause: While creating or modifying the procedure, you entered a Goto, Halt, or
Wait target value that is greater than the step number of the End instruction.
Action: Correct the target value before cataloging or executing the procedure.
Data Exchange Messages
CCU/MOSS
ER~OR:
FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: INPUT X'71', X'72' REG NOT ACCESSmLE
Cause: The registers cannot be accessed because of a hardware error on the
MOSS-to-CCU boundary_
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
NO FUNCTION VALUE
Cause: You did not enter a function value in parameter FUNCTION = = >.
Action: Enter a function value in FUNCTION = = > .
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
24-24
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Disk Function Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: DISK FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED: PRESS SEND
Cause: The disk function cannot be performed because of a hardware error on
the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK DIRECTORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED: MOSS DOWN
Cause: Too many customer files. The capacity of the disk directory is exceeded.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED. PRESS SEND
Cause: A physical error occurred when accessing the diskette. The disk
function is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Select the disk function again. If the problem persists, contact the
appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: MOSS DOWN
Cause: MOSS is down because a hardware error occurred when writing on the
disk.
MOSS is no longer available.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: SAVE CANCELED
Cause: While saving the disk onto the secondary diskette a disk error is
detected.
Action: Start another save from the beginning: primary and secondary diskettes.
If the problem persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-25
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED: PRESS SEND
Cause: A physical error occurred when accessing the diskette. The disk
function is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Select the disk function another time. If the problem persists, contact
the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: MOSS DOWN
Cause: MOSS is down because a hardware error occurred when writing on the
disk.
MOSS is no longer available.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: MOUNT A NEW ONE, THEN PRESS SEND
Cause: An error has been detected on the diskette that you mounted.
Action: Mount another one.
DISKETTE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE PERFORMED WHEN MOSS IS ONLINE:
PRESS SEND
Cause: Disk function cannot be performed when MOSS is connected to the
CCU control program.
Action: Set MOSS offline, as follows:
DISKETTE NOT READY
Cause:
•
The diskette is not mounted.
•
The diskette engaging lever is not set correctly.
Action: Mount the diskette or set correctly the diskette engaging level.
DISK UNUSABLE: EC NOT INITIALIZED
Cause: The disk is damaged.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
24-26
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
EC INSTALLATION FROM xxxxx DISKETTE IN PROGRESS
Cause: The BC primary or secondary diskette is being copied onto the disk.
Action: None.
FILE CHGxxxxx NOT FOUND ON xxxxxx: FUNCTION CANCELED, PRESS SEND
Cause: File CHGxxxxx cannot be found on the new BC diskette or is no longer
on the disk.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
FILE CHGxxxxx SMALLER ON DISKETTE: FUNCTION CANCELED, PRESS
SEND
Cause: The space allocated for the file CHGxxxxx on the new BC diskette is
too small.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
MOSS DOWN BECAUSE YOU SELECTED TERMINATE
Cause: You selected terminate function while the disk was being written.
MOSS is no longer available.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
MOUNTED DISKETTE IS NOT A PRIMARY
Cause: You have been requested to mount a primary diskette and you mounted
either a secondary diskette or a 3721 diskette.
Action: Mount the correct primary diskette.
MOUNTED DISKETTE IS NOT A SECONDARY
Cause: You have been requested to mount a secondary diskette and you
mounted either a primary diskette or a 3721 diskette.
Action: Mount the correct primary diskette.
PRIMARY DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS
Cause: The primary diskette is being checked.
Action: None.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-27
PRIMARY DISKETTE IS NOT THE ONE ALREADY CHECKED
Cause: The diskette that you mounted is not the primary diskette that has just
been checked.
Action: Mount the correct primary diskette.
RESTORE DISK FROM xxxxx DISKETTE IN PROGRESS
Cause: The disk is being restored from the primary or secondary diskette.
Action: None.
RESTORE NOT AUTHORIZED FROM THIS DISKETTE: PRESS SEND
Cause : You cannot restore the disk from an BC diskette.
Action:
•
Perform an BC installation.
•
Mount the correct diskette.
•
Terminate the disk functions.
SECONDARY DISKETTE CHECKING IN PROGRESS
Cause: The secondary diskette is being checked.
Action: None.
SECONDARY DISKETTE IS NOT THE ONE ALREADY CHECKED
Cause: The diskette that you mounted is not the secondary diskette that has just
been checked.
Action: Mount the correct secondary diskette.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
YOU MUST PERFORM MOSS IML FROM THE CONTROL PANEL
(self-explanatory)
24-28
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
I Disk IPL Information Messages
REQUEST REJECTED - DISK UPDATING NOT ALLOWED
Cause: MOSS is busy processing host command.
Action: Wait a few seconds and then try again.
REQUEST REJECTED - DUMP FILE DOES NOT EXIST
Cause: Dump was not found on the disk.
Action: None.
REQUEST REJECTED - NO ACTIVE LOAD MODULE ON ON DISK
Cause: Active load module was not found on disk.
Action: None.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-29
DisplayI Alter Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: WORK REGISTERS CANNOT BE ALTERED
Cause: The current CCU interrupt level cannot be accessed because of a
hardware error on the MOSS-to-CCU boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
FIRST STOP THE CCU
Cause: You cannot alter work registers if the CCU is not stopped.
Action: Stop the CCU and restart the Alter function:
1.
2.
3.
4.
(PF2)
Display the CCU Function menu.
0 0 0 I
0 0 (I
SEND
SEND)
To stop the CCU.
To select Display/Alter.
Display appropriate data then press PF4
to switch to alter mode.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
PRESS ATTN TO STOP
Cause: The display function is in refresh mode.
Action: Press BREAK (ATTN) to stop refreshing.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
24-30
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Display Long Messages
BT BUFFER INCORRECTLY DEFINED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT ACCESSIBLE (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Event Log Messages
BER FILE IS UPDATED (Service personnel only)
DISKETTE ERROR: REQUEST IGNORED
Cause: Your request cannot be performed because of a diskette error.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action:
1.
Retry.
2.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
INVALID BER RECORD n (service personnel only)
INVALID FLAG VALUE (service personnel only)
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
INVALID SEL#
Cause:
•
The selection number (SEL#) that you entered is not between 0 and the
maximum number of BERs in the BER file, or
•
When scrolling, you reached the last BER of the selected list.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Enter a correct BER SEL#, or
•
Stop scrolling; the last BER of the list is already displayed.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-31
SEL# RANGE LIMITED TO n
Cause: To display a BER list, a BER index is built. This index has n entries.
Any BER beyond this limit (n) cannot be displayed.
Action: None.
THIS BER IS NO LONGER IN THE BER FILE (service personnel only)
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
IML One Scanner Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE ERROR: IML CANCELED
Cause: The scanner microcode is not accessible because of a hardware error on
the diskette. The IML is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action:
1.
Terminate the function, using terminate function, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
ERROR IN SCANNER DURING COMMAND PROCESSING (See "Common
Messages")
IML FOR SCANNER xx COMPLETED: SCANNER IS CONNECTED
Cause: The scanner is operational and under control of the CCU control
program. MSA field m displays SCANNER xx CONNECTED.
Action: None.
IML FOR SCANNER xx IN PROGRESS
Cause: The IML of scanner xx is being processed normally.
Action: None
24-32
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
INVALID LINE ADDRESS (See "Common Messages")
IOC ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY (See "Common Messages")
IOC/SCANNER ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
LINE ADDRESS DOES NOT BELONG TO AN INSTALLED SCANNER (See
"Common Messages")
SCANNER CANNOT BE CONNECTED: MOSS IS NOT ONLINE
Cause: The scanner cannot be connected because the MOSS is not online.
Action: Set MOSS online and restart the IML as follows:
1.
(PF2)
2.
0 0 0 (I
3.
( PF2 )
4.
(
I
To display the CCU Function menu.
SEN)
)
To set MOSS online.
To switch back to IML functions.
SEN)
)
To restart automatically the
IML of the same scanner.
SCANNER CONNECTION REJECTED BY CCU CONTROL PROGRAM
Cause: The scanner that you IMLed is not recognized by the CCU control
program. The scanner is not operational.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05
Action:
1.
Terminate the function using terminate function.
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
SCANNER NOT INSTALLED (See "Common Messages")
Chapter 24. Messages
24-33
IPL Port Messages
CABLE DOES NOT EXIST
Cause: The communication line whose address was entered is either not
installed or not configured.
Action: Enter a new address if a non-installed address was entered. Contact the
appropriate service representative if an installed address was entered.
CDF NOT CREATED: IPL PORT FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The 3720 configuration file has not been created.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DATA RATE MUST NOT BE SPECIFIED WITH DIRECT-ATTACH
Cause: You selected a data rate (DATA RATE = H or L) for direct-attached
lines.
Action: Delete the data rate option (H or L) by using
~DEL)
CHAR
DISKETTE ERROR: IPL PORT FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The IPL port file cannot be accessed because of a diskette error.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action:
1.
Retry.
2.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
INCOMPATffiLE OPTIONS: FULL DUPLEX AND NO DX FACILITY
Cause: The options that you entered are not compatible. You specified F for
full-duplex and N for DX facility.
Action: Determine correct option and re-enter.
INCOMPATffiLE OPTIONS: NON-SWITCHED LINE AND ANSWER TONE
Cause: The options that you entered are not compatible. You specified N for
switched line and Y for answer tone.
Action: Determine correct option and re-enter.
24-34
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
INCOMPATmLE OPTIONS: NON·SWITCHED LINE AND RING INDICATOR
Cause: The options that you entered are not compatible. You specified N for
switched line and Y for ring indicator.
Action: Determine correct option and re-enter.
INCOMPATmLE OPTIONS: SWITCHED LINE AND DIRECT·ATTACH
Cause: The options that you entered are not compatible. You specified Y for
switched line and D for direct-attach.
Action: Determine correct option and re-enter.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
IPL PORT TABLE UPDATED AND FILED
Cause: The IPL port table that you updated is filed. You update the IPL port
table every time you define a new IPL port, or modify or delete a defined one.
Action: None.
LINE ADDRESS HAS ALREADY BEEN USED FOR ANOTHER LINK
Cause: You have already defined an IPL port for that address.
Action: Enter an address that has not been used. Press PF6 to display the line
addresses that are already used.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Line Description File Messages
CABLE NOT INSTALLED (See "Common Messages")
CONTROLLER DATA UNAVAILABLE, FUNCTION CANCELED (See "Common
Messages ")
ENTER A DISPLAYED LINE PROTOCOL
Cause: You did not enter a protocol from among those displayed on the screen.
Action: Enter a displayed line protocol.
ENTER A DISPLAYED LINE SPEED
Cause: You did not enter a speed from among those displayed on the screen.
Action: Enter a displayed line speed.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-35
ENTER A LINE ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63
Cause: The line address that you entered is not within the range 0 to 27 or 32 to
63.
Action: Check the line address and re-enter.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
SCANNER x OVERLOADED (LINES x -y)
Cause: Allowable scanner load exceeded.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Verify that no mistakes have been made while entering line parameters.
Check only those lines specified in the message.
•
Redistribute the line load on other LICs. Refer to the 3720/3721
Configuration Guide to determine the current load for this LIC.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Line Interface Display Messages
CABLE NOT INSTALLED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY
Cause: An undefined error was detected during the error recovery. The scanner
is not able to process the MOSS command.
A BER is created: Type
01~
ID 05.
Action:
1.
Re-IML the appropriate scanner (Chapter 3).
2.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
ERROR IN FRONT END SCANNER PROCESSOR
Cause: A scanner hardware error is detected. The function cannot be
performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action: Terminate the function.
24-36
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
ERROR IN SCANNER DURING COMMAND PROCESSING (See "Common
Messages")
ERROR IN SCANNER: ICC/LIC FAILED OR IS NOT PRESENT
Cause: A scanner hardware error is detected. The function cannot be
performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action: Terminate the function.
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: CHECK CCU STATE
Cause: You selected the line interface function before IPL phase 4.
Action: To select the line interface display function, wait until PHASE 4 is
displayed on MSA, or FF4 is displayed on the hex display.
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: CHECK CDF STATE
Cause: You selected the line interface function with an incorrectly initialized
CDF.
Action: Check the CDF for errors by using the CDF function on the main
menu.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
INVALID LINE ADDRESS (See "Common Messages")
IOC ERROR DURING ERROR RECOVERY (See "Common Messages")
IOC/SCANNER ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
LINE ADDRESS DOES NOT BELONG TO AN INSTALLED SCANNER (See
"Common Messages")
LINE NOT YET INITIALIZED
Cause: The control program did not yet request the line initialization (Set Mode
command).
Action: Activate the line at the host console and retry.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-37
LINE SPEED MAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE
Cause: Displaying the states of the data set leads for high-speed lines (230 kbps
or above) may disturb the transmission of data.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Enter Y to display the lead states
•
Terminate the function, using the Terminate function, or
•
Press one of the displayed PF keys.
LINE SPEED MAY BE 230 KBPS OR ABOVE: LEAD STATE NOT ACCESSmLE
Cause: You tried to display the states of the data set leads for high-speed lines
(230 kbps or above) but the scanner cannot provide the leads.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Terminate the function, using the Terminate function,
•
Select another line, or
•
Press one of the displayed PF keys.
MICROCODE DETECTED ERROR DURING COMMAND PROCESSING
Cause: The scanner microcode detected an error. The function cannot be
performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action: Terminate the function, then re-IML the scanner. If the problem
persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
NO ANSWER TO ERROR STATUS REQUEST DURING ERROR RECOVERY
Cause: The scanner is not able to process the MOSS command. It did not
answer during error recovery.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action:
24-38
1.
Perform a 3720 IPL from the operator console (Chapter 4).
2.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NO SCANNER ANSWER: CHECK CCU STATE AND IF NEEDED RE-IML CS
Cause: The scanner cannot answer MOSS commands because it is down, or
because the CCU is not in the RUN state
Action: Do one of the following:
•
If the scanner is down and the CCU is in the RUN state (see MSA field g),
re-IML the scanner (Chapter 3), then try again.
•
If the CCU is not in the RUN state, perform a 3720 IPL from the operator
console (Chapter 4), re-IML the scanner (Chapter 3), then try again.
SCANNER CYCLE STEAL TO/FROM CCU FAILED
Cause: The scanner is not able to exchange data with the CCU. The scanner
recovery failed. The error is in the scanner (incorrect cycle steal parameters).
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action:
1.
2.
Re-IML the appropriate scanner.
If the error persists, perform a 3720 IPL from the operator console (Chapter
4).
3.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
SCANNER HARDSTOP DURING COMMAND PROCESSING
Cause: A scanner hardstop error is detected. The function cannot be
performed.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 05.
Action: Terminate the function, then re-IML the scanner. If the problem
persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Link Test Messages
These messages are described under "Stand-Alone Link Test Messages" on
page 24-51.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-39
MCF Messages
ALL OR PART OF 'VERIFY DATA' IS OUTSIDE MODULE
CCU FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED
CODE ALREADY RESTORED
CODE ALREADY UPGRADED
DESTINATION DISK(ETTE) ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED
DISK(ETTE) ERROR: MCF FUNCTION CANCELED
ENTER PATCH IDENTIFICATION
FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED WHEN MOSS IS ONLINE
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED IN DISKETTE MODE
FUNCTION TERMINATION NOT ALLOWED: COMPLETE FUNCTION
INCORRECT MCF FILE: CONTACT SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE
INPUT CHECKSUM DOES NOT MATCH COMPUTED ONE
INVALID DATE
INVALID FILE NAME
INVALID INPUT
INVALID MODULE NAME
MCF FILE IS EMPTY
MIXED COMMANDS ARE NOT ALLOWED
NO 'APPLIED' PATCHES IN FILE
NO 'NON-APPLIED' PATCHES IN FILE
NO NEW MCF IN FILE
NO OLD MCF IN FILE
ONLY ONE SCAN OR MODIFY ON SAME SCREEN
PATCH ALREADY EXISTS
PATCH AREA IS NOW FULL
24-40
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PATCH ERASED BECAUSE IT CONTAINS NO MORE RECORD
PATCH FILED
PATCH FILED, CHECKSUM IS XXXX
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED APPLY
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED RESTORE
RECOVERY OF A CANCELED UPGRADE
REFUSED: PATCHES ARE ALREADY ON DISK(ETTE)
REFUSED: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PATCHES REACHED
REFUSED: NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN PATCH AREA
SELECTED PATCH COPIED ON DISK(ETTE)
SELECTED PATCHES, IF ANY, ARE COPIED ON DISK(ETTE)
SOURCE DISK(ETTE) ERROR: FUNCTION CANNOT BE PERFORMED
THE HISTORY TABLE IS EMPTY
UNDEFINED PF KEY
'VERIFY DATA' AND 'REPLACE DATA' HAVE DIFFERENT LENGTHS
'VERIFY DATA' DOES MATCH 'MODULE DATA'
Chapter 24. Messages
24-41
Operator Console Logon Procedure Messages
INCORRECT PASSWORD - PLEASE RE-ENTER
Cause: You entered an incorrect logon password.
Action: Enter the correct password.
•
Local console password: The number of unsuccessful attempts is not
limited.
•
Remote console password: The number of unsuccessful attempts is limited
to three. Then the remote console is disconnected.
INCORRECT PASSWORD - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED
Cause: You entered three times an incorrect logon password on the remote
console. The remote console is disconnected. The password may have been
modified, or you no longer have access to the remote console.
Action: Check whether the password has been modified, or whether you still
have access to the remote console.
If you obtain the new password, you have to reconnect the remote console.
TERMINAL DISCONNECTED
Cause: The remote operator console is disconnected for any of the following
reasons:
•
You have been inactive for more than 10 minutes.
•
You entered OFF on the remote console.
•
You have disconnected by the local console operator.
Action: If the local console is logged on, you cannot log on the remote console.
LOCAL CONSOLE CALLING
Cause: The local console operator is trying to log on.
Action: It is recommended that you log off. The local console operator can
disconnect the remote console at any time.
24-42
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
REMOTE CONSOLE CALLING
Cause: The remote console operator is trying to log on.
Action: You may log off to allow the remote console operator to log on.
However, if you do not use the local console for more than 15 minutes, it will be
disconnected if the remote console operator attempts to log on.
TERMINAL DISCONNECTED FOR REMOTE CONSOLE
Cause: The local console is disconnected because the operator did not use it for
more than 15 minutes and the remote console operator logged on the console.
Action: You may log on the local operator console.
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED
Cause: The remote console password has been deactivated.
Action: Contact the person responsible for password management.
xx UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR LOCAL LOGGING
xx UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS FOR REMOTE LOGGING
Cause: Indicates the number of unsuccessful attempts that have been made to
log on each console.
Action: You can use the password management function to reset these counters.
Panel Functions Messages
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
INVALID PANEL FUNCTION: RE-ENTER
Cause: You entered an incorrect option.
Action: Enter IPL, IML, or CA.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-43
MOSS/PANEL ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: The panel function cannot be performed because of an error on the
MOSS-to-panel boundary.
Action: Try again. If the problem persists:
1.
Terminate the function using Terminate, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
PANEL FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE PERFORMED: SET PANEL/CONSOLE
SWITCH TO CONSOLE
Cause: The Panel/Console switch on the 3720 control panel was not set to
console.
Action: Set the switch to console.
UNDEFINED PF KEY: (See "Common Messages")
Password Management Messages
COUNTERS HAVE BEEN RESET
Cause: All counters have been reset at once.
Action: None.
CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION HAS BEEN UPDATED (self-explanatory)
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
INCORRECT PASSWORD
Cause: You entered an incorrect password to have access to the password
management function.
Action: Check the password and re-enter.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
PASSWORD HAS BEEN UPDATED
Cause: The request to update the local or remote password is successful.
Action: None.
24-44
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
PASSWORD MUST BE AT LEAST FIVE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS LONG
WITHOUT BLANKS
Cause: Self-explanatory.
Action: Re-enter correctly.
REMOTE CUSTOMER PASSWORD AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
MUST BE DIFFERENT (self-explanatory)
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN DEACTIVATED
Cause: The request to deactivate the remote maintenance password is successful.
Action: None.
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN PERMANENTLY ACTIVATED
Cause: The request to activate permanently the remote maintenance password is
successful.
Action: None.
REMOTE MAINTENANCE PASSWORD HAS BEEN TEMPORARILY ACTIVATED
Cause: The request to activate temporarily the remote maintenance password is
successful.
Action: None.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Port Swap Messages
CONTROLLER DATA UNAVAILABLE, FUNCTION CANCELED (See "Common
Messages")
ENTER ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 TO 27 AND 32 TO 63
Cause: The line address that you entered is not within the range 0 to 27 or 32 to
63.
Action: Check the line address and re-enter.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
b IS RESET
Cause: You switched port b back to port a. The information in the port swap
file about the switching from port a to port b is removed.
Action: None.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-45
NO SWAP CHANGES: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED BY CTL PGM
Cause: Your control program does not support the port swap function.
Action: Check the level of your control program.
NO SWAP CHANGES: MOSS IS NOT ONLINE
Cause.~ You cannot perform the port swap function when MOSS is not in
MOSS-ONLINE status.
Action: If MOSS is in MOSS-OFFLINE status, set MOSS to MOSS-ONLINE
status as follows:
to display the CCU functions.
1.
( PF2 )
2.
0 CD 0 ( I
SEttJ
)
set MOSS online.
If MOSS is in MOSS-ALONE status, initialize the 3720.
NO SWAP FILED
Cause: The port swap file is empty. This message is displayed when you select
the port swap function for the first time, or when all switched ports have been
reset.
Action: None.
REFUSED: INCOMPATmLE LIC TYPES
Cause: The LIC types for the original and new ports are of different types.
Action: None.
REFUSED: a IS ALREADY SWAPPED WITH b
Cause: You already swapped port a with port b.
Action: None.
REFUSED: bbb IS UNKNOWN TO CONTROLLER
Cause: No LIC or cable is installed, or the cable you specified is not connected
to a modem or used for direct attachment.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
24-46
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
REFUSED: MEANINGLESS VALUES
Cause: The two addresses that you entered are either the same or not decimal.
Action: Enter the correct addresses, then press SEND.
REFUSED: THE FILE IS FULL, RESET A SWAP
Cause: The port swap file is full because you already switched 64 ports.
Action: To swap another port, you must reset one.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED
Cause: Your control program does not support the port swap function.
Action: None.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: a IS A SPARE
Cause: The original port (a) that you entered is a spare.
Action: Enter a valid port.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS AN EP LINE
Cause: The port swap function cannot be performed in an EP environment.
Action: None.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS NON-ffiM
Cause: Ports cannot be swapped because the line (aaa) is an OEM line.
Action: None.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: b IS NOT A SPARE
Cause: The new port that you entered is not a spare.
Action: Enter a spare port, then press SEND.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: aaa IS NOT INACTIVE
Cause: The line for which you want to swap ports is still active.
Action: Deactivate the line at the host, then perform the port swap.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-47
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: RESOURCE NOT AVAILABLE
Cause: No NCP buffer is available for the moment. The port swap request is
canceled.
Action: Request the swap later.
REFUSED BY CTL PGM: UNDEFINED ERROR
Cause: The control program refused the port swap for a reason undefined to
MOSS.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
a SWAPPED TO b
Cause: Port a is logically swapped with port b.
Action: Switch ports physically.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
WARNING: INCOMPATIBLE LINE PROTOCOLS, PRESS SEND TO BYPASS
Cause: The line protocols are not compatible.
Action: You are requested to press SEND to continue. The line protocols
might not have been updated in the LDF file. Therefore, port swapping may be
possible. You may cancel the swap request by pressing PF6:QUIT.
Programmable Line Speed Messages
CABLE NOT IN DIRECT ATTACHMENT
Cause: You cannot update the speed of a line that is not direct-attached.
Action: Terminate the function:
CABLE NOT INSTALLED
Cause: The line that you selected is considered as not installed because there is
no cable.
Action: Terminate the function:
24-48
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DISK ERROR - SPEED CANNOT BE UPDATED
Cause: A disk error is detected when writing the new speed on the disk.
Action: Try again. If the problem persists, contact the appropriate service
representative.
ENTER A LINE ADDRESS WITHIN THE RANGE 0 to 27 AND 32 TO 63
Cause: The line address that you entered is not within the range 0 to 27 or 32 to
63.
Action: Check the line address and re-enter.
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: LIC NOT INSTALLED
Cause: There is no LIC installed for the selected line.
Action: If the line address is correct, install a LIC.
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: LIC NOT INSTALLED AND NO ICC PRESENT
Cause: There is no LIC installed or ICC present for the selected line.
Action: If the line address is correct, install a LIC and an ICC.
FUNCTION NOT ALLOWED: NO ICC PRESENT
Cause: There is no ICC present for the selected line.
Action: If the line address is correct, install an ICC.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
NEW SPEED USING RPQ WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT IML (self-explanatory)
NEW SPEED xxxxxx WILL BE EFFECTIVE AT NEXT IML (self-explanatory)
UNDEFINED PF KEY (self-explanatory)
Reset Address Compare Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT UPDATED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE
E~ROR:
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
REQUEST IGNORED (See "Common Messages")
Chapter 24. Messages
24-49
Reset Branch Trace Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT UPDATED (See "Common Messages")
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE (See "Common Messages")
REQUEST IGNORED (See "Common Messages")
Reset CCU/LSSD Messages
CCU/MOSS ERROR: RESET CCU FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A physical error occurred when communicating with the CCU. The
Reset CCU /LSSD function is canceled.
A BERis created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Select the reset CCU /LSSD function again. If the problem persists,
contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: RESET CCU FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A physical error occurred when accessing the diskette. The reset
CCU /LSSD function is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Select the Reset CCU /LSSD function again. If the problem persists,
contact the appropri~te service representative.
FUNCTION COMPLETED (See "Common Messages")
FUNCTION IN PROGRESS (See "Common Messages")
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
24-50
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Set Address Compare Messages
See "Common Messages" for explanations of the following messages.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE
INVALID INPUT
REQUEST IGNORED
UNDEFINED PF KEY
Set Branch Trace Messages
See "Common Messages" for explanations of the following messages.
BT BUFFER INCORRECTLY DEFINED
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT ACCESSmLE
CCU/MOSS ERROR: BT BUFFER NOT UPDATED
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
DISKETTE ERROR: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE
INVALID INPUT
REQUEST IGNORED
UNDEFINED PF KEY
Stand-Alone Link Test Messages
CCU NOT IN THE RUN STATE (SEE MSA) - FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: An error occurred that prevents the CCU from functioning correctly, or
the CCU is stopped.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program (if necessary).
2.
Set the
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
ceu to the RUN state (if necessary).
Chapter 24. Messages
24-51
CCU/MOSS ERROR - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A hardware error occurred between the CCU and the MOSS.
Action:
1.
Press General Reset on the control panel to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
COMMAND REJECT RECEIVED DUE TO BUFFER OVERRUN
This message applies only to the requester.
Cause: An overrun condition occurred at the responder.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
COMMAND REJECT RECEIVED DUE TO INVALID COMMAND
This message only applies to the requester. This message is followed by two
hexadecimal characters representing the invalid command code that was received
by the responder and returned to the requester.
Cause: An invalid command (not X'F3' = TEST) was received by the
responder.
Action:
24-52
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DATA MUST BE PAIRS OF HEX CHARS SEPARATED BY 1 BLANK
This message applies only to the requester.
Cause: One of the following conditions occurred during data entry using the
personal pattern screen:
1.
The pairs of hexadecimal characters were not separated by a single blank.
2.
More than one blank separated a pair of hexadecimal characters.
3.
The hexadecimal characters were not entered in pairs.
4.
One or more characters was outside of the range X'O' through X'F'.
Action: Position the cursor at the error and correct it using the insert/delete
keys, then press SEND.
ENABLE COMMAND FAILED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The line cannot be enabled.
Action:
1.
Check that the IPL port table has been correctly defined.
2.
Check that the modem cable is correctly connected.
3.
Check that the modem is powered up and operational.
4.
If the link is a direct attachment, check that the responder is powered on
and initialized.
5.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Note: The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
HARDWARE ERROR ON RECEIVE
Cause: A cable or modem error occurred on receive.
Action:
1.
Verify the modem and modem cable.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayedfor this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
made available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-53
HARDWARE ERROR ON TRANSMIT
Cause: A cable or modem error occurred on transmit.
Action:
1.
Verify the modem and modem cable.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
INVALID ADDRESS FIELD RECEIVED
This message is followed by two hexadecimal characters representing the address
field that was received.
Cause: An invalid address field was received in the test frame.
Action:
1.
Check that the responder address specified when you initialized the requester
is correct.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
INVALID CONTROL FIELD RECEIVED
This message is followed by two hexadecimal characters representing the control
field that was received.
Cause: An invalid control field was received in the test frame.
Action:
24-54
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the appropriate service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
INVALID DATA RECEIVED
This message applies only to the requester.
Cause: The received data does not match the transmitted data, which is
therefore displayed on a separate screen.
Action:
1.
Examine the data to determine the character(s) in error. The cursor is
positioned in front of the first character that does not match.
Note: Up to 64 bytes can be shown on a screen, so two screens may be
needed to display all the data. In this case, you can see which screen is
displayed by looking at the bottom right hand corner of the screen:
•
If PF8:FORWARD is displayed, you are looking at the first screen (first
64 bytes).
•
If PF7:BACKWARD is displayed, you are looking at the second screen
(second 64 bytes).
2.
Use PF8 or PF7 to switch between screens as required.
3.
Press PF4 to continue the test.
Notes:
1.
If, in addition, too many bytes have been received, the error message is:
INVALID DATA RECEIVED - TOO MUCH DATA RECEIVED.
2.
The IBM NCP and the Link Test Responder programs can both buffer afull
128 bytes. Other responders may be limited to less than 128 bytes; for
example, the controller load/dump program (CLDP) is limited to 32 bytes. In
this case, there will be an INVALID DATA RECEIVED message if the test
message sent by the requester was longer than the limit.
INVALID DATA RECEIVED - TOO MUCH DATA RECEIVED
See "Invalid Data Received", Notes 1 and 2.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: An error occurred that disabled the link.
Action:
1.
Determine the error condition from the display.
2.
Restart the test in investigation mode and check the other error message.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-55
LINK NOT DEFINED IN IPL PORT TABLE
Cause: The link being tested is not defined in the IPL port table.
Action:
1.
Define the link as an IPL port (Chapter 6).
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
LINK TEST PROGRAM ABEND
Cause: A hardware error occurred during IPL phase 3.
Action:
1.
Press Power ON to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
LINK TEST PROGRAM NOT LOADED - FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: You tried to select the link test (LT) function when the link test program
was not loaded.
Action: Select the load link test requester (LOQ) function or load link test
responder (LOS) to load the link test program.
MORE THAN 128 BYTES RECEIVED
This message applies only to the responder.
Cause: The link test responder expects to receive up to 128 bytes of data, but
more than 128 bytes were received. The extra data is ignored.
Action:
24-56
1.
Press PF4 to return to the responder statistical counters screen.
2.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NO ANSWER FROM LINK TEST PROGRAM - FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The link test program did not reply within 2 minutes, during
initialization, or within 2 seconds if running.
Action:
1.
Press General Reset on the control panel to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Note: The 2-minute timeout may occur during initialization on a dial-up line
because the connection was not established.
SCANNER ERROR ON RECEIVE
Cause: A scanner error occurred.
Action:
1.
Press General Reset on the control panel to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-57
SCANNER ERROR ON TRANSMIT
Cause: A scanner error occurred.
Action:
1.
Press General Reset on the control panel to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
SCANNER NOT OPERATIONAL - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The scanner supporting the link to be tested is not operational.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
SET MODE COMMAND FAILED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The scanner did not respond to a Set Mode command.
Action:
24-58
1.
Press General Reset on the control panel to reset the 3720.
2.
Re-IPL the link test program.
3.
Restart the test.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
TIMEOUT ON RECEIVE
This message only applies to the requester.
Cause: A timeout occurred at the requester because no answer was received
from the responder within the timeout period.
Action:
1.
Check that the responder is correctly IPLed.
2.
Check at the responder side that the controller address is correctly defined in
the IPL port common options screen.
3.
Check the modems, cables, and the line.
4.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
TIMEOUT ON TRANSMIT
Cause: The scanner did not reply to a command sent from the Link Test
program within the timeout period.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
TOO MUCH DATA RECEIVED
This message only applies to the requester.
Cause: More data than expected was received (extra data is ignored). However
the received data does match the transmitted data.
Action:
1.
Press PF4 to continue the test.
2.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-59
TRANSMISSION ERROR ON RECEIVE
Cause: The scanner indicated a transmission error occurred on receive.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
TRANSMISSION ERROR ON TRANSMIT
Cause: The scanner indicated a transmission error on transmit.
Action:
1.
Re-IPL the link test program.
2.
Restart the test.
3.
If the error persists, contact the service representative.
Notes:
1.
The SCF, LCS, and SES are also displayed for this type of error.
2.
Some errors of this type may disable the link. In this case, the PF4 key is not
available and the following message is displayed in the message area:
LINK DISABLED - LINK TEST FUNCTION CANCELED.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
24-60
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Token-Ring Interconnection Messages
ACTIVATE LINK IS ALREADY ALLOWED FOR THIS TIC
Cause: The selected token-ring interface coupler (TIC) does not have its activate
link inhibit indicator on.
Action: Retry the activate link from the host.
ACTIVATE LINK IS NOW ALLOWED
Cause: The activate link inhibit indicator for the selected TIC has been reset in
the NTRI control block.
Action: The token-ring interface coupler may now be activated from the host.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED (See "Common Messages")
IOC/TRA ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: The function could not be performed due to an IOC or TRA hardware
error.
A BER is created: type 01, ID 07.
Action: Retry or terminate the function.
MOSS/TIC ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: An error occurred while MOSS was communicating with the TIC. If
refresh is active, it is terminated.
This may happen if the line is activated from the host and the TRI function is in
refresh mode.
A BER is created: type 01, ID 07.
Action: Retry or terminate the function.
NTRI/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: No NTRI information was found for the selected TIC. NTRI is set
offline. Since NTRI is needed for the current function, it is canceled.
Action: Check the CDP and control program system generation.
REFRESH MODE: PRESS BREAK (ATTN) TO STOP
Cause: You are in refresh mode.
Action: Press BREAK (ATTN) to exit.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-61
REQUESTED LINE ADDRESS IS INVALIDFOR A TOKEN RING
Cause: A TIC cannot be installed at the line address entered.
Action: Enter a valid line address.
SELECTED TIC NOT AVAILABLE: REQUEST REJECTED
Cause: The TRA corresponding to the line address entered is installed, but the
corresponding TIC is not installed.
Action: Enter a valid line address.
TRA SELECTED IS NOT INSTALLED: REQUEST REJECTED
Cause: The TRA corresponding to the line address is not installed.
Action: Enter a valid address.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
Wrap Test Messages
BUFFERS NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP TEST STOPPED
Cause: The CCU control program stopped the wrap test because no more
buffer space is available (control program overloaded).
Action: Retry later.
BUFFERS TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The buffers are not available for the moment. The wrap test function is
canceled.
Action: Retry later.
CABLE NOT INSTALLED (See "Common Messages")
24-62
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
CCU/MOSS ERROR: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A physical error occurred when communicating with the CCU. The
wrap test function is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Check that the CCU is correctly IPLed and that MOSS is online (MSA
field c should display MOSS-ONLINE).
Retry later. If the problem persists, contact the appropriate service
representative.
CDF NOT CREATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The 3720 configuration data file has not been tested.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE ERROR: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: A physical error occurred when accessing the diskette. The wrap test
function is canceled.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 03.
Alarm A3 is displayed.
Action: Retry later. If the problem persists, contact the appropriate service
representative.
'EXPECTED DATA' CANNOT BE ENTERED AFTER 'Y'
Cause: You entered data in the 'expected' area of the screen after the letter Y.
The letter Y means that the 'transmit' and 'expected' data are identical. In that
case, you should have not entered the 'expected' data.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
If 'transmit' and 'expected' data are identical, erase the 'expected' data.
•
If they are different, replace Y by N.
INPUT MUST BE PAIRS OF HEX CHARACTERS SEPARATED BY BLANKS
Cause: You did not enter two hexadecimal characters at a time.
Action: Correct your input.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-63
INPUT MUST BE 8 BINARY DIGITS
Cause: The digits that you entered are either less than eight or not binary.
Action: All dots of the field in error must be replaced by zeros or ones.
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
INVALID LCD: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The control program transmitted an incorrect line control definition
(LCD)
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
LEVEL INCOMPATffiLE WITH SPECIFIED LINE ADDRESS
Cause: You selected a wrap level that is incompatible with the specified line
address.
Action: Either select another wrap level or terminate the function.
LIC NOT INSTALLED
Cause: You entered a line address corresponding to a LIC that is not installed.
Action: Enter a line address corresponding to a LIe that is installed (see
Chapter 23).
LINE NOT DISABLED/DEACTIVATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: You pressed SEND before disabling or deactivating the line.
Action: Select the wrap test function again. Once you have entered the line
address and the wrap type and level, make sure that the line is disabled or
deactivated before pressing SEND.
LINE NOT SYSTEM GENERATED: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The line that you specified was not defined at CCU control program
generation time. The wrap test function is canceled.
Action: Select the wrap test function again and specify a valid line address.
LINE TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: You cannot at present perform wrap tests on the line that you specified.
The wrap test function is canceled.
Action: Retry later.
24-64
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
LINE TEST ACTIVE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: You tried to perform the wrap test function on a line that is being tested
(line test functions).
Action: None.
LINE TRACE ACTIVE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: You tried to perform the wrap test function on a line that is being tested
(line trace functions).
Action: None.
MOSS NOT ONLINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The wrap test function is canceled because MOSS is not online.
Action: Set MOSS online and restart the wrap test. To set MOSS online do as
follows:
to display the CCU junctions.
1.
( PF2 )
2.
0 0 0 (I
SEtt1
)
set MOSS online.
NO ANSWER FROM CCU CONTROL PROGRAM: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The CCU control program did not answer a MOSS request.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Check that MOSS is online (MOSS-ONLINE is displayed in MSA field
c). If the control program supports the wrap tests, select the wrap test function
another time and try again. If the problem persists, contact the appropriate
service representative.
NO SUPPORT FOR AUTOCALL LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The wrap tests cannot be performed on autocalliines. The Wrap Test
function is canceled.
Action: None.
NO SUPPORT FOR OEM LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: Wrap tests cannot be performed on OEM lines. The wrap test function
is canceled.
Action: None.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-65
NON-OPERATIONAL EP DUALCOM LINE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The line is equipped with EP Dualcom feature. The wrap test function
cannot be performed on such lines.
Action: Do not perform a wrap test on this line.
PATTERN MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 4 PAIRS OF HEX CHARACTERS
Cause: Your pattern contains fewer than four pairs of hexadecimal characters.
Action: Enter at least four pairs of hexadecimal characters. When your pattern
o
is complete, do the following:
(SEND)
SCANNER NOT INSTALLED (See "Common Messages")
UNABLE TO SET LINE TO WRAP MODE: WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED
Cause: The wrap tests cannot be performed on the line that you specified, for
any of the following reasons:
•
Modem is not powered on.
•
Modem is not set to the appropriate test position.
•
There is a hardware error in the modem, cable, or scanner.
The error code is given in the line communication status byte (LCS) on the wrap
test result screen.
A BER is created: Type 11.
Action: Check whether the line address is valid. If it is, check whether the
modem is powered on and set on the appropriate position. In any other case,
contact the appropriate service representative.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
WRAP CONTROL LEAD AT LIC LEVEL NOT ALLOWED
Cause: You cannot perform a LIC wrap test on control leads.
Action: Either select other options or terminate the functions.
WRAP FUNCTION CANCELED ON OPERATOR REQUEST
Cause: You canceled the wrap test function by pressing PF5.
Action: None.
24-66
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
WRAP TEST COMPLETED
Cause: The wrap has been performed the number of times that you specified.
The test is now completed.
Action: If there is an incorrect pattern, press SEND to display it.
WRAP TEST STOPPED ON OPERATOR REQUEST
Cause: You stopped the wrap test function by pressing the BREAK (ATTN)
key. The wrap test result screen is displayed.
Action: None
3720 IPL Messages
INVALID INPUT (See "Common Messages")
REQUEST IGNORED: CCU NOT INITIALIZED
Cause: The CCU resources needed to IML a scanner are not available, because
the CCU hardware is not yet initialized. The IML request is ignored.
Action:
•
IPL the CCU and IML all the scanners (see Chapters 3 and 4).
•
Reset the CCU and restart the scanner IML:
1.
2.
3.
(PF2)
To display the CCU functions.
0 0 CD ( I
0 (I
SEND
)
SEtI)
)
To select Reset CCUjLSSD
To select Reset All
When message FUNCTION COMPLETE is displayed:
4.
(PF2)
5.
(
I
To switch back to IMLfunction
SEND
)
To restart automatically the
1ML of the same scanner.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-67
RESUME IGNORED
Cause: You cannot resume this IPL because it is not stopped.
Action: To resume the IPL, wait until message IPL STOP is displayed.
STOP IGNORED
Cause: You cannot stop this IPL because it is already stopped, not yet started,
or already completed.
Action: Do one of the following:
•
Press PF5 to resume the IPL
•
Select another IPL from the secondary menu, or
•
Terminate the IPL, using the terminate function.
UNDEFINED PF KEY (See "Common Messages")
(
24.;.68
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Operator Control Messages
CCU ALREADY IN I-STEP MODE
Cause: You selected the set I-step function when the eeu was already in
instruction step mode.
Action: None.
CCU ALREADY IN PROCESS MODE
Cause: You selected the reset I-step function when the eeu was already in
process mode.
Ac tion: None.
CCU CHECK RESET
Cause: The eeu check condition is reset.
Action: None.
CCU FUNCTIONS REFUSED
Cause: You selected the eeu functions before MOSS IML phase 2.
Action: Select the eeu functions after MOSS IML phase 2.
CCU FUNCTION STILL PENDING
Cause: You tried to log off while a CCU function was pending.
Action: Perform or terminate the pending function.
CCU/MOSS ERROR: FUNCTION NOT PERFORMED
Cause: The function that you selected cannot be performed because of a
hardware error on the MOSS-to-Ceu boundary.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action:
1.
Terminate the function, using the terminate function, and
2.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
CCU NORMAL MODE IMMEDIATE FUNCTION FAILED
Cause: The ceu normal mode function failed.
Action: Try again. If the problem persists, contact the appropriate service
representative.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-69
CCU NOW IN I-STEP MODE
Cause: The CCU is set to instruction step mode.
Action: None.
CCU NOW IN NORMAL MODE
Cause: The CCU is set to normal processing. All CCU default options are set:
no address compare, no branch trace ...
Action: None.
CCU NOW IN PROCESS MODE
Cause: The CCU is set to normal processing.
Action: None.
CCU WILL BYPASS CCU CHECK
Cause: The CCU will continue to run when a CCU check condition occurs.
Action: None.
CCU WILL BYPASS IOC CHECK
Cause: The CCU will continue to run when an IOC-detected level 1 interrupt
occurs.
Action: None.
CCU WILL STOP ON CCU CHECK
Cause: The CCU will stop when a CCU check condition occurs.
Action: None.
CCU WILL STOP ON IOC CHECK
Cause: The CCU will stop (hardcheck) when an IOC-detected level I interrupt
occurs.
Action: None.
24-70
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DATE AND TIME
Cause: This is a reply to the query date and time function (Q). In an NCP
environment, the date and time come from the host. They are displayed in the
following format: mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
In an EP environment, 00/00/00 is displayed instead of the date. The time
displayed (hh:mm:ss) is the period of time that elapsed since the last MOSS
IML.
Action: None.
DISK-DISKETTE ADAPTER DOWN
Cause: The disk/diskette adapter is down.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD CCU IPL MODULE
Cause: A disk error occurred during an automatic 3720 initialization.
Action: Initialize the 3720 from the control panel or the operator console. If
the 3720 initialization fails, contact the appropriate service representative, but
while waiting for service set the 3720 to diskette mode.
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD FUNCTION MODULE
Cause: A disk error occurred while selecting a 3720 function.
Action: Try again. If the problem persists, contact 'the appropriate service
representative.
DISK ERROR: UNABLE TO LOAD SCANNER DUMP MODULE
Cause: A disk error occurred while an automatic scanner dump was attempted.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK OR DISKETTE UNUSABLE
Cause: The disk or diskette are damaged.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISKETTE NOT READY
Cause: The diskette is not mounted or the diskette engaging lever is not set
correctly.
Action: Mount the diskette or set the engaging lever correctly.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-71
DISK NOT READY (self-explanatory)
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
DISK STARTING
DISKETTE STARTING
Cause: The message is displayed when the disk or diskette starts. It is displayed
for approximately 25 seconds for disk, 5 seconds for diskette. The keyboard is
locked while the message is displayed.
Action: None.
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE DURING IPL
Cause: You selected a function while initializing the 3720.
Action: Select the function once the 3720 initialization is completed.
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE IN DISKETTE MODE
Cause: No function can be selected in diskette mode.
Action: Contact the appropriate service representative.
INVALID INPUT
Cause: What you entered is erroneous in the present context.
Action: Re-enter correctly.
IOC RESET
Cause: A 'reset tag' pulse has been generated on the lOC bus.
Action: None.
LVL3 INTERRUPT SENT TO CCU
Cause: A CCU level-3 interrupt has been sent to the CCU.
Action: None.
NM NOT ALLOWED WHEN A CCU FUNCTION IS ACTIVE
Cause: You cannot select the CCU normal mode function if a CCU function
has been selected already.
Action: None.
24-72
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
NON-CCU FUNCTION STILL PENDING
Cause: You tried to log off while a function other than a CCU function is
pending.
Action: Perform or terminate the pending function.
NOTHING TO TERMINATE
Cause: You selected the terminate function and there is no function active nor
pending.
Action: None.
RESET CCU CHECK IGNORED
Cause: You are trying to reset the CCU check condition but it is already reset.
Action: None.
RESET CCU FAILED
Cause: The CCU cannot be reset because of a hardware error.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Re-IPL the CCU.
RESET CCU COMPLETED
Cause: The immediate function CCU reset is successfully completed.
Action: None.
RESET CCU NOT ALLOWED
Cause: The immediate function CCU reset is not allowed while performing the
CCU extended functions (service personnel).
Action: None.
START CCU FAILED
Cause: The CCU cannot be started because of a hardware error.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Re-IPL the CCU.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-73
START CCU IGNORED
Cause: You are trying to start the CCU but it is already running.
Action: None.
START CCU COMPLETED
Cause: The immediate function CCU start is successfully completed.
Action: None.
START CCU NOT ALLOWED
Cause: You are trying to start the CCU but there is a CCU hardcheck or the
CCU is reset.
Action:
•
•
If CCU hardcheck, you must first reset the CCU check conditions, then
start the CCU:
1.
(PF2)
2.
(';lR r::l IvlK
C
L.:J L:J
L.:.J
3.
(~8)
To display CCU function menu, ifnot already selected.
(I
,_
SEND
)
.
To select the Reset CCU
Check function.
To start the CCU.
If the CCU is reset, IPL the CCU:
To position the cursor
1.
8
2.
eD 0 GJ ( I
SEND
)
To IPL the CCU
STOP CCU COMPLETED
Cause: The immediate function CCU stop is successfully completed.
Action: None.
STOP CCU FAILED
Cause: The CCU cannot be stopped because of a hardware error.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 02.
Action: Re-IPL the CCU.
24-74
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
STOP CCU IGNORED
Cause: You are trying to stop the CCU but it is already stopped.
Action: None.
STOP CCU NOT ALLOWED
Cause: The immediate function CCU stop is not allowed while performing the
CCU extended functions (service personnel only).
Action: None.
TIMEOUT OCCURRED - TERMINAL DISCONNECTED
Cause: The remote console is disconnected because it has been inactive for 30
minutes.
Action: Follow the logon procedure if you want to access the system again.
TRANSMISSION ERROR, PLEASE RE-ENTER (self-explanatory)
CONTENTION, PLEASE RE-ENTER
Cause: The command or data that you entered was incorrectly received.
Action:
1.
Re-enter all your input, even though it is still displayed
on the screen.
2.
(
(
SEN)
Chapter 24. Messages
24-75
Operator Console Information Messages
The operator information area (line 25 of the screen) is reserved for the display of
operator console information messages. These messages are documented in the
appropriate operator console manuals. This section describes only those that
require a specific 3720 action.
FORMAT CHECK (3101 only)
WRONG PLACE (3161 in 3101 emulation mode)
Cause: You performed one of the following invalid actions:
1. You pressed one of the following keys in a protected field:
Any graphic character key, including:
space bar
ERASE
DEL CHAR
2.
You pressed any graphic character key in insert mode when the field does
not contain at least one null character to be used for character movement.
INSERT
Cause: You pressed INS CHAR. The operator console is operating in insert
mode.
Action: Insert characters or press RESET key to leave insert mode.
COMM NOT READY 1 (3161 only)
LINE CHECK 1 (3101 only)
Cause: The communication with the 3720 was not possible because the
'c1ear-to-send' (CTS) signal was off, or was dropped during data transmission.
Action: Wait until the message is cleared.
COMM NOT READY 2 (3161 only)
LINE CHECK 2 (3101 only)
Cause: The communication with the 3720 was not possible because the
'data-set-ready' (DSR) signal was off, or was dropped during data transmission.
This message is displayed, for instance, when performing the MOSS IML.
Action: Go to Chapter 2.
24-76
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SENDING
Cause: You pressed SEND. Consequently, data that you entered is being
transmitted. The keyboard is not available.
Action: Wait until message SENDING is cleared before entering new data.
KEY LOCKED < WAIT> (self-explanatory)
Cause: Delay between pressing key and program recognizing it.
Action: Wait.
SYSTEM COMMAND
Cause: The keyboard is disabled by a keyboard-lock command from the 3720.
Action: Wait until this message is cleared before entering new data.
UP SHIFT
Cause: You pressed SHIFT or LOCK. The operator console is in uppercase
mode.
Action: Enter characters.
Chapter 24. Messages
24-77
24-78
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
You are permanently informed of the 3720 status by the information displayed on
the first three lines of the operator console screen: the machine status area (MSA).
The first two lines of the MSA show ceu and MOSS information. The third
line shows:
•
Selected scanner information (service personnel only)
Of,
• eeu /Scanner IPL information.
Figure 25-1 illustrates the MSA for the scanner. Figure 25-2 illustrates the MSA
for the eeu jScanner IPL. Each letter is a key that refers to the explanation.
a
9
I
I
m
Figure 25-1.
b
c
d
h
i
j
n
I
e
I
k
I
I
f
I
service personnel only
Machine Status Area for the Scanner
Warning: If the following message appears in the MSA, call your
IBM service representative immediately:
MAINTENANCE MODE
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-1
a
d
b
e
9
s
Figure 25-2.
25-2
u
I
v
I
Machine Status Area for the CCUIScanner IPL
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
w
x
I
Field a
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
1
n
m
service personnel only
Displays the CCU mode:
PROCESS
I-STEP
Field b
Normal processing
Instruction step
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
1
service personnel only
n
m
Displays the CCU check mode:
STOP-CCU-CHK
BYP-CCU-CHK
Field c
The system will stop on a CCU check (default or after function
RESET BYPASS CCU CHECK).
You initiated function SET BYPASS CCU CHECK so the system
will not stop on a CCU check.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
1
m
n
service personnel only
Indicates whether MOSS is connected to the CCU control program:
MOSS-ONLINE
MOSS-OFFLINE
MOSS-ALONE
SERVICE-MODE
MOSS is connected to the CCU control program, but both are
operational.
MOSS is not connected to the CCU control program, but both are
operational.
MOSS is operational while the CCU control program is not loaded
or no longer operational.
MOSS is in service mode (service personnel only).
The following illustration gives the status of MOSS after the different IPLsjIML.
After a:
MOSS is in status:
Hex Display code is:
Initialization (general IPL)
MOSS IML
MOSS-ONLINE
MOSS-OFFLINE if CP is loaded
MOSS-ALONE if CP is not loaded
MOSS-ONLINE
MOSS-ONLINE
MOSS-ONLINE
MOSS-ONLINE
X'OOO'
X'FEE'
X'FEF'
X'OOO'
X'OOO'
X'OOO'
X'OOO'
CCU/Scanner IPL
STEP BY STEP IPL
BYPASS PHASE 1 IPL
BYPASS PHASE 31PL
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-3
Field d
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
n
m
service personnel only
Displays information on the CCU address compare function:
AC
The address compare function is active.
If you selected MOSS INTERRUPT=Y and/or CCU STOP=Y when defining the
address compare, the following are displayed:
ACHIT
Field e
A single or double address compare is successful.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
m
n
service personnel only
Is updated each time an output X'71' instruction is executed, by the control program, for
example, when using the CCU data exchange function or the control program procedures,
or during the 3720 initialization. The values displayed in this field are explained where
appropriate in this manual. See also field k.
X71:xxxxxx
X71:ERROR
25-4
Contents of CCU X'71' output register.
Error when accessing the register. Register contents cannot be
displayed.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
At initialization time, field e displays:
X71:xxxxxx
IPL port address (except
when the 3720 initialization
flag is 00 - see below).
This encoded address is
displayed in decoded form in
field w, preceded by CA or L.
3720 initialization flag.
It has the following
meaning:
01 =
02 =
05 =
06 =
09 =
OA =
II =
20 =
21 =
22 =
25 =
26 =
29 =
2A =
IPL request detected on a link-attached 3720
IPL request detected on a channel-attached 3720
dump in progress on a link-attached 3720
dump in progress on a channel-attached 3720
control program load in progress on a link-attached 3720
control program load in progress on a channel-attached 3720
Remote Power Off (RPO) command is detected
control program loader/dump abend before an IPL request
detected on a channel- or link-attached 3720
control program loader/dump abend on an IPL request detected
on a link-attached 3720
control progranlloader/dump abend on an IPL request detected
on a channel-attached 3720
control program loader/dump abend on a link-attached 3720
dump
control program loader/dump abend on a channel-attached 3720
dump
control program loader/dump abend on a link-attached 3720
control program load
control program loader/dump abend on a channel-attached 3720
control program load
When the 3720 initialization flag is 00, field e displays:
X71: 00 xxxx
Link
pol
dL-efi-ln-e-d-l-'n - - - - - - - - - f
Link IPL ports that
are presently enabled.
the link IPL port table.
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-5
Field f
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
1
service personnel only
n
m
Is displayed along with field 1, when the CCU status is Stop X'70', Stop Pgm, Stop BT,
Stop AC, or Hardstop (see field g)
C:x
Z:x
(field f)
(field 1)
LAR:xxxxxx
IAR:xxxxxx
OP:xxxx
ILVL:xxxx
LAR:xxxxxx
OP:xxxx
C:x
Address of the last executed instruction
Last executed instruction
Value of the C-latch (0 or 1)
IAR:xxxxxx
ILVL:xxxx
Z:x
Address of the next instruction to be executed
Active CCU interrupt levels
Value of the Z-latch (0 or 1)
CCU INTERRUPTS DISABLED
Nothing displayed (field 1)
(field f)
No interrupts can be received from the CCU.
•
•
•
CCU REGISTERS
NOT ACCESSIBLE
During a MOSS IML from the control panel, just after power
on
While performing CCU IPL to avoid automatic CCU re-IPL in
case of Hardcheck (see field g)
While performing some utility programs (service personnel only)
(in field f)
(in field 1)
Appropriate registers cannot be read, so it is impossible to display
LAR, OP, C, IAR, ILVL, and Z information.
25-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Field g
a
b
c
d
g
h
i
j
n
m
e
f
k
I
service personnel only
Displays the CCU status:
RUN
RESET
Instructions are being executed or data transferred.
The control program stopped because you initiated function Reset
CCU; to restart the CCU, do an IPL.
The control program stopped on a hardcheck error. An automatic
re-IPL is attempted, if the control program is loaded.
You selected the CCU check reset function to reset the CCU check
condition. To restart, select the CCU start function from the CCU
function menu or press PF6:CCU START or PF6:S if displayed on
the screen.
A CCU IPL was requested and is in progress.
The control program stopped on an output X'70' instruction
executed by the control program.
The control program stopped because you initiated function CCU
Stop or function Set I-Step.
The control program stopped because the branch trace function that
you initiated with CCU STOP has become deactivated.
The control program stopped because the address compare function
that you initiated with CCU Stop (CCU Action = S) is successful.
HARDCHK
HARD STOP
IPL-REQ
STOP-X70
STOP-PGM
STOP-BT
STOP-AC
Fleld h
a
b
c
d
g
h
i
j
m
n
e
f
k
I
service personnel only
Indicates whether the 3720 will stop on an IOC check.
BYP-IOC-CHK
STOP-IOC-CHK
The system will not stop on an IOC check (default or after a Reset
IOC Check Stop).
You initiated function Set IOC Check Stop to force the system stop
on an IOC check.
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-7
Field i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
n
m
service personnel only
Displays the last MOSS check code.
LASTMCHK:xxx
Field j
Check code. This code is for service personnel only.
Simultaneously, additional information is provided, such as Alarms,
MOSS inoperative lamp.
a
b
c
d
g
h
i
j
f
k
I
service personnel only
n
m
e
Displays BT when the branch trace function is active.
:Field k
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
service personnel only
n
m
Is updated each time an output X'72' instruction is executed by the control program, for
example, when using the CCU data exchange function or the control program procedures,
or during the 3720 initialization. The values displayed in this field are explained where
appropriate in this manual. See also field e.
Contents of CCU X'72' output register.
Control program load/dump abend code (service personnel).
Error when accessing the register. Register contents cannot be
displayed.
X72:xxxxxx
X72:00xxxx
X72:ERROR
Field I
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
m
n
service personnel only
Is displayed along with field f. See field f description.
25-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Scanner Information
Field m
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
I
service personnel only
n
m
Displays information on the selected scanner:
NO SCANNER SELECTED:
You selected a scanner function before selecting a scanner.
SCANNER xx yyyyyyyyyyyy
Where xx is the number of the selected scanner and yyyyyyyyyyyy is
any of the following:
The scanner is operational and under control of the CCU control
program.
The control code is loaded and the front end adapter is operational.
The scanner is inoperative or the CCU is not running.
Disconnected-stop. The control code is no longer under control of
the CCU control program, either after command STOP or after a
scanner address compare HIT.
Disconnected-go. You entered command GO while in status
DISCTD-STOP. The scanner remains disconnected but the control
code execution resumes.
You entered command RESET. You may initiate an IML or a
DUMP.
CONNECTED
INITIALIZED
INOPERATIVE
DISCTD-STOP
DISCTD-GO
RESET
UNKNOWN-MODE
The scanner is selected but it is impossible to identify its status.
Field n
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
n
j
k
I
m
service personnel only
Displays the scanner option:
IML
DUMP
A scanner IML is being started.
A scanner dump is in progress.
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-9
CCUIScanner IPL Information
CCU/scanner IPL information, instead of scanner information, is displayed on the
third line.
Shortly after the IPL is successfully completed, the third line of the MSA is
cleared if the IPL was requested from the control panel or from the host. If the
IPL was requested from the operator console (function IPL CCU /TSS), the third
line is cleared when the terminate function is selected.
a
b
g
h
c
e
j
k
t
s
r
d
u
I
f
v
w
x
Field r
displays IPL to indicate that an IPL is started.
Field s
displays PHASE 1 to indicate the start of phase 1 (CCU test and initialization). This field
is blank when phase 1 is bypassed.
Field t
displays PHASE 2 to indicate the start of phase 2 (load from the disk and start the
control program loader/dump). This field is always present.
Field u
displays PHASE 3 to indicate the start of phase 3 (load and initialize the scanners). This
field is blank when phase 3 is bypassed.
Field v
displays PHASE 4 to indicate the start of phase 4 (load from the host and initialize the
control program). This field is always present.
Field w
displays any of the following:
CA IPL DETECTED ON CA x
The control program loading/dumping is started on a
channel-attached 3720. (A write IPL command has been detected
by the 3720.) x is the channel adapter number.
Action:
•
If this message appears temporarily, no action is required .
..
•
~
If this message appears permanently, follow the problem
determination procedure for 3720 Model 1 or 11 load problems
in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
CONTROL PROGRAM LOADED
The control program is loaded.
CP SAVE IN PROGRESS ON DISK
The control program is being saved on the 3720 disk.
25-10
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON CA x
A control program dump is being taken on a channel-attached 3720.
The progression of the dump is indicated in MSA field k that
displays control program storage addresses. x is the channel adapter
number.
Action:
•
If this message appears temporarily, no action is required.
•
If this message appears permanently, follow the problem
determination procedure for 3720 Model 1 load problems in the
3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON DISK
A control program dump is being taken on the 3720 disk. If this
message appears permanently, call your service representative.
DUMP IN PROGRESS ON Lxxx
A control program dump is being taken on a link-attached 3720.
The progression of the dump is indicated in MSA field k that
displays control program storage addresses. xxx is the decimal
communication line file
Action:
•
If this message appears temporarily, no action is required.
•
If this message appears permanently, follow the problem
determination procedure for 3720 Model 2 or 12 load problems
in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
ENABLED PORTS CA xx L xxxxxxxx (3720 Modell)
ENABLED PORTS L xxxxxxxx (3720 Model 2)
Indicates which channel adapters or link IPL ports are enabled.
x can be either Y or N.
In the CA field, Ys indicate which channel adapters are enabled,
and Ns, which channel adapters are not enabled. The position of
the Ys and Ns gives the channel adapter number.
In the L field, Ys indicate which link IPL ports are enabled. N is
used for the link IPL ports not enabled. The position of each letter
(Y or N) gives the position of the link IPL port in the link IPL port
table (from I to 8).
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-11
IPL CANCELED
IPL CHECK xxx
The 3720 initialization is canceled by:
•
The operator (immediate function Terminate).
•
Operator console power-off when the IPL was requested from
the console.
•
The operator console switching from normal mode to test mode,
or
•
Two MOSS automatic re-IMLs during a CCU/scanner IPL.
The IPL ends abnormally. The check code (xxx) is also displayed
on the hex display of the control panel. Take note of the check
code for service personnel.
IPL CHECK FIB CLDP ABEND xxxx
The IPL ends abnormally. xxxx is the hexadecimal control program
loader/dump abend code.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
IPL COMPLETE
The IPL is successfully completed.
IPL COMPLETE + ERRORS
The IPL is complete although an error has been encountered.
If the error comes from a scanner, Alarm All is displayed.
For any other intermittent errors (for example, diskette errors) no
alarm is displayed. The 3720 should run normally.
•
If it does, take note of the error code for the record. No other
action is required.
•
If it does not, contact the appropriate service representative.
A BER is created: Type 01, ID 00.
25-12
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
LINK IPL DETECTED ON Lxxx
The control program loading/dumping is started on a link-attached
3720. A Set Initialization Mode (SIM) command has been detected
by the 3720.
Action:
•
If this message appears temporarily, no action is required.
•
If this message appears permanently, follow the problem
determination procedure for 3720 Model 2 or 12 load problems
in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
LINK TEST PROGRAM ABEND
A hardware error occurred at phase 3, while loading the stand-alone
link test. The stand-alone link test function is described in Chapter
14.
LINK TEST PROGRAM LOADED
The stand-alone link test program is loaded. The stand-alone link
test function is described in Chapter 14.
LOAD IN PROGRESS ON CA x
The control program is being loaded on a channel-attached 3720.
The progression of the load is indicated in MSA field k where CCU
storage addresses are displayed. x is the channel adapter number.
Action:
•
If this message appears temporarily, no action is required.
•
If this message appears permanently, follow the problem
determination procedure for 3720 Model 1 or 11 load problems
in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination Guide.
LOAD IN PROGRESS FROM DISK
The control program is being loaded from the disk. If this message
appears permanently, call your service representative.
LOAD IN PROGRESS ON Lxxx
The control program is being loaded on a link-attached 3720. The
progression of the load is indicated in MSA field k where CCU
storage addresses are displayed. xxx is the decimal communication
line address.
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-13
RPO DETECTED ON Lxxx
The Remote Power Off (RPO) command is detected on the
communication line xxx.
xxx is the decimal communication line address.
Action: If the Power Control switch is set to 'Network with
Auto-Power On', the 3720 will be powered off. If it is not powered
off, follow the problem determination procedure for being unable to
power off the 3720 Modell in the 3720/3721 Problem Determination
Guide.
SCANNER(S) NOT 1M LED: xxxx
Indicates that one or more scanners are not IMLed.
Action: Re-IML the indicated scanner(s). If the problem persists,
contact the appropriate service representative.
xxxx
identifies the scanner not IMLed.
8000 indicates scanner 1
2000 indicates scanner 3
1000 indicates scanner 4
Scanner 2 does not exist
Field x
IPL STOP
Indicates that the IPL stopped at the beginning of a phase or on operator request.
25-14
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Token-Ring Information
When the TRSS services or the token-ring interconnection function is active, line 3 of the machine status area
(MSA) contains information relative to the selected TRM card and TIC cards.
a
b
g
h
m*
d
j
c
n*
I
f
9*
0*
Field m*
Displays the TRA number: TRAxx, where xx is 02. This indicates which TRA has been
selected. The same numbering as for scanners is used.
Field n*
Displays the TRA mode.
This field indicates the mode of the selected TRA. It is updated after each TRA/TIC
select.
Field
0*
CONNECT
The TRA is operational and is under NTRI control.
DISCONNECT
The TRA is under MOSS control.
UNKNOWN
A non-recoverable error occurred during the connect or disconnect
process, or an MIOC/IOC error occurred during TRA Select.
Connect/Disconnect may be retried.
TIC SELECTED
TIC x, where x is 1 or 2.
(See Chapter 23 for correspondence between TIC number, TRA number and line
addresses). This field is updated after each TRA/TRI Select.
Field p*
TIC MODE
This field displays the current mode of the selected TIC and is updated after each
TRA/TIC Select and after each refresh.
IDLE
The TIC has not yet been reset by NTRI.
RESET
The TIC has been reset by NTRI but not yet initialized.
INITIALIZED
The TIC has been initialized but is not yet open or disabled. Initialization parameters
have been passed to the TIC by NTRI.
CLOSED
Indicates that the TIC has been opened since initialization but has since been closed (by
host).
FROZEN
An error was detected and the following actions were taken by NTRI:
•
Interrupts from this TIC were disabled.
•
DMA from this TIC was disabled.
•
The TIC was reset, but TIC RAM was left intact.
Chapter 25. Machine Status Area
25-15
DISABLED
The associated TRA has been disconnected by the MOSS. NTRI will not communicate
with this TIC.
Field q*
NTRI OFFLINE indicator:
Indicates that:
•
At the IPL of NCP, NTRI was not available and did not pass necessary TRSS
information to MOSS, or
•
An error occurred when trying to access NTRI control blocks needed by TRSS
services.
Several functions which depend upon NTRI will not be available. This field is updated
after each function selection from the secondary menu.
25-16
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 26. Event Log
Use the event log function to display BERs and alarms.
The box event record file collects information on errors and events. Each piece of
information is referred to as a BER.
•
A BER created for an error is always associated with an Alarm. This alarm
follows immediately the BER. In this case, perform the action required for
that alarm.
•
A BER created for an event requires no specific action.
When the BER file is full, the next BER to arrive overrides the oldest BER in the
file. BERs are stored in the order of arrival. Use the time stamp to determine
which BER most recent.
You may display three types of information on the BERs:
1. The summary of all the BERs and alarms in the file (BER Summary screen)
2.
The list of all the BERs for a specific component or of all the alarms (BER
List screen)
3.
The detail of a specific BER (BER Detail screen).
The BER file may be printed at the host. The print procedure as well as the
transfer of the file to the host is documented in Advanced Communication Function
for Network Control Program and System Support Programs for the 3720:
Diagnosis Guide.
A BER does not have to be created for every error/event.
You can use the line threshold function described in Chapter 27 to set BER
creation for a number of errors/events.
Event log messages are listed in Chapter 24.
Selection:
To position the cursor
o
(ISEN)
To select the event log function
The BER Summary screen is first displayed.
Chapter 26. Event Log
26-1
BER Summary
When you select the Event Log function, the BER Summary screen is first
displayed.
Machine Status Area
CUSTotER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: EVENT LOG DISPLAY
-->
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA)
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
SERIAL NUHBER:
3720-1
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
e o
BER SUHHARY
TYPE PENDING
SEL tWE
BERS
21
1 CA
(CHANNEL ADAPTERS)
10
(TRANSMISSION SUBSYSTEM)
11
2 TSS
20
(CONTROL PROGRAM)
10
12
3CP
10
(CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT)
<4 CCU
13
(110 CONTROL)
14
0
:I IOC
6 HOSS (MAINTENANCE OPERATOR SUBSYSTEM) 01
58
7 ALARM
22
8 TRSS (TOKEN RING SUBSYSTEM)
1:1
0
9 ALL (ALL FILE CONTENTS)
141
00
- ENTER SEL
G
•
DATE 1ST BER
tt1IDD HH: HH
06/0<4 12:02
0:1/10 09:02
0<4/09 08: 03
06/01 10:02
06/05 11:53
06/05 09:12
PF3: ALARM
e
TOTAL
IN FILE
21
20
10
10
0
58
22
0
1<41
OR NAME ->
G
Selection number. Use this number to display the list of all the BERs for
that specific component.
G
CA, TSS, CP, CCU, IOC, MOSS, or TRSS is the name of the component
that you enter to display the list of all the BERs for that specific component.
You enter ALARMS to display the list of all the alarms recorded in the
BER file.
You enter ALL to display the list of all the BERs and ALARMS recorded in
the BER file.
G
e
o
o
e
26-2
Full name of the component. Do not use it to display a BER List screen.
The BER type (service personnel only).
The number of BERs that are not yet flagged. (See BER List screen, column
e·)
The date and time of the oldest BER in this category that is not flagged
(pending BER).
The total number of BERs, flagged or not.
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
BER List
To display a BER List screen, enter, from the BER Summary screen, either a
SEL# or a NAME.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOHER 10:
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: EVENT LOG DISPLAY
-->
SYSTEM IIifIUT AREA (SIA)
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
0
SEL
0
06/CM
06/CM
10 06/CM
06/04
8
06/CM
7
12
11:53
11
11:~
6
4
•
DATE/TIME FLAG
11:35
11: 14
11:05
06/CM 11:CM
06/0:5 09: 13
06/0:509:0:5
TYPE ID
LIST
PF2: CCU FNCTN
0
TOTAL::58
01 00 PGH CHK IN LVL07 AT 12120
01 00 PGH CHK IN LVL07 AT 12120
01 00 PGH CHK IN LVL07 AT 12120
01 06 CCU IPL ABEND OF17
01 00 PGH CHIC IN LVL07 AT 13MO
01 01 CCU HARDCHK
06/0:5 09:04
1
06/0509:02
MOSS LYL1
OR NAtE
-->
PF7:BACKWARD
PF3: ALARt1
ERROR DESCRIPTION
HOSSLYLO
HOSSLYLO
MOSSLYLO
HOSSLYLO
MOSS APPL
HOSSLYL1
HOSS DISK
MOSS APPL
HOSS LYLO
PF4:BER SUMMARY
4!ossG
4)
NAtE
3
2
- ENTER SEL
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
01 00 PGH CHK IN LVL07 AT 12120
01 06 CCU IPL ABEND OF17
01 01 CCU HARDCHK
01 03 1/0 BUS PARITY ERROR FILE:CHGHDJIB
PF8:FORWARD
On the first line, the BER type and the total number of BERs for the selected
component are displayed.
o
o
•
Selection number. Use this number to display the detail of a specific BER.
The date and time at which the BER was recorded. The date is four digits
defining month and day. EP does not handle the date, and displays 00/00.
The time is four digits defining hour and minute. Under NCP, the date and
time come from the host. If the host is remote, the time recorded on the
BER may differ from the 3720 time.
The hexadecimal flag value (service personnel only).
4) The origin name. This name should not be confused with the component
name on the BER Summary screen, column O. It may be used also to list
all the BERs having the same origin: CA, CS, or LINE.
•
The BER type (service personnel only).
G
The BER identification (service personnel only).
o
The error description (up to 40 characters).
An asterisk (*) at the end of the error description indicates that the
description is truncated. For the complete description of the error, display
the BER Detail screen.
Chapter 26. Event Log
26-3
From the BER List screen, you may display:
•
The details of a specific BER, by entering a SEL# (see BER Detail screen).
•
The list of BERs having the same origin, by entering an origin name (NAME
on the BER List screen), which are CAx, CSx, or LINEx. Replace x by the
number of the channel adapter (CA), scanner (CS), or line.
For example, if you enter CSI, you will display the list of all the BERs for
scanner 1.
•
The list of BERs for a specific component, by entering CA, TSS, CP, CCU,
IOC, or MOSS.
•
The list of all the Alarms, by entering ALARMS.
•
The list of all the BERs of the BER file by entering ALL.
PF Keys
PF4: To display the BER Summary screen.
PF7: To display the newer BERs for the same component.
PF8: To display the older BERs for the same component.
26-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
BER Detail
To display a BER Detail screen, enter a SEL# from the BER List screen. The
BER Detail screen may be used to display the full description of a BER that was
truncated on a BER List screen.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: EVENT LOG DISPLAY
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) •••>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
SEL 8
DISK 1/0
SERIAL NUMBER:
3720-1
PFl: I10VE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
BER DETAIL
FlAG 00
OATE:06/05 TIHE:09:13 TYPE:01 10:03
BUS PARITY ERROR FILE: CHGt1DJIB CHRR:2B010901
PF4:BER sutltARY
PF5:BER LIST
PF7:PREVIOUS BER
PF8:NEXT BER
PF Keys
PF4: To display the BER Summary screen.
PF5: To display the BER List screen starting from the BER displayed on the
BER Detail screen.
PF7: To display the BER Detail screen of the previous BER in the BER list.
PF8: To display the BER Detail screen of the next BER in the BER list.
Chapter 26. Event Log
26-5
26-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 27. Line Threshold
Use the line threshold function to change the level at which a BER is created.
Each line has a value, and all the lines in the same LIe have the same value. The
values you assign to the lines depend upon local maintenance and fault reporting
requirements. F or example, in the controller the traffic on one line or set of lines
may be more critical than on the rest of the lines. It might be better for the
former to have a lower threshold than the rest of the lines so that more BERs are
created to give forewarning of developing problems.
The default value for any line is 4. If you enter line threshold values of 2 or 3,
they will be forced to 1. If you enter 0, you will get the message INYALID
INPUT.
On the displays shown on the following page, note that:
•
Installed scanners are flagged with an asterisk (*).
•
LIe positions for which a LIe can be plugged have a default threshold value
of 1.
•
Positions that do not exist, and thus cannot have a LIe, are given a default
threshold value of o.
To position the cursor
Selection:
800
To select the line threshold function
Chapter 27. Line Threshold
27-1
The current line threshold values for each LIe are displayed:
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE THRESHOLD
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) -=.>
T: TERMINATE
OFF: LOGOFF
3720-1
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF1: HOVE TO SIA
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
THRESHOLD DISPLAY
LIC POSITION
LIC1
LIC2
LIC3
LIC4
LIC5
LIC6
LIC7
... S. 1
LINES
... S. 3
LINES
4 00-03
4 04-07
4 32-35
4 36-39
4 08-11
4 40-43
4 44-47
4
4
4
4
12-15
16-19
20-23
24-27
LIC8
... S. 4
LINES
4 48-51
4 52-55
4 56-59
4 60-63
PF5:THRESHOLD UPDATE
To update a line threshold press PF5
To quit press PF4
27-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER ID:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE THRESHOLD
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
37XX-l
PF1: MOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUMBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARM
THRESHOLD UPDATE
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (0-27 32-63)
==>
PF5:THRESHOLD DISPLAY
Enter the address of the line and press:
Chapter 27. Line Threshold
27-3
The current threshold for that line is displayed and you are invited to enter a new
value.
Machine Status Area
CUSTOMER 10:
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: LINE THRESHOLD
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA) ===>
T: TERMINATE OFF: LOGOFF
PF1:
3720-1
HOVE TO SIA
SERIAL NUHBER:
PF2: CCU FNCTN
PF3: ALARH
THRESHOLD UPDATE
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (0-27 32-83)
CURRENT THRESHOLD: 4
._> 23
LIC 8 S.l
- ENTER NEW VALUE
==>
WARNING: ANY VALUE LOWER THAN 4 WILL BE FORCED TO 1
PF3: THRESHOLD DISPLAY
Enter the new value and press: (
I
SEN)
)
Or press ( PFS ) to return to the line threshold display.
If you have entered a new value remember to update your records with all the
new threshold values.
27-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Chapter 28. Microcode Change from the Control Panel
You will receive four diskettes labeled "Normal" or "Backup". Use the backup
set.
Use the following procedure when you need to implement microcode changes
from the control panel. (To implement them from the operator console, see
Chapter 15).
Before you start, ask the network operator to deactivate your communication
controller from the network.
1.
Mount the primary diskette.
2.
Set the Function Select switch to Microcode Change.
3.
Press the General Reset switch to start the microcode change.
4.
Look at the hexadecimal display for the progression of the microcode change.
Microcode change is starting.
5.
Open and close the diskette drive latch to confirm the start.
xxy is the last three digits of the EC number, where y
(the suffix) may be a letter A-F.
6.
Check the EC number and suffix on the diskette tag.
- If it is not the correct number or suffix, restart with correct diskette.
- If it is the correct number or suffix, go to step 7.
7.
Open and close diskette drive latch to confirm.
Primary diskette checking in progress.
8.~
Mount the secondary diskette.
Secondary diskette checking in progress.
9.~
Mount the primary diskette.
Microcode change from primary diskette in progress.
Chapter 28. Microcode Change from the Control Panel
28-1
10.~
Mount secondary diskette.
Microcode change from secondary diskette in progress.
Microcode change successfully completed.
11. Remove the secondary diskette and store it.
12. Perform IML function for MOSS:
•
Set Function Select switch to MOSS IML.
•
Press the Function Start switch.
Either of the following codes will be displayed, depending on the MOSS
state when you started this procedure:
MOSS IML function is successful and MOSS is omine.
MOSS IML function is successful and MOSS is alone.
\
13. END OF PROCEDURE. The 3720 may now be returned to normal
operation (see 3720/3721 Operator's Guide).
28-2
3720/3721 Commu~ication Controllers Extended Services
Error Codes
The list below gives error codes, their meaning, and corrective action.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
The microcode change failed because you pressed the Function Start
switch.
- Press the General Reset switch. The procedure will start.
Mounted diskette is not a primary one.
- Mount a primary diskette. The procedure continues.
Mounted diskette is not a secondary one.
- Mount a secondary diskette. The procedure continues.
Mounted primary diskette is not the one already checked.
- Mount correct diskette.
Mounted secondary diskette is not the one already checked.
- Mount correct diskette.
Diskettes do not belong to the same pair.
- Mount the correct secondary diskette.
Disk error. Microcode change failed. Contact the appropriate
service representative.
Primary diskette error. Microcode change failed.
•
Retry from step 1 with the normal diskettes and order a new set
from IBM.
•
If it fails, contact the appropriate service representative.
Chapter 28. Microcode Change from the Control Panel
28-3
Secondary diskette error. Microcode change failed.
•
Retry from step 1 with the normal diskettes and order a new set
from IBM.
•
If it fails, contact the appropriate service representative.
File not found on disk. Contact the appropriate sefYice
representative.
File not found on disk. Contact the appropriate sefYice
representative.
File smaller on diskette. Contact the appropriate sefYice
representative.
Disk directory capacity is exceeded: Contact the appropriate service
representative.
Diskette not ready. Close the diskette drive latch. The procedure
continues.
Diskette not ready. Microcode change failed. Restart from step 1.
Contact the appropriate sefYice representative.
EC number is not valid. Microcode change failed.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
Contact the appropriate service representative.
Microcode error.
Contact the appropriate sefYice representative.
Check that CE switch 3 is set "ON" when doing the microcode
upgrade.
28-4
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
List of Abbreviations
AARR
ABEND
AC
ACF
ANS
ASCII
ATTN
BER
bps
BREAK
BSC
BT
CA
CCITT
allow additional register range bit
abnormal end of task
address compare
advanced communications function
auto-network shutdown
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange
attention key
box event record
bits per second
break key
binary synchronous communication
branch trace
CCU
CCU FNCTN
CCW
CDF
CLAB
CLDP
CNM
CNSL
CP
CPT
CRC
CS
CSP
CSS
CTS
channel adapter
The International Telegraph and
Telephone Consultative Committee
central control unit
ccu function
channel status word
configuration data file
channel and line attachment base
controller load/dump program
communication network management
console
control program (NCP, EP)
checkpoint trace
cyclic redundancy check
communication scanner
communication scanner processor
control subsystem
clear to send (signal)
DeE
DCM
DLE
DSR
DSRS
DTE
DTR
data circuit-terminating equipment
diagnostic control monitor
data link escape (BSC)
da ta set ready (signal)
data signaling rate selection (signal)
data terminal equipment
data terminal ready (signal)
EBCDIC
extended binary-coded decimal
interchange code
engineering change
end of message
end of transmission (BSC)
emulation program
emergency power off
emulation subchannel
emulation subchannel high
emulation subchannel low
end-of-transmission-block character
(BSC)
ETX
end-of-text character (BSC)
FES
FNCTN
front-end scanner (card)
function (CCU FNCTN) (3727
operator console key)
GCF
graphic configuration file
HDX
HW
half-duplex
hardware
IAR
ICC
IML
IOC
IPL
instruction address register
internal clock control
initial microcode load(er)
input/output control
initial program load(er)
L
LAB
LABA
LABB
LABC
LCD
LDF
LIC
LICl
LIC2 '
LIC3
LIC4A
LIC4B
LSR
LSSD
load (instruction)
line attachment base
line attachment base type A
line attachment base type B
line attachment base type C
line control definition (storage)
line description file
line interface coupler
line interface coupler type 1 (card)
line interface coupler type 2 (card)
line interface coupler type 3 (card)
line interface coupler type 4A (card)
line interface coupler type 4B
local storage register (CSP)
level sensitive scan design
MES
MLT
MOSS
MSA
MSLA
miscellaneous equipment specifications
machine load table (diskette)
maintenance and operator subsystem
machine status area (console)
multi-subchannel line adapter
NAUN
nearest address upstream neighbor
(CNM)
Network Communications Control
Facility (CNM)
network control Program
Network Problem Determination
Application (CNM)
non return-to-zero inverted
NCP token-ring interconnection
NCCF
EC
EOM
EOT
EP
EPO
ESC
ESCH
ESCL
ETB
NCP
NPDA
NRZI
NTRI
OEM
OLTEP
OLTT
original equipment manufacturer
online test execution program
online test system
online terminal test
PCF
primary control field (storage)
OLTS
List of Abbreviations
X-I
pcw
PEP
PF
RAS
processor control word
partitioned emulation program
program function (3727 operator
console keys)
SYN
SYSGEN
synchronous character (BSC)
system generation
TCAM
TIC
TPS
TRA
TRI
TRM
TRSA
TRSS
TSS
TTA
telecommunication access method
token-ring interconnection coupler
two-processor switch (feature)
token-ring adapter
token-ring interconnection
token-ring adapter multiplexer
token-ring subsystem attachment
token-ring subsystem
transmission subsystem
translate table area
UEPO
USASCII
unit emergency power off
(see ASCII)
VTAM
V.24
V.25
V.28
V.35
virtual telecommunication access
method
CCITT V.24 recommendation
CCITT V.25 recommendation
CCITT V.28 recommendation
CCITT V.35 recommendation
XREG
external registers
ROS
RPO
reliability, availability, and
serviceability
receive data (signal)
redrive (card)
ready for sending (signal) (or clear to
send CTS)
request/response header (SNA)
register to immediate operand
(instruction)
read-only storage
remote power off
SCF
SDF
SDLC
SELN
SES
SIT
SNA
SS
SSP
secondary control field (storage)
serial data field (storage)
synchronous data link control (SNA)
selection (3727 operator console key)
secondary status (storage)
scanner interface trace
Systems Network Architecture
start-stop
system support programs
X-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
RD
RDV
RFS
RH
RI
Glossary
This glossary defines all new terms and abbreviations
that are used in this manual. It also includes definitions
developed by the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO), and by the International
Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committe
(CCITT).
If you do not find the term you are looking for, refer to
the index or to the IBM Vocabulary for Data Processing,
Telecommunications, and Office Systems, GC20-1699.
addressing. A technique where the control station
selects, among the DTEs that share a transmission line,
the DTE to which it is going to send a message.
the host processor and comprises the Network Problem
Determination Application (NPDA) and the Network
Communication Control Facility (NCCF).
communication scanner. See scanner.
configuration data file (CDF). A file of the diskette that
contains a description of all the hardware features
(presence, type, address, and characteristics).
control panel. A panel on the 3720 that contains
switches and indicators for the use of the customer/~
operator and service personnel.
control subsystem (CSS). The part of the controller
that stores and executes the control program, and
monitors the data transfers over the channel and
transmission interfaces.
asynchronous transmission. Transmission where each
character is individually synchronized, usually by the use
of start and stop elements. The start-stop link protocol,
for example, uses asynchronous transmission (contrast
with synchronous transmission).
controller. The IBM 3720/3721 Communication
Controller and Expansion.
availability. The degree to which a system or resource
is ready when needed to process data.
customer engineer. A person who provides field services
for IBM products.
binary synchronous communication (BSC). A link
protocol for synchronous transmission of coded data
(see also synchronous transmission).
cyclic redundancy check (CRC). A method of error
checking performed at the receiving station after a block
check character has been received.
box error record (BER). Information about an error
detected by the controller. It is recorded on the diskette
and can be displayed on the operator console for error
analysis.
direct attachment. Attachment of a DTE to the
controller without a DCE.
central control unit (CCU). In the 3725, the processor
that executes the network control program and controls
the storage and channel adapters.
channel adapter (CA). A circuit that attaches a host
processor channel.
channel interface. The interface between the controller
and the host processors.
channel and line attachment base (CLAB). A board that
includes the first CAB and LAB of the controller.
diskette. A thin, flexible magnetic disk, and its
protective jacket, that records the 3720 microcode,
diagnostics, error logs, and monitored data.
duplex transmission. A simultaneous two-way
independent transmission in both directions (contrast
with half duplex).
Emulation Program (EP). A control program that
allows the 3720/3721 to emulate the functions of an
IBM 270X.
front-end scanner (FES). A circuit that scans the
transmission lines, serializes and de serializes the
transmitted characters, and manages the line services. It
is part of the scanner.
communication controller. A type of communication
control unit whose operations are controlled by one or
more programs stored and executed in the unit.
Examples are the IBM 3725 or the IBM 3720.
half-duplex. An alternate, one way at a time,
independent transmission (contrast with duplex).
Communication Network Management (CNM). An IBM
product program that assists the user in identifying
network problems from a control point. It is stored in
host processor. A data processing system connected to
and communicating with a user application network
through the controller (also called host).
Glossary
X -3
initial program load (IPL). The process by which a
configuration image is loaded into storage at the
beginning of a work day or after a system malfunction.
(that is, while the terminal is still connected to the
processing unit) with only minimal effect on the user's
normal operation.
input/output control (IOC). The circuit that controls
the input/output from/to the channel adapters, scanners,
and token-ring adapters, via the IOC bus.
operator console. The console that is used to operate
and service the 3720/3721 through the MOSS.
interface. A shared boundary between two machines.
internal clock circuit (ICC). An optional circuit that
provides, through the LICs, the clock control to the
DCEs or DTEs that need it.
partitioned emulation programming (PEP) extension. A
feature of NCP that permits some lines to operate in
network control mode while simultaneously operating
others in emulation mode.
line. See transmission line.
reliability. The ability of a functional unit to perform
its intended function under stated conditions for a stated
period of time.
line attachment base (LAB). The unit of modularity of
the transmission subsystem. It corresponds to one
board and includes mainly the scanners and the line
interface couplers.
scanner. A device that scans and controls the
transmission lines. It is composed of one
communication scanner processor (CSP) and one front
end scanner (FES).
line interface coupler (LIC). A circuit that attaches up
to four transmission cables to the controller.
serviceability. The capability to perform effective
problem determination, diagnosis, and repair on a data
processing equipment.
maintenance and operator subsystem (MOSS). The part
of the controller that provides operating and servicing
facilities to the customer's operator and customer
engineer.
microcode. Code, created by IBM, that is loaded in a
processor (the MOSS processor, for example) to replace
a hardware function. The microcode is not accessible to
the customer.
modem. (modulator-demodulator) A device that
modulates and demodulates signals transmitted over
data communication facilities. A modem is a DCE. It
may be integrated in the DTE.
multiplexing. The division of a transmission facility
into two or more channels by allotting the common
channel to several different channels, one at a time.
network. See user application network.
network control program (NCP). A program, generated
by the user from a library of IBM -supplied modules,
that operates the controller.
network control program token-ring interconnection. A
component of ACF/NCP allowing communications to
the IBM Token-Ring Network.
nonswitched line. A permanent dedicated transmission
line that connects two or more DTEs. The connection
can be point-to-point or multipoint. The line can be
leased or private - contrast with switched line.
online tests. Testing of a remote data station
concurrently with the execution of the user's programs
X-4
start-stop. A link protocol for asynchronous
transmission of coded data (see 'asynchronous
transmission').
switched line. A transmission line with which the
connections are established by dialing, only when data
transmission is needed. The connection is point-to-point
and uses a different transmission line each time it is
established - contrast with 'nonswitched line')
synchronous data link control (SDLC). A link protocol
for synchronous transmission of coded data (see also
'synchronous transmission').
synchronous transmission. Transmission where the
character synchronism is controlled by timing signals
generated at the sending and receiving stations. The
BSC or SDLC protocols, for example, use synchronous
transmission (contrast with 'asynchronous
transmission').
systems network architecture (SNA). The description of
the logical structure, formats, protocols, and operational
sequences for transmitting information units through
and controlling the configuration and operation of
networks.
timeout. The time interval allotted for certain
operations to occur.
token-ring adapter (TRA). An adapter that allows
attachment to the IBM Token-Ring Network. It
consists of one token-ring multiplexer (TRM) and of
one to four token-ring interconnection couplers (TICs).
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
token-ring interconnection (TRI). AMOSS function
that provides:
transmission interface. The interface between the
controller and the user application network.
•
Information on the status of TICs
•
Problem determination help
transmission line. The physical means for connecting
two or more DTEs (via DCEs). It can be nonswitched
or switched (also called a line).
•
Information on token-ring activity.
token-ring interconnection coupler (TIC). A circuit that
attaches to one IBM token-ring network.
token-ring interconnection display (TRID). A MOSS
function that provides information about the TIC ring
status.
token-ring multiplexer (TRM). An adapter that
connects up to four TICs to the IOC Bus.
token-ring subsystem (TRSS). A group of token-ring
adapters (TRAs) within a 3720.
transmission subsystem (TSS). The part of the
controller that controls the data transfers over the
transmission interface.
two-processor switch (TPS). A feature of the channel
adapter that connects a second channel to the same
adapter.
user-application network. A configuration of data
processing products, such as processors, controllers, and
terminals, established and operated by users for the
purpose of data processing or information exchange.
This configuration may use circuit-switched,
packet-switched, and leased-circuit services provided by
carriers or PTT (also called a user network).
token-ring subsystem attachment (TRSA). A TRM and
one TIC as a single entity for purposes of problem
determination by the NPDA.
Glossary
X -5
X-6
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
Index
AARR bit setting codes 21-19
activating remote maintenance password 5-7, 5-8
address compare and branch trace parameter display
function 19-2
address trace block 21-26
address trace function NCP 21-21
address trace table 21-25
alarms**
alerts, VTAM**
alter CCU data 19-8
alter function 19-8
applying MCFs 16-3
asterisk character 26-3
basic frame display 8-4
BER 26-1, 27-1
detail 26-5
box event record 26-1
branch trace buffer 19-18, 19-33
branch trace buffer allocation 19-13
branch trace extra records 19-34
break key*
bypass ccu check function 20-2
bypass IOC check function 20-3
catalog procedure 22-22
CCB areas and byte expansion 21-38
CCB display of character control block function 21-37
CCU function selection vii
CCU functions 19-1
CCU functions and 3720 functions, switching
between viii
CCU normal mode function 20-5
CCU state function 19-3
CDF function 8-1
CEOI - text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP) 22-45
change the automatic dump/load option setting 18-3
channel adapter reset (MSLA) function, EP/PEP 21-45
channel adapter state and register display
messages 24-17
channel adapter state function 19-4
*
**
channel adapter trace function, NCP 21-28
channel adapters disabled lamps*
channel discontact function, NCP 21-20
channel-related messages**
codes 13-15
COMM NOT READY 2**
configuration data file (CDF) Function 8-1
console link test**
console logoff*
console problems**
local**
remote**
control panel
3720 model 1*
3720 model 2*
control program procedure messages 24-19
control program procedures 22-1
copy a cataloged procedure 22-16
correspondence between line addresses and
scanners 23-1
CPOI - SDLC test frames (NCP) 22-23
CP02 - 3270 BSC general poll (NCP /EP) 22-23
CP03 - 2740 start/stop poll (NCP/EP) .22-23
CP04 - start address trace (NCP) 22-23
CP05 - stop address trace (NCP) 22-23
CP06 - X.21 switched line test (NCP) 22-23
create/copy a procedure 22-8
customer identification update 5-11
customer identification*
data exchange function 21-3
data exchange messages 24-24
date function 20-7
deactivating the remote maintenance password 5-9
DEL CHAR key*
directory function of cataloged procedures 22-4
disk function messages 24-25
disk functions 15-1
disk IPL information function 18-1
disk IPL information messages 24-29
disk problems**
diskette initialization 15-20
diskette mode*
Disp instruction 22-15
display a cataloged procedure 22-6
display alter messages 24-30
display CCU storage 19-8
display disk ipl information 18-2
display local store registers 19-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
Index X-7
display long function 19-15
display of character control block (CCB) function,
EP/PEP 21-37
display of register function, NCP 21-18
display of storage function, EP 21-44
display of storage function, NCP 21-17
display/alter function 19-8
displaying logon attempt counters 5-10
displaying or resetting logon attempt counters 5-10
displaying passwords 5-6
dump/load option setting 18-3
dynamic store function, NCP 21-15
ec microcode installation 15-3
End instruction 22-15
EP - display of storage function 21-44
EP - line test function 21-31
EP - subchannel switching (MSLA) function 21-46
EP functions 21-1
EP/PEP - channel adapter reset (MSLA)
function 21-45
EP/PEP - display of character control block (CCB)
function 21-37
EP/PEP - line trace and scanner interface trace (SIT)
function 21-40
EP/PEP - present status on channel function 21-43
erase a cataloged procedure 22-17
event log 26-1
event log messages 24-31
examples of control program procedure creation 22-39
execute a cataloged procedure 22-20
expansion frame 8-6
FEOI - install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP)
function
function area *
function messages 24-1, 24-13
FUNCTION ON SCREEN*
FUNCTION PENDING*
Goto instruction
22-12, 22-13
22-41
Halt instruction 22-12, 22-l3
hazardous port swap 10-8
hex display*
hexadecimal codes**
host messages**
how to execute NCP and EP functions
21-1
IML MOSS (with reset) from consoles*
IML MOSS (without reset) from the consoles
IML MOSS from control panel*
IML one scanner 3-1
IML one scanner messages 24-32
IML one scanner*
immediate function selection vii
immediate functions 20-1
initialization, 3720 model 1*
initialization, 3720 model 2*
INS CHAR key*
install a ZAP (NCP or NCP/PEP) 22-39
2-1
LCS l3-15
LDF function 9-1
level 2 display codes 21-35
level 3 display codes 21-36
level 3 error codes 21-36
level 3 interrupt function 20-4
LIC wrap l3-1
line addresses and scanners, correspondence
between 23-1
LINE CHECK 2**
line description file (LDF) 9-1
line description file messages 24-35
line interface display 11-1
line interface display messages 24-36
line messages**
line problems**
line test codes 21-14
line test function, EP 21-31
line test function, NCP 21-7
line threshold 27-1
line trace and scanner interface trace (SIT) function,
EP/PEP 21-40
line trace and scanner interface trace codes 21-42
link IPL ports 6-1
link test messages 24-39
*
**
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
X-8
3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
link tests**
load link test requester 14-5
load problems**
3720 model 1**
3720 model 2**
local console logoff*
local console logon procedure*
local console password 5-1, 5-4
local console password recovery 5-12
local console problems**
logoff function 20-6
logoff procedure*
LOGOFF*
logon procedure
local console*
remote console*
Loop instruction 22-15
machine level table function 17-1
machine status area (MSA) 25-1
machine type*
management password 5-4
management password recovery 5-12
M CF function 16-1
MCF history table 16-6
M CF messages 24-40
menu v, vii
CCU functions vii
immediate functions vii
3720 functions v
messages 24-1
messages list 24-2
microcode change 25-1, 28-1
microcode fixe function 16-1
MLT function 17-1
modem loop back 13-1
modem tests**
modify a cataloged procedure 22-18
MOSS IML (with reset) from consoles*
MOSS IML (without reset) from the consoles
MOSS IML from control panel*
MOSS Inoperative lamp on**
MOSS Inoperative lamp*
MOSS offline function 19-20
MOSS online function 19-21
MSA 25-1
MSLA function error codes 21-47
*
**
NCP - address trace function 21-21
NCP - channel adapter trace function 21-28
NCP - channel discontact function 21-20
NCP - display of register function 21-18
NCP - line test 21-7
NCP display of storage function 21-17
NCP dynamic store function 21-15
NCP functions 21-1
NCP scanner interface trace (SIT) 21-30
NCP transmit control byte 13-21
NetView messages**
no answer after correct password**
no IBM copyright screen**
local console**
remote console**
NPDA V3 messages**
NPDA V3R2 (VSE)**
NTT cable 13-1
NTT cable wrap 13-1
OFF*
one scanner IML 3-1
one scanner IML *
operator console characteristics*
operator console information messages 24-1, 24-76
operator console problems**
local**
remote**
operator control messages 24-1, 24-69
operator set instruction (OSET) 22-11
OSET instruction 22-11
2-1
panel functions 1-1
panel functions messages 24-43
panel/console switch 1-1
password display 5-6
password management 5-1
password management function 5-1
password management messages 24-44
password recovery 5-12
password recovery setup instructions 5-12
password update 5-3
permanent activation of the remote maintenance
password 5-8
permanent ringing**
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
Index X-9
PFI key*
PF2 key*
PF3 key*
PLS function 7-1
port swap 10-1
port swap messages 24-45
position disk recording arm 15-23
power check lamp on **
power check lamp*
power off 3720 model 1*
power off 3720 model 2*
power on lamp*
power on, 3720 model 1*
power on, 3720 model 2*
power-off problems**
3720 model 1**
3720 model 2**
power-on problems**
3720 model 1**
3720 model 2**
precataloged control program procedures 22-23
present status on channel function, EP jPEP 21-43
programmable line speed (PLS) 7-1
programmable line speed messages 24-48
purge the dump file 18-3
query CCU date and time function
20-7
re-initialization, 3720 model 1*
re-initialization, 3720 model 2*
refused port swap 10-6
remote console active lamp on**
remote console active lamp*
remote console in customer mode 5-1
remote console in maintenance mode 5-1
remote console logoff*
remote console logon procedure*
remote console problems**
remote customer console password recovery 5-12
remote customer password 5-5
remote maintenance console password recovery 5-12
remote maintenance password 5-5
remote maintenance password activation 5-7, 5-8
remote maintenance password deactivation 5-9
requester 14-1
requesting controller 14-1
reset address compare function 19-22
reset address compare messages 24-49
reset branch trace function 19-22
*
**
reset CCU check function 20-9
reset CCU function 20-8
reset CCUjLSSD function 19-23
reset CCU jLSSD messages 24-50
reset I-step function 20-11
reset IOC function 20-10
resetting logon attempt counters 5-10
resetting ports 10-2
responder 14-1
responder limitation 14-11
responding controller 14-1
restore disk from diskettes 15-15
restoring MCFs 16-5
save disk onto diskettes 15-8
scanner IML 3-1
scanner IML*
scanner interface trace (SIT) function 21-40
scanner-related messages**
scanners and line addresses, correspondence
between 23-1
SCF 13-15
SDLC test frame 14-3·
SDLC test frames (NCP) 22-24
selecting CCU functions vii
selecting immediate functions vii
selecting 3720 functions v
selective scanner IML*
serial number*
SES 13-15
set address compare function 19-24
set address compare messages 24-51
set branch trace function 19-30
set branch trace messages 24-51
set I-step function 20-12
set immediate instruction (SETI) 22-11
SETI instruction 22-11
SIT, NCP scanner interface trace 21-30
stand-alone link test messages 24-51
stand-alone link tests 14-1
start address trace (NCP) 22-31
start CCU function 20-13
stop address trace (NCP) 22-33
stop CCU function 20-14
stop on CCU check function 20-15
stop on IOC check function 20-16
subchannel switching (MSLA) function, EP 21-46
switching between 3720 functions and CCU
functions viii
switching control to EP mode 21-6
switching control to NCP mode 21-5
switching ports 10-2
switching to diskette mode*
3720/3721 Communication Control/ers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Control/ers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
X-I0 3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
SYSTEM INPUT AREA (SIA)*
tailgate wrap 13-1
tailgate wrap test**
temporary activation of the remote maintenance
password 5-7
terminal disconnected for remote console**
terminate CCU function 19-40
terminate function 20-17
terminate*
terminating CCU functions 19-40
text to 2740 - SIS (EP, PEP) 22-39
text to 2740 - SIS (NCP) 22-39, 22-58
text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (EP, PEP) 22-39, 22-51
text to 3270 - BSC in EBCDIC (NCP) 22-39
time function 20-7
token-ring
token-ring interconnection (messages) 24-61
token-ring interconnection 12-1, 25-15
problem determination**
unable to power off the 3720**
model 1**
unable to power off 3720**
model 2**
unable to power on the 3720**
model 1**
unable to power on 3720**
model 1**
model 2**
unsuccessful load**
3720 model 1**
3720 model 2**
updating passwords 5-3
updating the customer identification
*
**
V.24 non-switched DCE attachment 11-10
V.24 switched DCE attachment 11-11
V.24/V.35 direct attachment 11-12
V.25 (autocall) 11-14
V.35 DCE attachment 11-13
VTAM alerts* *
Wait instruction 22-12, 22-14
wrap test 13-1
wrap test messages 24-62
X.21 DCE attachment 11-15
X.21 Switched Line Test (NCP)
22-34
INumerics I
5-11
2740 start/stop poll (NCP/EP) 22-29
3270BSC general poll (NCP/EP) 22-26
3720 function selection v
3720 functions and CCU functions, switching
between viii
3720 IPL from the operator console 4-1
3720 IPL messages 24-67
3720 model 1 control panel'"
3720 model 1 drops power*'"
3720 model 1 initialization*
3720 model 1 power off*
3720 model 1 power on'"
3720 model 1 re-initialization*
3720 model 2 control panel*
3720 model 2 drops power* *
3720 model 2 initialization'"
3720 model 2 power off*
3720 model 2 power on *
3720 model 2 re-initialization*
3720 procedure tools 22-2
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
Index X-11
*
**
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Operator's Guide, GA33-0065
3720/3721 Communication Controllers, Problem Determination Guide, GA33-0086
X-12 3720/3721 Communication Controllers Extended Services
!
IBM 3720 Models 1, 2, 11, and 12
IBM 3721 Models 1 and 2
Communication Controllers
Extended Services
Order No. GA33-0066-2
We would greatly appreciate your comments about this manual.
Was this manual easy to read and understand?
Did you find the information you required?
Could you follow the instructions?
Was there anything missing?
All suggestions will be considered for the next edition of this manual.
Thank you for taking the time and trouble to fill out this form.
If you would like a reply, please give details overleaf.
No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the USA. (Elsewhere, an IBM office or
representative will be happy to forward your comments or you may mail directly
to the address in the Edition Notice on the back of the title page.)
Note: Staples can cause problems with automated mail sorting equipment.
Please use pressure sensitive or other gummed tape to seal this form.
READER'S
COMMENT
FORM
GA33-0066-2
Reader's Comment Form
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK. N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE:
International Business Machines Corporation
Department 6R1 LG
180 Kost Road
Mechanicsburg
PA 17055
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
If you would like a reply, please print:
Your Name
- --
----- - --------_
-.-
Company Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - Department--------Street Address
Ciry --------------------------------------------State - - - - - - - - - - - Zip Code
IBM Branch Office serving you
IBM 3720 Models 1,2, 11, and 12
IBM 3721 Models 1 and 2
Communication Controllers
Extended Services
Order No. GA33-0066-2
We would greatly appreciate your comments about this manual.
Was this manual easy to read and understand?
Did you find the information you required?
Could you follow the instructions?
Was there anything missing?
All suggestions will be considered for the next edition of this manual.
Thank you for taking the time and trouble to fill out this form.
If you would like a reply, please give details overleaf.
No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the USA. (Elsewhere, an IBM office or
representative will be happy to forward your comments or you may mail directly
to the address in the Edition Notice on the back of the title page.)
Note: Staples can cause problems with automated mail sorting equipment.
Please use pressure sensitive or other gummed tape to seal this form.
READER'S
COMMENT
FORM
GA33-0066-2
Reader's Comment Form
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK. N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE:
International Business Machines Corporation
Department 6R1 LG
180 Kost Road
M echan icsbu rg
PA 17055
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
If you would like a reply, please print:
Your Name
----------_
-.-
--
Company Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - Department--------Street Address
City
State - - - - - - - - - - - Zip Code
IBM Branch Office serving you
------
--- -- --------- - - ,-
"-./"
"
GA33-0066-2
Printed in USA
GR33-0066-02
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2013:01:09 12:06:23-08:00 Modify Date : 2013:01:09 13:00:43-08:00 Metadata Date : 2013:01:09 13:00:43-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.52 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:a4ce1faa-8c09-4baa-9759-34aad6faa4b9 Instance ID : uuid:27ded057-4f46-4687-8092-33c25dbe92f0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 514EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools